Home

HP 8719D/20D/22D Network Analyzer Service Guide

1. Assembly Replacement and Pest Repair Procedures 14 11 Display Lamp and Assembly Tools Required 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 m Ib Removal 1 Remove the front panel assembly refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Remove the three screws item 1 that attach the display to the front panel 3 Remove the four screws item 2 disconnecting the accessories from the display 4 Disconnect the cable item 3 from the Al assembly 5 Disconnect the display lamp cable item 4 6 Lift the display from the front panel and remove the three screws item 5 from the outside of the display 7 Pull the lamp item 6 out with a curving side motion as shown Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 12 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Display Lamp and Assembly places 5 places 5 We 1 41 3 places 5 Plastic channel for fluorescent tube Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 13 Rear Panel Assembly Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver
2. ONL 1 SOURCE ADJUST 1 SOURCE ADJUST SERVICE MODES 1 4 MENU 1 MENU j i source 1 source Tune FRACN TUNE NT f DAC 1 DAT HUM o ay sem SRO ADJUST Low BAND 1 LOW BAMD DAC DAC NUM HIGH BAHO MO DAC num MEN PLL AUTO 1 if HIGH BAND 1 Dl yf i 1 gt SIDE MAIN EWR SET CLOCK FLL DIAG DAC i on OFF i Me i CONF GURE PLL FAUSE ON ON off CCOMTI LIMIT MENU MORE iA g i SERVICE 1 1 1 1 TRANSFORM MENU 1 RETURN RETUPN MENU RETURN porn l TESIS nae dete E NE 21 ene l TEST PEEK POKE SERVE MODE opt ONE MENU MORE MENU INSTRUMENT SELF MODE DIAGNOSE ADDRESS IF GAIN SERVICE SERVICE AT MENU MODES a ANALOG BUS PEE IF GAIN on OFF PORE IF GAIN POKE OFF FIRMWARE REVISION RETURN STORE on OFF RESET MEMOR RETURN RETURN Figure 10 4 Service Feature M enus 10 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Modes Menu To access this menu press 1 Note allows you to control and monitor various circuits for troubleshooting tests the A13 and A14 fractional N circuits It allows you to directly control and monitor the outpu
3. FHHOLD FH BIAS API 1 5 LATCH sb631d Figure 7 5 A14 TTL Signals at A14TP3 a If these signals are bad replace A14 a If they are good replace A13 Source Troubleshooting 7 15 A52 Pulse Generator Check With Oscilloscope 1 Monitor the 1st IF signal at the output of A65 A sampler disconnect the SMB cable from A65 and connect an oscilloscope to the sampler IF output Connect a frequency counter to port 1 Then perform these steps a Press PRESET PRESET FACTORY SERVICE SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to set the fractional N VCO to 180 MHz b Press SRC AD L knob to disci the DAC naaber io about 4013 Readjust the DAC number as required to measure an output frequency of about 0 91 GHz Note The frequency counter may have to be removed from port 1 to provide enough of a reflection to see on the scope 2 Now the oscilloscope should display the IF signal as a sine wave of about 10 MHz The actual frequency can be expressed as this equation Oscilloscope frequency counter frequency 180 MHz x harmonic 3 Repeat steps 1b and 2 using the information in the second through fourth rows of Table 7 4 Substitute DAC NI BAND with the appropriate band Table 7 4 First IF Settings Approximate Approximate DAC Number Source Frequency Displayed On Counter 4013 0 910 GHz Mid 3 610GHz
4. 14 40 15 Safety and Licensing Notice wu Maro E Ge Sse eas 15 1 Certification 15 1 1 15 1 Shipment for Service 15 2 Safety Symbols 15 4 Instrument Markings aaa 15 4 General Safety Considerations 15 5 Safety Earth 15 5 Before Applying Power 15 5 Servicing oio xou Se tent ROM YR rods 15 5 Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements 15 6 Compliance with German Noise Requirements 15 7 A Determining System M easurement Uncertainties Sources of Measurement A 2 Sources of Systematic Errors A 2 Sources of Random Errors A 2 Sources of Drift 8 Sources of Additional Measurement Errors A 3 Measurement Uncertainty Equations A 4 Reflection Uncertainty Equations 4 Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty Erm A 4 Reflection Phase Uncertainty Erp A 5 Transmission Uncertainty Equations A 6 Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Etm A 6 Contents 12 Transmission Phase Uncertainty Etp A 7 Dynamic Accuracy veau buen RARI ee E A 7 Determining Expected System Performance 8
5. 3 places sb 79a Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 17 Source Assemblies Tools Required a T 15 TORX screwdriver 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in Ib a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover refer to Covers in this chapter 2 Remove the front panel refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter 3 Remove the source module cover A58 M A D S Removal 4 Disconnect the cables item 2 and item 3 for all but Option 400 from the M A DIS 5 Remove the four screws item 6 from each comer of the assembly Oscillator Removal 6 Remove the three screws item 1 that attach the source module to the analyzer 7 Disconnect the cables item 2 and item 3 for all but Option 400 from the M A DIS 8 Remove the four screws item 4 and item 5 from the source module bracket Remove the bracket 9 Lift the source module out of the analyzer 10 Remove a screw item 7 from the back of the oscillator 11 Disconnect attaching RF cables 14 18 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Source Assemblies A9 Source Control Board Removal 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Remove the three screws item 1 that attach the source module to the analyzer Disconnect the cables item 2 and item 3 for all but Option 400 from the M AID S Rem
6. 1414 Tools Required aces iced aOR 14 14 Removal nets iT rd ue rated dE Wo Hae le ee ce oy 1414 Replacement 1415 Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly 1416 1416 Removal 34 63 uu MY BO GA iex ded ordo d 1416 Replacement 1416 Source 1418 1418 Removal 1418 58 M A D S Removal 1418 Oscillator 1418 A9 Source Control Board Removal 1419 Replacement 1420 CPU Board Assembly 1422 Tools 1422 Removal 1422 Replacement 1422 ATBTIBattery Se AAAS Se ORG Ae Rae eres 1424 Tools 1424 Rem val oa 1424 Replacement 1424 15 Preregulator 1426 Tools 1426 Removal PL 1426 Replacement 1426 19 Graphics Processor 1428 Tools 1428 Removal 5
7. TO 17 Indicates phase lock loop a 70V TEST SE i U USED LIMIT TEST lt 7 7 MEAS RESTART A17 J P WES GREEN LED Led 9 GREEN LEDS 75 t l NORMAL ON NORMAL OF F l NORMAL ON STEADY OPT 089 w20 1 i i 1 m uy CE XR R CHAN pim xveo 1 C 22 1 1 wem IN 55 71 LT gt o wm INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT pee 17 I R CHANNEL TERCONNE INTERCONNE TER CONN ro FRONT PANEL A51 TEST SET oo SUMPER a au e aa E I I L i t f OUT STEP 5 vo A22 DISPLAY d LIQUID i ATTENUATORS FROM 17 1 INTERFACE CRYSTAL TO A74 pes CONTROL TRANSFER SWITCH DIGITAL VIDEO Di DISPLAY dpi LOWER FT PANEL AS DISK I NTERFACE PALETTE Lco I BIAS oou RA RAS 1 FOR CPU DETAIL REFER TO CHAPTER 6 I BIAS to BIAS TEE S L INTERFACE L J DIGITAL CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING Sees 2x2 MEMORY i uus ey dox q e ZEN CAUTION i eke 700 AC A20 M d NVERTER ASSY NM 25 TO A12 TO A11 TO A14 sb6121d Figure 4 14 HP 8722D OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM OPTION 400 Power Supply Troubleshoot
8. lt P 2 INTERCONNECT D _ CAUTION 700V C f N E E E E eee TO Att 14 CW 1 GHZ FROM 58 42 OPT 085 089 nh w23 TO 58 w19 7 out 55 CHAN L es 1 w17 He cw 1 GHZ R CHANNEL TEST PORT POWER 5 d amp m FRONT PANEL 52 TEST PORT POWER 5 dBm JUMPER L _ OPEN ON TEST PORT 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP Es Ecl 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP au ON 2 END w20 as SOURCE CONTROL BOARD eo 5 CONT SOURCE w SAMPLER 65 A SAMPLER ar SWITCHES BIAS FL3OMHz w33 W47 d 12 ped J3 OO i CN AO lt i lt 9 GZ 2 Ly TRL a CAL PLL OUT TO PHASE LOCK BD w Std and OBS SAMPLER B 7171 SAMPLER 7 1 1 1 1 1 Ini SOR ee eee CW 1 GHZ TEST PORT POWER 5 dBm D Woe OPEN ON TEST PORT 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP i 1 1 OUT 1 our Led SIGNAL SEPARATION Ir 62 DIRECTIONAL a MER COUPLER 5 TE TRANSFER SWITCH ATTEN o 9 Q MS Ed m i 5 re ny eee 0 5i5dB ae Ne 511 522 p fA60 BIAS TEE Dead dm i i w26 4 ibas Acs DIRECTIONAL P COUPLER i 8 w27 I l l TO A51 X l wa C FRONT PANEL JUMPER
9. 2 37 3 1 A7 Jumper Positions Firmware revisions 6 xx and below 9 9 3 2 A7 Switch Positions Firmware revisions 7 xx and above 3 9 3 3 Source Pretune Correction Constants Setup 3 10 8 4 Location of Output Power Adjustments 3 23 3 5 Output Power 3 26 3 6 Location of Blanking Adjustment 3 34 3 7 VCO Tune Adjustment 3 44 3 8 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup 3 46 3 9 Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment 3 47 3 10 High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location 3 48 3 1 1 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 3 50 3 12 Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments 3 51 Contents 14 41 Preset Sequence for Firmware Revisions 6 xx and below 42 Preset Sequence for Firmware Revisions 7 and above 43 Troubleshooting Organization 4 4 15 Preregulator 6 45 Front Panel Power Up Sequence 46 Front Panel Power Up Sequence 47 Equipment Setup for Source Power Check 48 0 25V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 40 Typical Trace cos 22 5 XO EX we A OS 410 Typical Switch Repeatability Trace 411 HP 8719D 20D 22D Overall Block Diagram 412 HP 8719D 20D 22D Overall Block Diagram 413 HP 8719D 20D 22D Ov
10. 15 5 Servicing iue as RED A d 15 5 Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements 15 6 Compliance with German Noise Requirements 15 7 A Determining System M easurement U ncertainties Sources of Measurement Errors A 2 Sources of Systematic Errors A 2 Sources of Random Errors A 2 Sources of Drift 8 Sources of Additional Measurement Errors A 3 Measurement Uncertainty Equations A 4 Reflection Uncertainty Equations A 4 Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty Erm A 4 Reflection Phase Uncertainty Erp 5 Transmission Uncertainty Equations 6 Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Etm A 6 Contents 12 A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies 1434 lbols Required eb de Aa a ek 1434 Removal a 1434 LED Board Removal 1434 Replacement o or rus Aes ciate de dels acere AA A 1434 A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly 1436 lbols Required ss gos aaa 1436 Removal 1436 Replacement 1436 Fan Assembly 1438 Tools Required aa 1438 Removal A duos ds aaa Ao PRIM M Nose EN S 1438 Replacement 1438 Post Repair
11. PreregulatedVoltages Regulated 5 V Digital Supply Shutdown Indications the Green LED Red LED Post Regulator Voltage Indkations the Green LEDs shutdown circuit Contents 8 Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector 12 6 Display Power 4 434 Ro Soy you ORE 12 7 Digital Control Theory 12 7 Al Front Panel 12 8 A2 Front Panel 12 8 CPU A10 Digital IF firmware revisions 6 xx and below 12 8 A7CPU A10 Digital IF firmware revisions 7 xx and above 12 8 Main CPU firmware revisions 6 xx and below 12 9 Main CPU firmware revisions 7 xx and above 12 9 Main sem owe x AEG OR WC Mop 12 9 EEPROM erento IV EUER SANE 12 9 Digital Signal Processor 12 10 AIR Displays d Coss tuit s BOW ede 12 10 AIDOSP 5025244 eet ae ETA ee 8 12 10 A20 Inverbepeo uode wn kou seat SEAS wie 12 11 A16 Rear Panel 12 11 Source Group Theory 12 12 Source Pretune 12 14 Al4 Al3Fractiona N Synthesizer 12 14 A52 Pulse Generator the Harmonic Comb 12 14 A64 R Sampler Down Convertingthe Signals 12 14 All Phase Lock Comparing Phase and Frequency 12 15 Tuning the YIG
12. When the dispiay reads BLANKING ADJ press 4 Calibrate the power meter and connect it to port 1 5 Refer to Figure 3 6 and use the blanking adjustment to obtain the value indicated on the analyzer display 6 When the adjustment is complete press Adjustments and Correction Constants 333 sb681d Figure 3 6 Location of Blanking Adjustment In Case of Difficulty If you are unable to perform this adjustment refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter in this manual 334 Adjustmentsand Correction Constants Initialize EEPROMs Test 53 This internal service test performs the following functions destroys all correction constants and all un protected options a initializes certain EEPROM address locations to zeroes replaces the display intensity correction constants with default values Note This routine will not alter the serial number or option number correction constants Tests 49 and 50 respectively 1 Press Frase 2 Restore the analyzer correction constants in the EEPROMs by referring to Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure located later in this chapter 3 If you don t have the correction constants backed up on a disk run all the internal service routines in t
13. 518 6 1 LED Code and Pattern Versus Test Failed 6 11 6 2 Front Panel Key Codes 1 2 6 23 6 3 Internal Diagnostic Test with Commentary 6 26 7 1 VCO Range Check Frequencies 7 10 7 2 VCO Exercise 7 13 7 3 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signal Locations 1 15 7 4 First IF Settings 1 16 7 5 Assemblies Potentially Responsible for Band Related Problems 7 19 8 1 Receiver Assemblies and Associated Paths 8 1 9 1 Components Related to Specific Error Terms 9 8 10 1 Test Status Terms 10 5 10 2 Descriptions of Jumper Positions 10 10 11 1 Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests 11 2 HP 8719D 8720D Characteristics Without Error Correction 11 3 HP 8722D Characteristics Without Error Correction 12 1 Subsweep Frequencies 13 1 Miscellaneous Replaceable Parts 18 2 Reference Designations and Abbreviations 141 Related Service Procedures 1 of 4 15 1 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices Contents 18 11 4 11 6 11 7 12 16 13 42 13 45 14 40 15 3 1 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options This chapter contains information on the following topics Service Tools Service Test Equipment a Principles of Microwave Connector Care a Analyzer Options Ser
14. Switch Repeatability Calibration does not compensate for the repeatability of the transfer switch in instruments As a result the switch can be a source of error To check the switch use the following procedure 1 Press 92 2 Press menu 3 Connect a short to test port 1 and press 3 4 Press Display data memory and scale the trace 3 Fress Meas and then repeatedly 6 to 12 times press 4 to switch back and forth between n and 511 6 to 12 11 measurement condition n to After 4 averages the trace should look similiar to Figure 410 6 Press 7 Repeat steps 2 3 and 4 only this time connect a short to port 2 and monitor the S22 trace StartTreublesheotingicm 4 21 1 log MAG 03 dB REF dB START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz Figure 4 10 Typical Switch Repeatability Trace Accessories If the analyzer has passed all of the above checks but is still making incorrect measurements suspect the system accessories Accessories such as RF or interconnect cables calibration or verification kit devices and adapters can all induce system problems Reconfigure the system as it is normally used and reconfirm the problem Continue with Chapter 9 Accessories Troubleshooting 4 22 Start Troubleshooting Here oversized art 08720 90282 art sb6122d hpg
15. 12 6 Option 400 Signal Separation 12 7 Receiver Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram 13 1 Module Exchange Procedure A l Typical Dynamic A 2 Error Model Flowgraph Contents 16 Tables l l Required l 1 1 2 Service Test Equipment lof2 1 2 1 3 Connector Care Quick Reference 1 5 2 1 Supported System Configurations HP 8719D 20D Only 2 18 2 2 Supported System Configurations HP 8722D Only 2 18 2 3 Power Values for Flatness Test 2 38 2 4 Power Value Settings for Testing Linearity 2 40 2 5 Frequency Segment Values 1 45 2 6 Frequency Segment Values for HP 8722D with new CPU and firmware 7 and above 5 3 1 Related Service Procedures 1 4 33 3 2 PEEK POKE Addresses for Unprotected Hardware Options 8 19 3 3 Main Power DAC Peek Poke Location Table 3 22 3 4 Output Power Adjustment Values 1 24 3 5 Power Linearity Adjustment Values 3 29 5 1 A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages 5 1 5 2 Output Voltages 5 10 5 3 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection for Troubleshooting the A15 Assembly 5 12 5 4 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection for Troubleshooting the A8 Board
16. For 8722D Analyzers Only 17 Press 20 Gn and disregard response beyond 20 GHz 330 Adjustments end Correction Constants For All Analyzers 18 Press and enter the power level that is listed as P1 in Ihble 3 5 ind then press x 19 Press Saee 5 i Bii Table 3 5 and then press 1 The displayed trace should be centered on the reference 0 5 dB enter the value listed as P1 in m If the trace is not centered on the reference continue with the next step If the trace is centered on the reference continue with step 27 21 Adjust the front panel knob until the measurement trace is centered around the reference line Record the MeN Lee number Press Gave Recall 29 Perform the EEPROM nm Procedure located on page 3 34 30 Perform the Power Linearity performance Test procedure that is located behind the 2 Performance Tests tab of this manual Adjustments and Correction Constants 331 In Case of Difficulty 1 If the analyzer fails the Power Linearity Performance Test do the following m If the analyzer fails the performance test for the power levels listed as P2 P3 and P4 repeat the Power Linearity Adjustment m If the analyzer fails the performance test for the power level listed as P1 repeat the Output Power Adjustment and the Power Linearity Adjustment 2 If the analyzer is still n
17. HP 87220 ert E Isl e EE EE 87220 OPTION 400 Hardware Bottom 2 6 Ww HP 7190 2200 sb6139d Replaceable Parts 13 37 Hardware Front 0515 0382 SCREW SMM 4 0 12 CWPNTX 08720 00021 DISK DRIVE BRACKET 0505 1934 SCREW SMM 2 5 6 CWPNTX 08720 00077 ACTUATOR SWITCH ARM 08720 40014 AC LINE BUTTON 0515 0430 SCREW SMM 3 0 6 CWPNTX 0515 2086 SCREW SMM 4 0 7 PCFLTX 0515 1400 SCREW SMM 3 5 8 PCFLTX 08720 00093 CABLE MOUNTING BRACKET 5022 1087 NUT FLANGE 08720 60159 TEST PORT CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT KIT BP 8719D 20D 08517 60027 TEST PORT CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT KIT BP 8722D 0515 0430 SCREW SMM 3 0 6 Ua BAF c c to t 5 DG PLACES 7 sb 113q 13 38 Replaceable Parts Hardware Preregulator Description Number 2110 0780 FUSE 8 250 V NON TIME DELAY 08753 00065 BRACKET PREREGULATOR 0515 1400 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 8 CW FL TX 08753 60098 PREREGULATOR ASSY PREREGULATOR ASSY REBUILT EXCHANGE 2 PLACES UJ sg691d Replaceable Parts 13
18. c Use the front and press 4 Check that the trace response is 0 00 0 05 dB h Disconnect the short and connect it reference test port 2 i Press j Check that the trace response is 0 00 0 05 dB k If any of the trace responses are out of the specified limits repeat the Measurement Calibration and Device Verification procedures gt Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter for more troubleshooting information If the System Fails the Verification Test Disconnect and reconnect the device that failed the verification Then remeasure the device If the performance verification still fails System Verification and 2 29 Performance Tests a Continue to measure the rest of the verification devices and print out the results of all four measurement parameters a Print the error terms and examine them for anomalies near the failure frequencies Refer to the Error Terms chapter in this manual Make another measurement calibration and follow the flow chart on the following page 2 30 System Verification and Performance Tests VERIFICATION FAILS pFRINTOUTESULTS AND CONTINUE TO MEASURE ALL THE VERIFICATION DEVICES PASS VERIFICATION Y DEVICE REMEASURED FAILS AT THE SAME FREQUENCY WITH MORE THAN ONE DEVICE SUBSTITUTE CAL KIT SUBSTITUTE VERIFICATION V
19. 44 a 3 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor DONE you have completed this procedure m If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor FAIL refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter 4 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 jumper switch to the Normal position NRM 5 Perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure located on page 3 34 3 12 Adjustments and Correction Constants IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 47 Required Equipment and Tools RF Cable HP 8719D 20D Only 85131C D E F RF Cable HP 8722D Only ee HP 85133C D E F A tistatie Wrist Stap crise beak hs ee VM tana 9300 1367 Antistatic Wrist Strap yaa 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth Ground 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up Time 80 minutes These correction constants compensate for IF amplifier linearity difference between gain stages 1 Make sure the A7 jumper switch is in the Alter position 2 Connect the RF cable from Port 1 to Port 2 of the analyzer 4 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine If IF Step Cor DONE is displayed you have completed this procedure 5 If no more correction constant routines are going to be
20. If the softkey label appears on display that particular attenuator setting check has failed Press 4 to check the other attenuator settings e If the message FAIL appears on the analyzer display the analyzer failed the first part of the operation check 2 6 System Verification and Performance est s m If the message DONE appears on the analyzer display the analyzer passed the first part of the check Clean and Gage All Connectors Caution If connectors are damaged they must be repaired or replaced NOW in order to prevent damage to the calibration and verification kit devices Always use adapters when verifying a system with SMA connectors 1 Visually inspect all the connectors for any burrs gold flakes or places where the gold is worn Clean all the connectors with alcohol and foam tipped swabs Dry the connectors with dry foam tipped swabs 2 Visually inspect the calibration block and the end of the connector gage before any measurements of the connectors are made 3 Gage all devices cables and test port connectors Note The procedures for correct use of gages are in the calibration kit manuals System Verificationand 2 7 Performances ests Check the Test Port Cables The following series of cable tests return loss insertion loss magnitude stability phase stability and connector repeatability can be done to check the stability of a test port cable These checks are not required but are recommended
21. _ ee Eq START 0 050 000 000 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz Hid sb6150d Figure 11 4 Typical EXF EXR with 3 kHz Bandwidth 11 12 Error Terms Load Match ELF and ELR Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that terminates the output of a Z port device The match of test port cables is included Load match error terms are characterized by measuring the 11 and 822 responses of a thru configuration during the calibration procedure Significant System Components Large variations in the forward or reverse load match error terms may indicate a bad thru cable or a poor connection of the cable to the test port Affected M easurements The measurements most affected by load match errors are all transmission measurements and reflection measurements of a low insertion loss two port device such as an airline CH1 log MAG 10 dB REF 0 dB ELE LU E La d dM gg 7 TENE EYES TELE START 0 050 000 000 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz sb6151d Figure 11 5 Typical ELF ELR Error Terms 11 13 Transmission Tracking ETF and ETR Transmission tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path including R input and the frequency response of the transmission test path including A or B input while m
22. 20 000 000 000 MH a b sb6143d Figure 9 2 Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short a and Open b 9 6 Accesseries Troubleshooting 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Key Menus These menus allow you to perform the following service functions a test verify m adjust control m troubleshoot The menus are divided into two groups 1 Internal Diagnostics 2 Service Features When applicable the HP IB mnemonic is written in parentheses following the key See HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions at the end of this section Note Throughout this service guide these conventions are observed are labeled front panel keys are display defined keys in the menus a HP IB COMMANDS when applicable follow the keystrokes in parentheses Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 1 Error Messages The displayed messages that pertain to service functions are also listed in this chapter to help you m Understand the message m Solve the problem Service Key Menus Internal Diagnostics The internal diagnostics menus are shown in Figure 10 1 and described in the following paragraphs The following keys access the internal diagnostics menus 10 2 Service Key Menus and Error Messages system Ti LTEM TESTS ME NL SET CLOCK EXECUTE TEST COMP GURE MENU LIMIT MENU C ANSFOR TRANSFORM 7 MENU Ea SYS VER TESTS ADJUSTMENT TESTS HE TRU
23. 32 Enter the power value from the Power C column in Table 3 4 for the particular analyzer that you are adjusting Adjustments n d CorrectionConstents 3 25 8485A 8487A POWER SENSOR 5561624 Figure 3 5 Output Power Adjustments Wait for the analyzer to finish the power meter calibration Note The analyzer may display the message CAUTION TEST PORT OVERLOAD REDUCE POWER Ignore this message and continue with the procedure 3 26 Adjustmentsand Corraction Constants 41 Connect Port 1 to Port 2 42 Press Save Recall p IM 45 Switch off the power meter calibration by pressing The analyzer s trace now represents power flatness 46 Adjust the slope and offset of all the bands for a flatness of 1 dB to 20 GHz 2 5 to 40 GHz Refer to the column Power C dBm in Table 3 4 This sets the mid band power level Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 27 In Case of Difficulty 1 3 28 Check for available power and modulator functionality by adjusting the power DAC from 0 to 4005 The power should vary from approximately 33 dB to 4 dB from the maximum specified power m If the analyzer is not operating correctly as indicated from the results of the previous step refer to Source Troubleshooting located later in this manual Adjustments and Correction Constants Power Linearity Adjustment Before you perform this pr
24. 4 Main DRAM Verifies the A7 CPU main memory DRAM with a non destructive write read test pattern A destructive version is shown in Table 10 2 These tests internal tests 2 through 4 are normally run at preset and power on However a jumper on the A7 CPU assembly illustrated in Figure 10 2 can be set in one of five positions with the following results Table 10 2 Descriptions of umper Positions Jumper Position Result Position No With the jumper in this right position correction constants can be altered updated during adjustment procedures The altered correction constants are stored in EEPROM replacing previously stored correction constants This destructive version of the C MOS RAM test internal test 3 continuously writes over information stored there This destructive version of the main DRAM test internal test 4 continuously writes over information stored there For factory use only The left position is the normal operation position 10 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages EPRUM LOCATIONS ui uss ues Us a CPU ASSEMBLi ALTER ALT j sb6141d Figure 10 2 J umper Positions on the A7 CPU For additional information see Internal Tests near the front of this chapter and the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 11 No
25. A short is connected to port 1 port 2 to reflect all the source energy back into the analyzer for 811 S22 measurement The first part of OP CK PORT 1 checks the repeatability of the transfer switch An 811 measurement is stored in memory and the switch is toggled to port 2 and then back to port 1 where another measurement is made The difference between the memory trace and the second trace is switch repeatability The remaining parts of both tests exercise the internal attenuator in 5 dB steps over a 55 dB range The resulting measurements must fall within a limit testing window to pass the test The window size is based on both source and receiver specifications The operator s check determines that 1 The source is phase locked across the entire frequency range 2 All three samplers are functioning properly 3 The transfer switch is operational 4 The attenuator steps 5 dB at a time Required Equipment and Pols Short 3 5 Mmm f A xa e HP P N 85052 60007 p o calibration kit HP 85052B Short 2 4 mm f HP 8722D Only p o calibration kit HP 85056B D Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes Start Troubleshooting Here 4 6 Procedure 4 At the prompt connect the short to the port indicated Make sure the connection is tight 6 The test is a sequence of subtests At the end of the subtests the test title and result will be displayed If all tests pass successfully t
26. Each device must have its own address The address set on each device must match the one recognized by the analyzer and displayed Peripheral addresses are often set with a rear panel switch Refer to the manual of the peripheral to read or change its address Start Troubleshooting Here 4 7 If Using 8 Plotter or Printer 1 Ensure that the plotter or printer is set up correctly m power is on pens and paper loaded w pinch wheels are down some plotters need to have 1 and P2 positions set 2 Press and then If the result is a copy of the analyzer display the printing plotting features are functional in the analyzer Continue with Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers or the Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section in this chapter Ifthe result is not a copy of the analyzer display refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting If Using an External Disk Drive 1 Select the external disk drive Press SAVE RECALL 2 Verify that the address is set correctly Press 3 Ensure that the disk drive is set up correctly m power is on an initialized disk in the correct drive correct disk unit number and volume number press to access the softkeys that display the numbers default is 0 for both m with hard disk Winchester drives make sure the configuration switch is properly set see dr
27. SLOPE Y f Vp T og L A 5 7 isor oF TP18 z 312 IUE n l LOW BAND ADJ BLANKING ADJ 1 A54 1 2 n XE 7 FB 4KHz AND es w43 5 i i lt 5 A67 R2 SAMPLER A73 BUFFER ATTEN eI Sa y R our jen wae E392 i AMP i 1 11 PHASE LOCK FM YIG2 1 7 lt IFR 4kHz T E T lt lt CN 13 SA 20 40 GH ii e C77 Hs i i 40 37 42 50 A10 GNO PHASE Lock 0 bl I L _ 25 202 wi ova 0 om PHASE LOCK gp C d 40 2 55 Y 1011 5 q 5 H NODE M Er rece E ce ee FWD r 1 4 l 2 10MHz PLL FROM w16 anD OC 2 DET 2 1 REN M E 740 PRECISION caram 10 L E I 31 pm er Lain cl gt 66 B SAMPLER REFERENCE 8 weg F 30MHz ELURER 1 2 SWEERR 2 55 20 GHz Ex ax un w18 5 ETUE ES ed we 7 lt 1 ax DA lt 5 12 z 2 d SS 1 RED LED AMBER LED DAC ie L 22 H PULL DOWN a os Sa Genital MEE 5 eee E G i OPT 012 gt Fetes i 0 es MIXER N LOWBAND SET DAC HIGH amp MIDBAND d Jd 5 12 REFE REF 17 oes S A ee Sam SAMPLER B T7171 1 1 SAMPLER A zt 3750 4095 READ gt
28. 20 Frac N Cont Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to the control element on the 14 fractional N digital assembly The control element must be functioning and the fractional N VCO must be oscillating although not necessarily phase locked to pass Sweep Trig Tests the sweep trigger L SWP line from the Al4 fractional N to the A10 digital IF The receiver with the sweep synchronizes L SWI ADC Lin It tests the linearity of the A10 digital IF ADC using the built in ramp generator The test generates a histogram of the ADC linearity where each data point represents the relative width of a particular ADC code Ideally all codes have the same width different widths correspond to non linearities ADC Ofs This runs only when selected It tests the abiity of the offset DAC on the A10 digital IF to apply a bias offset to the IF signals before the ADC input This runs only when selected ABUS Test Tests analog bus accuracy by measuring several analog bus reference voltages all nodes from the A10 digital IF This runs only when selected F N Count Uses the internal counter to count the 14 fractional N VCO frequency 120 to 240 MHz and the divided fractional N frequency 100 kHz It requires the 100 kHz signal from 12 and the counter gate signal from A10 to pass 10 14 Service Key Menus and Error Messages External Tests These tests require either external equipment and connections
29. 7 77 1 1 DIN KYBD PORT 5 232 PARALLEL PORT HP B PORT INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE A18 DISPLAY 5 VD FROM A17 eee CRYSTAL DISPLAY LCD MAIN CPU CZ 2 EEPROM DIGITAL SIGNAL REM PROCESSOR MAIN RAM ADC REG RED LEDS NORMAL FLASHING CONTROL REFRESH H r USE INTERCONNECT be Se ee CAUTION 700 20 INVERTER 55 Ni L sb6125d Figure 6 1 DIGITAL CONTROL GROUP BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR FIRMWARE REVISIONS 6 XX AND BELOW 64 Digital Control Troubleshooting A10 DIGITAL IF AUX l FROM 14 3 MEASURE E PANEL EX M FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR ae A1 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE INTERFACE EXT BIAS 17 16KHz EXT REF TO 12 RATE 15 lt FRONT A 2 PANEL EXT TRIG gt EXT A17 TEST SEQ lt q LIMIT TEST 48 MEAS RESTART _ TO A17 Lien E AUX INPUT pe ALO PROCESSOR KEYBOARD O E 1 y 1 IFR 4KHz FROM AQ MOTHERBOARD 0 37 42 50 A10 GND 3 QALY RS 232 PARALLEL INTERCONNECT E L INTERCONNECT a INTERCONNECT MINI DIN KYBD 1 tot L INTERCONNECT TO
30. COUNT OSCILLATORS INPUTS w counter ov ren A52 PULSE m Iz gu Eruca MPa NEN GENERATOR M A 0 S 2 I ALC LO MED RATE IS A OUT oS 20 Fer OFFSET A 4 16KHz o Vii es SLOPE f I Tu SEER SAMPLE 511 I 1 5 s me leon es LOW BAND ADJ BLANKING ADJ 71 c MEC a IFB 4KHz A11 PHASE LOCK 1 1 Fm40MHz on oon PLL FROM 11 IF XL 1 IF DET 9 PRECISION SOURCE 0 x 4401 10 CONTROL 1st IF 10MHz REFERENCE BOARD PL REF 1MHz PRE TUNE REO LED AMBER LED DAC UNLOCK PULL DOWN FR 4KHz o To lt i R OUT 16 l P Q9 42 50 A10 GND 2 W46 el PLL OUT TO 2 A PHASE LOCK 9 MAIN YIG2 40 25V GHz MAIN 1 w18 Sol i 2 i 43 Se HS L g pe wag ec OPT 012 0 05 2 55 GHz SET DAC 4 HIGH amp MIDBAND A12 REFERENCE C 3200 4095 READ gt 0 dBm ecl SET DAC 4 LOWBAND 3750 4095 READ gt 5 dB SAMPLER JUMPER ONLY USED WITH OPTION 1D5 VCXO H i TUNE vcxo 10MHz SRC TUNE b e v 13 18 SET DAC LOWBAND C
31. Caution Damage to components or to circuit traces may occur if ASTP4 SDIS is shorted to chassis ground for more than a few seconds while supplies are shorted 1 Connect A8TP4 SDIS to chassis ground with a jumper wire 2 Switch on the analyzer and note the test points of any LEDs that are off Immediately remove the jumper wire 3 Refer to the block diagram Figure 5 7 at the end of this chapter and do the following Note the mnemonics of any additional signals that may connect to A8 test point that showed a fault in the previous step Cross reference all assemblies that use the power supplies whose A8 LEDs went out when 8 4 SDIS was connected to chassis ground 5 16 Power Supply Troubleshooting a Make a list of these assemblies Delete the following assemblies from your list as they have already been verified earlier in this section A10 digital IF All phase lock A12 reference A13 fractional N analog A14 fractional N digital A18 display A22 display interface 4 Switch off the analyzer 5 Of those assemblies that are left on the list remove or disconnect them from the analyzer one at a time Table 5 4 shows the best order in which to remove them sorting them from most to least accessible Table 5 4 also lists any associated assemblies that are supplied by the assembly that is being removed After each assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs Not
32. T 15 TORX screwdriver a 20 TORX screwdriver Removing the top cover 1 Remove both upper rear feet item 1 by loosening the attaching screws item 2 2 Loosen the top cover screw item 3 3 Slide cover off Removing the side covers 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the lower rear foot item 4 that corresponds to the side cover you want to remove by loosening the attaching screw item 5 3 Remove the handle assembly item 6 by loosening the attaching screws item 7 4 Slide cover off Removing the bottom cover 1 Remove both lower rear feet item 4 by loosening the attaching screws item 5 2 Loosen the bottom cover screw item 8 3 Slide cover off 14 6 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Covers 8 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 7 Front Panel Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 1 16 Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the front bottom feet item 1 3 Remove all of the RF cables that are attached to the front panel item 2 4 Remove the trim strips item 3 from the top and bottom edges of the front frame by prying under the strip with a small slot screwdriver 5 Remove the six screws item 4 from the top and bottom edges of the frame
33. TEE wes oe 1 SPLITTER dace ELTON ra wre NS I no 2 564 7 75 71 exit che _ A60 BIAS TEE M 26 A63 DIRECTIONAL wr ge 3 RM SUUS AN a ST COUPLER m 2 0 5546 256 LOWER 511 2 Tu LI i n FRONT PANEL oo Tw A51 ve 7 gt a b cu Cv PORT 2 PORT 2 b ne S Re Abe ines RI A64 Figure 12 6 Option 400 Signal Separation 12 20 Theory of Operation A69 Step Attenuator The step attenuator provides coarse power control for the source signal It is an electro mechanical attenuator controlled by the A7 CPU that provides 0 to 55 dB of attenuation in 5 dB steps It adjusts the power level to the DUT without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path S4 Transfer Switch The output of the step attenuator is fed into the 84 transfer switch This is a solid state switch It switches between the port 1 and port 2 measurement paths automatically enabling alternate forward and reverse measurements In addition S4 provides an internal termination for the measurement port that is 1nactive A56 Lower Front Panel Assembly LEDs on the lower front panel indicate the status of the trans
34. 1 Swap identical assemblies between the port 1 and port 2 signal paths and then regenerate the error terms 2 If the problem moves from one port to another you have found the offending assembly Note Before trying this be sure to inspect the front panel test port connector for obvious damage Tighten all semi rigid cable connectors inside the instrument Cable Test The load match error term is a good indicator of cable problems You can further verify a faulty cable by measuring the reflection of the cable Perform an 511 calibration directly at port 1 no cables Then connect the suspect cable to port 1 and terminate the open end in 50 ohms Figure 9 1 shows the return loss trace of a good left side and faulty cable Note that the important characteristic of a cable trace is its level the good cable trace is much lower not its regularity Refer to the cable manual for return loss specifications 94 Accessories Troubleshooting CHI 109 MAG REF O 96 eal PRM tw STAHT 050 OCO OOO GHZ STOP 20 050 09 GHz Figure 9 1 Typical Return Loss Trace of a Good Cable Verify Shorts and Opens Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type and sex as the short and open in question If the devices are not from one of the standard calibration kits refer to the HP 8719D 20D 22D Ne
35. IF Amplifier CC Test 47 Internal Test 17 Internal Test 18 Internal Test 19 or System Verification Jumper Switch Positions Frequency Range and Accuracy Analog Bus CC Test 44 Source Pretune CC Test 43 or System Verification Jumper Switch Positions Reference Assembly VCO Tune Frequency Accuracy Jumper Switch Positions Analog Bus CC Test 44 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment A7 Jumper Switch Positions Analog Bus CC Test 44 5 Preregulator N no 00 116 Rear Panel None Internal Test 13 nterface Rear Panel Self Test These tests are located in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here 34 Adjustments and Correction Constants Table 3 1 Related Service Procedures 3 of 4 Adjustments Verification Correction Constants Ch 3 Ch 2 19 Graphics System None Observation of Display Processor Tests 59 76 A51 Test set None Operation Checkt Interface Output Power Adjustments Power Level Test Frequency Range and Accuracy A54 YIG2 20 40 GHz Power Level Test HP 8722D Only Frequency Range and Accuracy A55 YIG1 2 4 20 GHz Power Level Test Frequency Range and Accuracy A56 Lower Front Observation Panel Assembly watch LEDs when switching from S11 to 822 Output Power Adjustments Power Level Test Frequency Range and Accuracy 58 M A D S Output Power Adjustments Power Level Test A59 Source Interface Output Power Adjustments Power Level
36. SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS THE WAR RANTY TERMS IN THE SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL DFARS Restricted Rights Notice If software is for usein the performance of a U S Government prime contract or subcontract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 J une 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 J une 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause Use duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commercial license terms and non DOD Departments and Agencies of the U S Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 J une 1987 U S Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 J une 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 N ovember 1995 as applicablein any technical data Printing Copies of Documentation from the Web To print copies of documentation from the Web download the PDF file from the Agilent web site Go to http www agilent com Enter the document s part number located on the title page the Quick Search box Click GO Click on the hyperlink for the document Click the printer icon located in the tool bar Contacting Agilent
37. switches the counter to monitor the 14 fractional N VCO frequency at the node shown on the Overall Block Diagram in the Start Troubleshooting chapter switches the counter to monitor the 14 fractional N VCO frequency after it has been divided down to 100 kHz for phase locking the VCO Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 29 Analog Bus Nodes The following paragraphs describe the 23 analog bus nodes They are listed in numerical order and are grouped by assembly Refer to the Overall Block Diagram for node locations Press USER PRESET System SERVICE MENU INPUT PORTS ANALOG BUS and then use the front panel keys or knob to select an analog bus node Terminate the entry by pressing 1 A10 Digital IF 1 0 37V 0 37 V reference Check for a flat line at approximately 0 37V This is used as the voltage reference in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment for calibrating out the analog bus high low resolution gain and offset errors The absolute voltage level is not critical but it should be the same in high and low resolution 2 2 50V 2 50 V reference Check for a flat line at approximately 2 5V This voltage is used in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low resolution circuitry 3 Aux Input Rear panel input This selects the rear panel AUX INPUT to drive the analog bus for making voltage and frequency mea
38. 08753 69095 BD ASSY DIGITAL IF REBUILT EXCHANGE 08720 60181 BD ASSY PHASE LOCK 08720 60252 BD AMY REFERENCE 08720 69252 BD ASSY REFERENCE REBUILT EXCHANGE 08720 60049 BD ASSY FRAC N ANALOG 08720 69049 BD ASSY FRAC N ANALOG REBUILT EXCHANGE 08720 60179 BD ASSY FRAC N DIGITAL 08720 69179 BD ASSY FRAC DIGITAL REBUILT EXCHANGE 08753 60098 ASSY PREREGULATOR 08763 69098 ASSY PREREGULATOR REBUILT EXCHANGE NOT SHOWN see Rear Panel Assembly NOT SHOWN see Chassis Parts Inside NOT SHOWN see Front Panel Assembly Inside NOT SHOWN see Cables Front NOT SHOWN see Front Panel Assembly Inside NOT SHOWN see Cables Front NOT SHOWN see Rear Panel Assembly Option 106 NOT SHOWN see Major Assemblies Bottom 5086 7583 ASSY LOW BAND 5086 6583 ASSY LOW BAND REBUILT EXCHANGE 08722 60013 ASSY YIG OSCILLATOR 20 GHZ TO 40 GHZ 8722D 08720 60082 ASSY YIG OSCILLATOR 2 4 GHZ TO 20 GHZ 8720D 8722D 08719 60009 ASSY YIG OSCILLATOR 2 4 GHZ TO 13 6 GHZ 8719D 13 6 Replaceable Parts option HP Part Qty Description Number NOT SHOWN see Cables Front 08720 60073 ASSY FIXED OSCILLATOR 5086 7519 ASSY M A D 8719D 8720D 5086 6519 ASSY M A D S 8719D 8720D REBUILT EXCHANGE 004 5086 7974 ASSY M A D2 8719D 8720D 004 5086 6974 ASSY M A D S2 8719D 8720D REBUIIT EXCHANGE 5086 7615 ASSY SUPER M A D S 8722D 5086 7615 ASSY SUPER M A D S 8722D REBUILT EXCHANGE 400 5086 798
39. 10 27 TheFrequencyCounter 10 27 Analog In Menu Analog Bus Nodes g aaa A10 Digital IF 11 Phase Lock L A12 Reference oru NUR ee A14 Fractional N Digital 2 2 Menu Flrmware Revision Softkey 0 0 HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions Invoking Tests Remotely lllsln Analog Bus Codes _ Error Messages ie caus wees Gig Ge ap tae wool Ot ger ae 11 Error Terms Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose Measurement Calibration Procedure Error Term Inspection If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values Uncorrected Performance Error Term Descriptions 004 Directivity EDF and Source Match ESF and 5 DSSORIDT ON ta cage oe da Pat Reflection Tracking ERF and ERR Isolation Crosstalk and EXR Load Match ELF and ELR Transmission Tracking andETR 12 Theory of Operation System Operation 2 Functional Groups ofthe Analyzer Power Supply Theory AlbPrereguator Line Power Module
40. 39 Wait for the analyzer to complete a full sweep 40 41 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 10 dB Write the calculated value on the test record 42 Press 43 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 10 dB Write the calculated value on the test record 44 Press Stop 20 G n 45 Repeat steps 21 through 26 46 Enter the power value that is listed in the Ps row for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press xl 47 Wait for the to complete a full sweep 48 f 49 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and subtract 5 dB Record the calculated value on the test record 90 51 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and subtract 5 dB Record the calculated value on the test record 242 System Verification and Performance est s If the Instrument Fails This Test 1 Ensure that the power meter and power sensor are operating to specification 2 The source relies on the power linearity adjustment for correct performance Refer to Power Linearity Adjustment and perform the procedure Then repeat this test 3 If the analyzer repeatedly fails this test refer to Source Troubleshooting located later in this manual System Verification and 243 Performance Tests 4 Dynamic Range Performance Test Dynamic range is checked by comparing the noise floor to the test port output power level Requ
41. 6 Slide the front panel over the test port connectors 7 Disconnect the ribbon cables item 5 and item 6 The front panel is now free from the instrument Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note When reconnecting semi rigid cables it is recommended that the connections be torqued to 10 in lb 14 8 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Front Panel Assembly 06510 14 9 Assembly Replacement Pest Repair Procedures Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in Ib Removal 1 Remove the front panel assembly from the analyzer refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Remove the ribbon cable item 1 from the front panel interface 3 Disconnect the RPG cable item 2 from the front panel interface 4 Disconnect the ribbon cable item 3 by sliding your finger nail between the connector and the cable 5 Remove the four screws item 4 attaching the interface board 6 Remove the nine screws from the Al front panel board to access and remove the keypad Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 10 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies
42. 6 7 to 7 3 82 to 48 24 6 to 26 6 N C 24 6 to 26 6 NOTE The 5 VD supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies at all times or the other voltages will 10t be correct It connects to the motherboard connector A17J8 Pin 4 5 10 Power Supply Troubleshooting FROM 15 PREREGULATOR 1 5 At5W1P1 31 UG IN 1 9 7 5 COMPONENT SIDE 4 POST REGULATOR BOARD CIS 2 SOLDER SIDE A15J2 11000000 i NOTE VOLTAGES ALL CAB AND LES ASSEMBL IES CONNECTED 50661504 Figure 5 6 A15W1 Plug Detail Check for a Faulty Assembly This procedure checks for a faulty assembly that might be shutting down the A15 preregulator via one of the following lines also refer to F igure 5 1 15 1 connecting to the A8 post regulator the 5VCPU line through the motherboard the 5VDIG line through the motherboard Do the following 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Ensure that A15W1 is reconnected to 8 Refer to Figure 5 5 3 Remove or disconnect the assemblies listed in Table 5 3 one at a time and in the order shown The assemblies are sorted from most to least accessible Table 5 3 also lists any associated assemblies that receive power from Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 11 the assembly that is being removed After each assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on 15 Note a Always switch off the analyzer
43. FUSE 1A 125 V FUSE 2A 125 V FUSE 4A 125 V FUSE 8 15A 250 V CABLE ASSEMBLY EXTENDER RF CABLE ASSEMBLY SMA FLEX WRENCH OPEN ENDED 5 5 BAG ANTISTATIC 12 0 x 15 0D 00 Documentaton S y IP 8719D 8720D 8722D SERVICE GUIDE 08720 90292 P 8719D 8720D 8722D MANUAL SET includes the following 08720 90282 HP 8753D EXAMPLE PROGRAM DISK 1 HP BASIC 08753 10028 87580 EXAMPLE PROGRAM DISK 2 QUICKC AND QUICK BASIC 08753 10029 8719D 8720D 8722D GUIDE 08720 90293 8719D 8720D 8722D USER S GUIDE includes Quick Reference 08720 90289 08720 90288 HP 8719D 8720D 8722D INSTALLATION QUICK START GUIDE 08720 90291 1342 Replaceable Parts Table 13 1 Miscellaneous Replaceable Parts continued Description HP Part Number Upgrade Kits FIRMWARE UPGRADE KIT 08720 60168 MECHANICAL TRANSFER SWITCH UPGRADE 1 OPTION 007 TIME DOMAIN CAPABILITY UPGRADE OPTION 010 DIRECT SAMPLER ACCESS UPGRADE 012 HIGH POWER S PARAMETER TEST SET UPGRADE KIT OPTION 085 FREQUENCY OFFSET MODE UPGRADE OPTION 089 HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCE UPGRADE OPTION 105 FOURTH SAMPLER AND TRL CALIBRATION FIRMWARE UPGRADE OPTION 400 Protective Caps for Connectors FEMALE HP IB CONNECTOR 1252 5007 FEMALE PARALLEL PORT 1252 4690 R 232 CONNECTOR 1262 4697 7 mm TEST PORTS 1401 0249 FEMALE 3 5 MM TEST PORTS 1401 0245 Fuses used the Post Regulator FUSE 2A 125 V N
44. Number N Frequency 2 2550 4710 5 1 120 240 1 3 160 236 141 6 236 147 5 236 157 3 213 3 High 128 236 Mid HP 8722D 31 1 220 6 142 5 234 59 7 235 4 A12 Reference the Crystal Reference Frequencies 36 58 85 112 68 48 9 238 2 1 This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the instrument by dividing down the output of a 40 MHz VCXO voltage controlled crystal oscillator One of the divided down signals is the 100 kHz FN REF for phase locking the synthesizer signal in A13 Another is the 1 MHz main phase locked loop reference signal PL REF that goes to the phase comparator in All The 2nd LO signal and the timing signal for the A10 digital IF assembly are explained in Receiver Theory The EXT REF rear panel input provides the option of using an external reference with a frequency of 1 2 5 or 10 MHz instead of the internal 40 MHz VCXO 12 16 Theory of Operation Source Block The YIG Oscillator Signals The source block includes two YIG oscillators and a 3 8 GHz fixed oscillator The outputs of these oscillators produce the source signal In phase locked operation this signal tracks the stable output of the synthesizer Figure 12 4 illustrates the assemblies in the source block HP S722D ONLY 8722 ONLY 87200 HP 2 4 106 2 HP 87190 2 4 13 56Hz sb622d
45. Option 105 Hardware op Rech we ge Hardware Hardware Front sum XX Fd XA Sees Hardware Preregulator 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Replacing an Assembly gt gt e eem amet A Aree td hs Procedures Described in this Line Fuse sanpa a qoe BO RE AES PO Tools Removal ves sok Medos enter UR aca ter e UR Replacement Covers eeoa ele a ee we a ele awe R Tools Removing the top cover Removing the side covers Removing the bottom cover Front Panel Assembly Tools Removal eh ee n ees a be dece ens de Replacement See Sb Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies Tools Removal Saver hae ape Te See erue alls Nou bee Contents 10 Replacement 1410 Display Lamp and Assembly 1412 Tools Required 2o Wax Boe SA ww ae Rew a 1412 Removal au doeet 254 Ratios AS asd 1412 Replacement 1412 Rear Panel
46. Procedures NeEMBUE Be 9 Characteristic Values Table A 10 Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet 1 of 3 A 11 Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet 2 of 3 A 12 Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet 8 of 3 A 13 Index Contents 13 Figures 2 1 ANSUNCSL 7540 1 1994 Verification Flowchart 2 2 2 2 Non ANSI NCSL 2540 1 1994 Verification Flowchart 2 3 2 3 Return Loss Measurement of 2 9 2 4 Insertion Loss Measurements of Cables 2 10 2 5 Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability 2 12 2 6 Connector Repeatability Example 2 14 2 7 National Institute of Standards and Technology Traceability Path for HP 8719D 20D 22D System Calibration and Verification Standards 2 17 2 8 System Verification Test Setup 2 20 2 9 Connections for Measurement Calibration Standards 2 22 2 10 Thru Connections 2 24 2 11 Verification Device Connections 2 26 2 12 Aligning the Center Conductor 2 28 2 13 Torquing the Connection 2 28 2 14 Verification Fails Flowchart 2 31 2 15 Graphic Print Out of Verification Results 2 32 2 16 Tabular Print Out of Verification Results 2 33 2 17 Frequency Range and Accuracy Test Setup 2 35 2 18 Power Test Setup
47. SCREW SM 3 0 6 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 0 14 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 0 8 CWPNTX CABLE GSP TO FLEX CIRCUIT CABLE FLEX CIRCUIT RPG KNOB 3719D NAME PLATE not shown 8720D NAME PLATE not shown 3722D NAME PLATE not shown BD ASSY FRONT PANEL BD ASSY FRONT PANEL INTERFACE ASSY INVERTER Al TO A2 A2 TO A17 Front Panel Assembly Inside 2 PLACES in ot A 127 Wes 9 PLACES 4 PLACES Replaceable Parts 13 29 Rear Panel Assembly HP Part Number 8120 6407 85047 60005 08720 60138 08753 60026 08415 60036 1251 2942 2190 0034 0380 0644 1251 2942 0515 2040 0515 0372 08720 00071 3160 0281 0690 1310 2190 0068 0515 0372 2190 0102 2950 0035 0400 0271 2110 0047 1400 0112 1330 Replaceable Parts ce Description W85 A17 TO A16 ASSY FUSE BD ASSY REAR PANEL INTERFACE A16 ASSY EXTERNAL REFERENCE CABLE ASSY FAN FASTENER CONN RP LOCK WASHER LK 1941010 NUT STDF 327L 6 32 FASTENER CONN RP LOCK SCREW SMM 3 6 16 PCFLTX SCREW SMM 3 0 8 CWPNTX REAR PANEL FAN GUARD NUT SPCL 1 2 28 WASHER LK 505ID SCREW SMM 3 0 8 CWPNTX WASHER LK 472ID NUT HEX 15 82 32 GROMMET SN 5 515ID FUSE FUSE CAP see Rear Panel Assembly Option 106 15 t PLACE Rear Panel Assembly igi s Ta 3 48 774 PLACES e 2 amp t 9 x
48. Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Table of Service Test Equipment 1 1 Principles of Microwave Connector 1 4 Analyzer Options 1 6 Option 106 High Stability Frequency Reference 1 6 Option 007 Mechanical Transfer Switch 1 6 Option 085 High Power System 1 6 Option 089 Frequency Offset Mode 1 6 Option 012 Direct Access Receiver Configuration 1 7 Option 400 Four Sampler Test Set 1 7 Option 010 Time Domain 1 7 Option 1CM Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles 1 7 Option 1CP Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles 1 7 Service and Support Options 1 8 Option WOS 2 2 ca wore ds ber W ORDERS eM 1 8 Option WIL ans d Ire eh RUSSE ECOL 1 8 Option e ece meni m 1 8 WEZ 0 1 8 Option WO2 e Gia AR 1 8 Option W34 1 9 Option W54 Sac eB Be ah ROS eS ed dug 1 9 2 System Verification and Performance Tests How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer 2 1 Instrument Verification 2 2 Sections in this Chapter 2 4 Prehninary Checks 2 5 Check the Temperature and 2 5 Check the Analyzer Internal
49. The annotation P4 appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the oftkey to switch on the power again 1048 Service Key Menus and Error Messages OVERLOAD ON INPUTR POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 14 dBm at one of the test 57 ports The RF output power is automatically reduced to 85 dBm The annotation P4 appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch on the power again PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO Error Number You have defined the parallel port as COPY for sequencing in 165 the HP IB menu To access the parallel port for general purpose I O GPIO set the selection to PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY Error Number You have defined the parallel port as general purpose I O GPIO 167 for sequencing The definition was made under the key menus To access the parallel port for copy set the selection to Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 49 PHASE LOCK CALFAILED Error Number An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically 4 executed at power on preset and any time a loss of phase lock is detected This message indicates that phase lock calibration was initiat
50. This information supersedes all prior HP contact information Online assistance www agilent com find assist Americas Brazil tel 55 11 3351 7012 fax 55 11 3351 7024 Canada tel 1 877 894 4414 fax 1 303 662 3369 Mexico tel 1 800 254 2440 fax 1 800 254 4222 United States tel 800 829 4444 alt 1 303 662 3998 fax 800 829 4433 Asia Pacific and Japan Australia tel 1 800 225 574 fax 1 800 681 776 fax 1 800 225 539 China tel 800 810 0508 alt 800 810 0510 fax 800 810 0507 fax 800 810 0362 Hong Kong tel 800 933 229 fax 800 900 701 India tel 1600 112 626 fax 1600 112 727 fax 1600 113 040 Japan Bench Japan On Site Singapore South Korea tel 0120 32 0119 tel 0120 802 363 tel 1 800 275 0880 tel 080 778 0011 alt 81 426 56 7799 alt 81 426 56 7498 fax 65 6755 1235 fax 080 778 0013 fax 0120 01 2144 fax 81 426 60 8953 fax 65 6755 1214 Taiwan Thailand Malaysia tel 0800 047 669 tel 1 800 2758 5822 tel 1800 880 399 fax 0800 047 667 alt 66 2267 5913 fax 1800 801 054 fax 886 3492 0779 fax 1 800 656 336 Europe Austria Belgium Denmark Finland tel 0820 87 44 11 tel 32 0 2 404 9340 tel 45 7013 1515 tel 358 10 855 2100 fax 0820 87 44 22 alt 32 0 2 404 9000 alt 45 7013 7313 fax 358 0 10 855 2923 fax 32 0 2 404 9395 fax 45 7013 1555 France Germa
51. Wie 426 W32 20 1 Wie HP 87190 2900 220 OFTIONS 012 Woe W20 wia WIT WZ Woo HP 8719D 20D 22D OPTIONS 085 089 13 20 Replaceable Parts 29 6 y W27 AS 28 Wo HP 8718 20 STANDARD HP 8719D 20D OPTION 089 wad i H M wig va I Ser W277 1 bk a w26 br EA ie ie 25 WE W20 W19 WES Cables Bottom HF 87220 OPTION 089 25 W26 HP 8719D 20D 22D OPTIONS 007 089 wza WN c ec W W20 W17 wie HP 87190 200 220 OPTIONS 400 089 sbeistd Replaceable Parts 13 21 Cables Front BD ASSY GSP BD ASSY DISPLAY INTERFACE NOT SHOWN BD ASSY LED CHANNEL BUFFER AMPLIFIER ATTENUATOR 6 DB ATTENUATOR 10 DB 8722D 62 TO FRONT PANEL OUT 8719D 8720D A63 TO FRONT PANEL OUT 8719D 8720D A62 A63 TO FRONT PANEL OUT 8722D A66 TO FRONT PANEL IN 8719D 8720D A66 TO FRONT PANEL IN 8722D A65 TO FRONT PANEL JN 8719D 8720D A65 TO FRONT PANEL IN 8722D 36 TO FRONT PANEL R CHANNEL IN 8719D 8720D 35 TO FRONT PANEL R CHANNEL IN 8722D 36 TO A58 8722D 36 TO 75 36 TO A75 858 TO FRONT PANEL R CHANNEL OUT 8719D 20D A58 TO FRONT PANEL R CHANNEL OUT 8722D 08720 60130 08720
52. af 6 7 8 18 4 PLACES aos Gh a eo oof eo il 11 D sbo102d Replaceable Parts 13 31 Rear Panel Assembly Option 1D5 option HP Part Number 1250 1859 0515 0374 8050 1546 2190 0068 0690 1310 0515 0430 08753 00078 08753 60158 8120 6458 13 32 Replaceable Parts M Description ADAPTER COAX SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 10 CW PN TX WASHER FLAT 505ID NY WASHER LOCK 5051 NUT SPECIALTY 1 2 28 SCREW MACHINE M8 0x 6 CW PN TX BRACKET OSC BD BD ASSY HIGH STABILITY FREQ REF RP INTERFACE A16J3 to HIGH STABILITY FREQ REF A26J1 Rear Panel Assembly Option 1D5 INSIDE 5601290 Replaceable Parts 13 33 Hardware Top 5 option Part Description esig eno 08720 40004 LOCATOR HOLD DOWNS 08720 00066 CAN HOLD DOWN 0515 2085 SCREW SMM 3 0 16 PCFLTX 08753 20062 PC STABILIZER CAP 08720 40001 PC BOARD STABILIZER 0515 2086 SCREW SMM 4 0 7 PCFLTX 0515 0458 SCREW SMM 3 6 10 CWPNTX 0515 0431 SCREW SMM 3 6 6 CWPNTX 0515 0430 SCREW SMM 3 0 6 CWPNTX 08720 00023 SOURCE HOLD DOWN 0515 0377 SCREW SMM 3 6 10 CWPNTX 08720 00038 SOURCE COVER 0515 1400 SCREW SMM 3 6 8 PCFLTX 08720 20185 SOURCE CASTING 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 34 Replaceable Parts Hardware Top 3 PLACES 2 PLACES 4 PLACE 3 9 7 5 F PLAC
53. chapter in the service manual for information on display lamp replacement Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 15 Red Green or Blue Pixels Specifications Red green or blue stuck on pixels may appear against a black background Tot test for these 0 press System SER MEN TS In a properly display the following will not occur complete rows or columns of stuck pixels more than 5 stuck pixels not to exceed a maximum of 2 red or blue and 3 green m 2 or more consecutive stuck pixels m Stuck pixels less than 6 5 mm apart Dark Pixels Specifications Dark stuck on pixels may appear against a white backgr these dob press System SERVICE M 575 66 4 To test for In a properly working display the following will not occur a more than 12 stuck pixels not to exceed a maximum of 7 red green or blue more than one occurrence of 2 consecutive stuck pixels a Stuck pixels less than 6 5 mm apart Newton s Rings To check for the patterns known as Newton s Rings change the display to white by pressing the following keys Figure 6 8 illustrates non acceptable examples of Newton S Rings 6 16 Digital Control Troubleshooting 3 Rings Acceptable 4 Rings Unacceptable sb6123d Figure 6 8 Newtons Rings Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 17 A19 GSP and A18 Display Troubleshooting Measure Display Power Supply Voltages Entering A19 Measu
54. electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Required Diskette 3 5 diskette 1 44 MB formatted DOS Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top bottom and left side covers refer to Covers in this chapter 2 Remove the front panel refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter 3 Turn the instrument upside down and disconnect the ribbon cable item 1 from the disk drive 4 Remove the four screws item 2 that secure the disk drive to the disk drive bracket There are two screws on the top and two screws on the bottom 5 Slide the disk drive out of the analyzer and set the disk drive aside 6 Remove the four screws item 3 that secure the disk drive bracket to the side of the analyzer and remove the bracket Note Save the screws removed in this step for use later when installing the new disk drive bracket 14 30 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures A3 Disk Drive Assembly sb659d Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 31 A3 Disk Drive Assembly Replacement 1 Attach the plug part number 08753 40016 to the new disk drive with a 2 hex screw part number 0515 1048 2 Attach the disk drive bracket part number 08753 00152 to the disk drive with the three remaining 2 socket head screws Note Place the disk drive on a horizontal and flat surface w
55. interface board The 5VCPU is routed to the 19 GSP where it is regulated to 3 3 V and sent to the display The 19 GSP also controls and supplies power to the A20 backlight inverter The voltages generated by the inverter are then routed to the display Display power is not connected to the protective shutdown circuitry so that the 18 display assemblies can operate during troubleshooting when other supplies do not work Note If blanking pulses from the A19 GSP are not present then 3 3 V will not be sent to the display Digital Control Theory The digital control functional group consists of the following assemblies front panel A2 front panel processor A7 CPU A10 digital IF Al6 rear panel a 18 display A19 GSP A20 Inverter These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the entire analyzer They provide math processing functions as well as communications between the analyzer and an external controller and or peripherals Figure 6 1 is a block diagram of the digital control functional group Theory of Operation 12 7 Al Front Panel The Al front panel assembly provides user interface with the analyzer It includes the keyboard for local user inputs and the front panel LEDs that indicate instrument status The RPG rotary pulse generator is not electrically connected to the front panel but provides user inputs directly to the front panel processor A2 Front Panel Processor Th
56. ond return box to HP Outside U S A do not use ad dress label instead address bo to the nearest HP office HP pays postage on boxes mailed in U S A 61 Figure 13 1 Module Exchange Procedure 134 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings The following pages list the replacement part numbers and descriptions for the HP 8719D 8720D 8722D Network Analyzer Illustrations with reference designators are provided to help identify and locate the part needed The parts lists are organized into the following categories Major Assemblies Top Major Assemblies Bottom Cables Top Cables Bottom w Cables Front a Cables Rear a Front Panel Outside Front Panel Inside Rear Panel Rear Panel Option 1D5 Hardware Hardware Bottom m Hardware Front Hardware Preregulator a Chassis Parts Outside Chassis Parts Inside a Miscellaneous Replaceable Parts 13 5 Major Assemblies Top Ref Option HP Part Description Desig Number Al NOT SHOWN see Front Panel Assembly Inside NOT SHOWN see Front Panel Assembly Inside 08720 60190 DISK DRIVE ASSY 08720 60156 ASSY SECOND CONVERTER NOT SHOWN see Major Assemblies Bottom 08722 60011 BD ASSY POST REGULATOR 8719D 8720D 08722 69011 BD ASSY POST REGULATOR REBUILT EXCHANGE 8719D 8720D 08722 60011 BD ASSY POST REGULATOR 8722D 08720 60129 BD ASSY SOURCE CONTROL 08763 60095 BD ASSY DIGITAL IF
57. replace 7 A15 A8 Destination assembly See Chapter 6 Power Supply Troubleshooting A14 Replace A14 A14 A10 Most likely A14 A10 Replace A10 A10 Replace A10 10 Replace A10 14 13 10 Most likely 14 or A18 as previous tests check 10 See Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting 6 26 Digital Control Troubleshooting If the Fault is Intermittent Repeat Test Function If the failure is intermittent do the following 1 Press SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS REPEAT ON to switch on the repeat function 2 Then press RETURN TESTS 4 Press to stop the function The test repeat function is explained in Chapter 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 3 Select the test desired and press EXECUTE T HP IB Failures If you have performed Step 3 Troubleshooting HP IB Systems in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here and you suspect there is an HP IB problem in the analyzer perform the following test It checks the internal communication path between the A7 CPU and the A16 rear panel It does not check the HP IB paths external to the inst t Press a If the analyzer fails the test the problem is likely to be the A16 rear panel a If the analyzer passes the test it indicates that the A7 CPU can communicate with the A16 rear panel with a 50 confidence level There is a good chance that the A16 rear panel is working This is because internal bus lines have been tested between the
58. 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz Figure 10 5 Node 8 Swp Err Phase Error Voltage 9 0 25V GHz Source oscillator tuning voltage This node displays the tuning voltage ramp used to tune the source oscillators You should see a voltage ramp like the one shown in Figure 10 5 If this waveform is correct you can be confident that the All phase lock assembly the source assemblies the A13 A14 fractional N assemblies and Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 31 the A52 pulse generator are working properly and the instrument is phase locked If you see anything else refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter Re ty ta ANALOG INPUT 8 L a E id STAAT 050 9000 BH STOP 20 050 0060 GHZ Figure 10 6 Node 9 0 25V GHz Source Tuning Voltage 10 All Gnd Ground reference 11 IF used for phase lock Counter ON analog bus Reading 10 MHz This node displays the IF frequency see Figure 10 6 as it enters the All phase lock assembly via the A7 ALC assembly This signal comes from the R sampler output and is used to phase lock the source 10 32 Service Key Menus and Error Messages EHI AU Re 2 t REF 1 255 U eal BUS TR UT 11 ir Ent 49 codo Mz Je START GOU GHz STOP 20 050
59. 1428 Replacement 1428 Disk Drive Assembly 1430 Tools 1480 Required Diskette 1430 Removal de x sectas SS weds cad RR Oe eed 1430 Replacement 1432 Contents 11 A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies 1434 lbols 1434 Removal gaga 1434 LED Board Removal 1434 Replacement loaa e 1434 A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly 1436 lbols Required ead Ga de ORT HC IE 1436 Removal 1436 Replacement 1486 Fan Assembly 1438 1488 Removal 1438 Replacement 1438 Post Repair Procedures 1440 15 Safety and Licensing NOES oui wg RE de RG A x p d 15 1 15 1 Je sog ISOLE GBA 25 SUR TK de Ge ROM 15 1 Shipment for 15 2 Safety 15 4 Instrument 15 4 General Safety 15 5 Safety Earth 15 5 Before Applying
60. 39 Chassis Parts Outside Option HP Part Qty Description Number 6041 9176 08720 00078 5041 9188 0515 1402 5041 0187 0515 1884 08720 00081 08720 00080 6041 9186 08720 00079 1460 1345 5041 9167 um SCREW SMM 3 6 8 PCPNTX CAP SIDE STRAP SCREW SMM 5 0 10 PCFLTX SIDE STRAP GOVER SIDE RONT CAP SIDE STRAP COVER BOTTOM ELEVATOR 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a BPH M 1 PLACES AG PLACES GO PLACES 10 2 PLACES 2 4 PLACES sbe57d 1340 Replaceable Parts Chassis Parts Inside 5022 1190 FRONT PANEL FRAME 0515 0375 SCREWSMM 3 0 16 CWPNTX 08720 00076 MEMORY DECK 0515 0458 SCREWSMM 3 5 8 CWPNTX 5021 5808 REAR FRAME 0515 2086 SCREW SMM 4 0 7 PCFLTX 08720 20131 SIDE STRUTS 08720 60116 ASSY CHASSIS ASSY DISK DRIVE 08720 60170 BD ASSY MOTHERBOARD 0 10 m PLACES PA 5 10 Replaceable Parts 1341 Table 13 1 Miscellaneous Replaceable Parts Description HP Part Number service Tools IP 8719D 8720D 8722D TOOL KIT includes the following 08722 60018 ADAPTER 2 4 mm F APC 3 5 F ADAPTER 2 4 mm F 3 5 M EXTENDER BOARD ASSEMBLY FOR 2ND CONVERTERS EXTENDER BOARD ASSEMBLY SOURCE CONTROL EXTENDER BOARD ASSEMBLY ADAPTER SMB M TO SMB M ADAPTER SMB F TO BNC F ADAPTER SMA F TO SMA F ADAPTER SMA M TO SMA M SMBTEE FUSE 125 V
61. 42 Sys Ver Init Recalls the initialization state for system verification from an analyzer verification disk in preparation for a measurement calibration It must be done before service internal tests 27 28 29 or 30 are performed Ver Dev 1 Recalls verification limits from disk for verification device 1 in all applicable S parameter measurements It performs pass fail limit testing of the current measurement Ver Dev 2 Same as 28 above for device 2 Ver Dev 3 Same as 28 above for device 3 Ver Dev 4 Same as 28 above for device 4 Cal Coef 1 12 Copies error term data from a measurement calibration array to display memory A measurement calibration must be complete and active The definition of calibration arrays depends on the current calibration type After execution the memory is automatically displayed Refer to the Error Term chapter for details 10 16 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Adjustment Tests The tests without asterisks are used in the procedures located in the Adjustments chapter of this manual except as noted 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Pretune Adj Generates source pretune values for proper phase locked loop operation Run test 44 first ABUS Cor Measures three fixed voltages on the ABUS and generates new correction constants for ABUS amplitude accuracy in both high resolution and low resolution modes Use this test before running test 43 above Intensity
62. 512 MHz 050 000 000 20 04 dB 250 000 000 20 105 dB 500 000 000 20 113 dB 750 000 000 20 12 dB 1 000 000 000 20 126 dB 250 000 000 20 136 dB 1 500 000 000 20 155 dB 1 000 000 000 20 197 dB 1 000 000 000 20 19 dB 000 000 20 192 dB 8 000 000 000 20 22 dB 9 000 000 000 20 235 dg 10 500 000 000 20 257 dB 12 000 000 000 20 295 dB 13 500 000 000 20 307 dB 15 000 000 000 20 317 dB 16 500 000 000 20 412 dB 18 000 000 000 20 46 dB 19 500 OW 000 20 345 dB 20 000 000 000 20 346 d amp Margin 063 103 101 103 1 Upper lim Lower Lim dB 19 976 dB dB 19 985 dB dB 19 987 dB dB 19 983 de dB dB dB 20 197 a 20 208 dB 19 984 19 989 dB 19 992 dB 19 999 dB 19 957 dB 20 315 dB 19 976 dB 20 342 dB 19 993 48 20 365 dB 20 016 8 20 025 dB 0 25 dB 20 234 dB 20 246 dB 20 55 dB 20 574 dB 20 622 dB 20 65 dB 20 666 dB dB dB 20 017 d amp 20 041 dB 20 036 dB 20 061 dB 20 076 dB 20 087 dB 20 087 dB 20 675 20 675 8568858885955558 Sb6157d Figure 2 16 Tabular Print Out of Verification Results 1 Frequency of the data points 2 Results of magnitude measurement as measured in the performance verification 3 Upper hit line as defined by the total system uncertainty specification 4 Lower limit line as defined by the total system uncertainty specification 6 Difference between the measured results and the limit line A positive numb
63. 60152 08720 60182 5087 7072 8490D OPT 006 8490D OPT 010 08720 20164 08720 20154 08722 20102 08720 20058 08722 20079 08720 20104 012 08722 20081 085 089 08720 20105 085 089 08722 20058 085 089 08722 20058 080 08720 20134 085 08720 20147 08720 20047 08722 20071 3TD 012 007 089 08720 20021 085 089 08720 20146 3TD 012 007 089 08722 20069 085 08722 20086 08720 20046 08722 20098 08720 20041 08720 20173 08722 20054 08720 20159 08722 20007 08720 20161 08722 20098 58 TO A60 8719D 8720D A58 TO A60 8719D 8720D A58 TO A69 8722D A58 TO A69 8722D A75 TO FRONT PANEL R CHANNEL IN 8719D 20D A75 TO FRONT PANEL R CHANNEL IN 8722D TO A64 TO 8 8719D 8720D 974 TO A58 8722D 34 TO PORT 2 SWITCH 8719D 8720D 34 TO PORT 2 SWITCH 8722D 34 TO PORT 1 SWITCH 8719D 8720D 34 TO PORT 1 SWITCH 8722D 13 22 Replaceable Parts Ref HP Part Description Number 08720 20162 A63 TO PORT 2 COUPLER 8719D 8720D 085 08720 20103 A63 TO PORT 2 COUPLER 8722D 085 08720 20163 A62 TO PORT 1 COUPLER 8719D 8720D 085 08722 20104 A62 TO PORT 1 COUPLER 8722D 012 085 089 08720 20165 1 FRONT PANEL IN 8719D 8720D 012 085 089 08722 20099 A71 TO FRONT PANEL B IN 8722D 012 085 089 08720 20166 A70 TO FRONT PANEL A IN 8719D 8720D 012 085 089 08722 20101 70 TO FRONT PANEL A IN 8722D 400 08720 20169 TO 75 08720 20171 74 TO 75 8719D 8720
64. 8 1 Typical R1 R2 A and BTraces 8 2 Directional Coupler PPPE TT TRENT o Qv OU bo iu C 0o 3 0v bo C co co Cn 9 1 Typical Return Loss Trace of a Good Cable 9 2 Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short and Open b ps 10 1 Internal Diagnostics Menus 10 2 Jumper Positions on the A7 CPU 10 3 Switch Positions on the 7 CPU 10 4 Service Feature Menus 10 5 Node 8 Swp Err Phase Error Voltage 10 6 Node 9 0 25V GHz Source Tuning Voltage 10 7 Location of Internal Counter Reading on Display 10 8 Node 12 Typical IF Detector Voltage Trace 10 9 Node 21 FN VCO Tun FN VCO Tuning Voltage 10 10 Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display 11 1 Typical EDF EDR Without 11 2 Typical ESF ESR Without Cables 11 3 Typical ERFVERR 11 4 Typical EXF EXR with 3 kHz Bandwidth 11 5 Typical 11 6 Typical ETF VETR 12 1 Simplified System Block Diagram 12 2 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram 12 3 Source Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram 124 Simplified Diagram of the Source Block 12 5 Signal Reparation Simplified Block Diagram
65. 90 bend in the middle of the cable and restart the measurement averaging by pressing Avg 5 To change the scale of the displayed traces press 6 To mark the end of the cable s specified range place a marker on the highest specified frequency of the cable Press enter the specified frequency X repeat arrow key repeat arrow key System Verification and 2 11 Performance Tests 7 Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes above and below the reference line and is within the specified frequency range See Figure 2 5 for example plots of this measurement In this S measurement the displayed trace results from energy being propagated down the cable and reflected back from the short Therefore the measured deflection value must be divided in half to reach the correct value If the cable does not meets the specifications in the cable manual it should be either repaired or replaced 544 109 MAG 02 dB REF 0 dB START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz Figure 2 5 Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Cable Connector Repeatability 1 To measure the cable connector repeatability connect a broadband termination at the end of the cable 2 Press the following keys on the analyzer Wait until the analyzer has averaged the measurement 128 times 2 12 System Verificati
66. A 12 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet 3 of 3 Magnitude Combine Systematic Errors In the space provided enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors Then combine these errors to obtain the total sum of systematic errors En x 521 Ets X 14 x 521 En x S22 x Say x Eq x S242 x 12 X 521 Subtotal k 1 mt n 0 Combine Random Errors the space provided enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors Then combine these errors in an RSS fashion to obtain a total sum of the random errors Et S21 En S21 Cy Cro Cr x 40 Cra 522 2 S21 Cont Come Crm x 14 Cr S22 Dmap2 x S21 Jw 2x 2 22 Subtotal 5 R Total Errors Emmn linear Erm log 15 Em S11 20 Log 1 ERN ___ Phase Arcsin 21 x f amp __ __ ___ ___ ___ ____ lt Cote X f Dots xf Determining System Measurement Uncertainties 13 Re 62 2 Q lt 4 Efnf Q Ernf P od 4E fnt 14Ernt 14 Dms 1 Dps 1 DUT as 14 Dm2b2 Dp 2b2 I 1 Crt2 1 Dpf2b2 F Drt Dpfs1 F Drt 1 Crt1 g 21 E FRI e o 14Crt1 M NIS WE RI LLL DRIFT Crmi Cf f Crmi Cf f Efd Efs 1 1 2 42 EfI Ers 14 Dm1b 14Dp 1b 1 4
67. A7 CPU and A16 and HP IB signal paths are not checked external to the analyzer Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 27 Source Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here This chapter is divided into two troubleshooting procedures for the following problems Incorrect power levels Perform the Broadband Power Problems troubleshooting checks m Phase lock error Perform the Phase Lock Error troubleshooting checks Source Troubleshooting 7 1 Source Troubleshooting Flowchart FAULT GELIP SECTION iE PHASE 1141 POWER MOT BROADBAHD Wo 77 BANE ERR ee BANC NG POWER o 11 BRCOADB AUC Se DETERMINE gt rra UM ee SADE AE PER TER GF PROBLEM RELATED HOLES 7 POWER PEOBLEM TES ES E BAND FELATEC PROBLEM CHECK FF AS SEMEL CHECh TABLE 10 4 ASSEMEL 2 PH ae Lod ton Moe POWER ka ind ERROR pe STOP REPLACE 2 12 Veo ASY PERFORM HO TUNE PROPEFL i Wi SUE TUME ADJUSTMENT EHE TED YES SWAP SAMPLER 5 PHASE NO LOC ERROR gt REPLACE ae XU R SAMPLER REPLACE A12 OG OTHER TESTS OR REPLACE A14 OR A13 NO IF BIAS VOLTAGES AND 2 FIRST SIGNAL OF REPLACE CHE
68. B POWER POWLLIST accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the external power loss data table that corrects coupled arm power loss when a directional coupler samples the RF output generates printed graphs of verification results when activated during a system verification ST CLEL EDITDONE selects a segment frequency point to be edited deleted from or added to the current data table Works with the entry controls allows modification of frequency cal factor and loss values previously entered in the current data table deletes frequency cal factor and loss values previously entered in the current data table adds new frequency cal factor and loss values to the current data table up to a maximum of 12 segments frequency points PTS deletes the entire current data table or list when is pressed Press NO to avoid deletion returns to the previous menu 10 8 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Self Diagnose Softkey You can access the self diagnosis function by pressing System SERVICE MENU SELF NOSE This function examines in order the pass fail status of all internal tests and displays NO FAILURE FOUND if no tests have failed If a failure is detected the routine displays the assembly or assemblies most probably faulty and assigns a failure probability factor to each assembly Test Descriptions The analyzer has up to 80 routines that
69. BAND SM2M 8722D Only allows you to enter DAC numbers in the range of 2900 through 4095 to generate test port output frequencies from 2 3 GHz to 4 9 GHz DAC Ni JAND SM2H HP 8719D 20D allows y you to enter DAC numbers in the range of 2900 through 4095 to generate test port output from 2 3 GHz to 4 9 GHz SM2H HP 8722D allows y AC numbers in the range of 2020 through 4095 to generate test port output frequencies from 18 2 GHz to 23 2 GHz toggles the automatic leveling ALC and off f SM4 automatically attempts to determine new pretune values when the instrument encounters phase lock problems for example harmonic skip With the frequencies and voltages do not change like when they are attempting to determine new pretune values so troubleshooting the phase locked loop circuits is more convenient This function may also be turned off to avoid pretune calibration errors in applications where there is a limited frequency response in the R 10 24 Service Key Menus and Error Messages PLL DIAG on OFF SM5 MORE reference channel For example in a high power test application using band limited filters for R channel phase locking displays a phase lock sequence at the beginning of each band This sequence normally occurs very rapidly making it difficult to troubleshoot phase lock problems Switching this mode ON slows the process down allowing you to ins
70. CONSTANTS NOT STORED 10 43 CORRECTION TURNED OFF 10 43 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 10 43 DEADLOCK 10 43 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs 10 44 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 10 44 Index 9 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR DISK not on not connected wrong addrs 10 44 DISK READ WRITE ERROR 10 45 error 10 40 INITIALIZATION FAILED 10 46 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS 10 46 NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 10 47 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS 10 47 NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL 10 48 NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE 10 46 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED 10 48 OVERLOAD ON 1 POWER REDUCED OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED 10 49 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY 10 49 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO 10 49 PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 10 50 PHASE LOCK FAILURE 10 47 PHASE LOCK LOST 10 50 POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 10 50 POWER METER INVALID 10 51 POWER METER NOT SETTLED 10 51 POWER SUPPLY HOT 10 52 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN 10 52 POWER UNLEVELED 10 51 PRINTER error 10 52 PRINTER not handshaking 10 52 Index 10 PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs 10 52 PWR MTR NOT ON CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR 10 51 SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 10 53 SELF TEST n FAILED 10 53 SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF RESET UNDER POWER MENU 10 53 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 10 53 TEST ABORTED 10 54 TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OV
71. Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse Contents 4 42 42 43 43 45 45 46 47 48 48 49 49 411 411 411 412 412 413 415 416 416 417 419 420 421 422 O O Ov i If the Red LED of the Al5isOn 5 9 Check the A8 Post Regulator 5 9 Verify the 15 Preregulator 2022024 5 10 Check for a Faulty Assembly 5 11 Check the Operating Temperature 5 13 Inspect the 5 13 If the Green LEDs of the 8 AION 5 14 Remove A8 Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection 5 14 Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages 5 14 Remove the Assemblies 5 15 Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry 5 16 Inspect the Motherboard 5 18 Erra Messages aos ea a Secs 5 19 Check the Fuses and Isolate 8 5 19 Fan Troubleshooting 5 20 Fan Speeds 5 20 Check the Fan Voltages 5 20 Short A8TP3 to Ground 5 20 Intermittent Problems 5 21 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence 6 2 CPU Troubleshooting 6 8 A7 Jumper Switch Positions 6 8 C
72. Cor Stores the current values of the intensity adjustments under for recall of display intensity values at power on Disp 2 Ex Not used in Adjustments Writes the secondary test pattern to the display for adjustments Press to exit this routine IF Step Cor Measures the gain of the IF amplifiers A and B only located on the A10 digital IF to determine the correction constants for absolute amplitude accuracy It provides smooth dynamic accuracy and absolute amplitude accuracy in the 30 dBm input power region ADC Ofs Cor Measures the A10 Digital IF ADC linearity characteristics using an internal ramp generator and stores values for the optimal operating region During measurement IF signals are centered in the optimal region to improve low level dynamic accuracy Serial Cor Stores the serial number input by the user in the Display Title menu in EEPROM This routine will not overwrite an existing serial number Option Cm Stores the option keyword required for Option 007 010 or any combination Cal Kit Def Loads the default calibration kit deilnitions device model coefficients into EEPROM Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 17 52 Power Adj This test measures power linearity at the test port It also generates correction constants to improve power linearity 53 Init EEPROM This test initializes certain EEPROM addresses to zeros and resets the display intensity correction constants to the default va
73. Dpfib1 F Drt Crm2 Cf f Crm2 Cf f t Efnt 14 Ernt RESIDUAL ERROR TERMS an CONNECTOR REPEATABILITY oem Efnf Ernf NOISE AND DYNAMIC ACCURACY LEGEND CABLES sb6158d ERROR MODEL FLOW CHART 46 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties Index 1 10 MHz precision reference assembly replacement 14 36 part numbers 13 32 2 2nd Converter Check 8 9 2nd LO Check 8 2 4 4 MHz Check 8 3 5 5 digital supply theory of operation 12 5 A A10 digital IF digital control 12 8 10 Digital IF 10 30 12 23 All Phase Lock 10 31 12 15 12 Reference 10 34 12 16 A13 Fractional N Analog Check with Spectrum Analyzer 7 1 1 A14 A13 Fractional N Synthesizer 12 14 A14 Divide by N Circuit Check 7 13 A14 Fractional N 10 35 A14 Fractional N Digital Check with Spectrum Analyzer 7 11 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signals Check 7 14 A14 VCO Exercise 7 13 A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope 7 12 15 preregulator theory of operation 12 4 A15 preregulator check 5 10 A15W1 plug detail 5 10 16 rear panel digital control 12 11 A18 display digital control 12 10 power 12 7 A19 GSP digital control 12 10 A19 walking one pattern 6 19 A1 A2 front panel troubleshooting 6 22 Al front panel digital control 12 8 A20 inverter digital control 12 11 A2 front panel processor digital control 12 8 A52 Pulse Generator 12 14 52 Pulse
74. Ea Tektronix J16 Prob s c es es eee hae ERE T PECES ERAS Sek ORM e RUE Tektronix J6503 Light Occluder 4 5 oec eee orar error sass Tektronix 016 0305 00 Antistatic Wrist Strap 55522255555 665 nha o EOS ECOL IER IS HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes Photometer warmup time 30 minutes Note This procedure should be performed with a photometer and only by qualified personnel 6 14 Digital Control Troubleshooting 1 Press MORE intensity at 100 2 Press System XECUTE set a white screen test pattern on the display 3 Set the photometer probe to NORMAL Press on the photometer to switch it on and allow 30 minutes of warm up time Zero the photometer according to the manufacturer s instructions 4 Center the photometer on the analyzer display as shown in Figure 6 7 HETWOFEF ANALYZER H 000000 D j 0 DU PHOTOMETEF PHOTOMETEF PROBE ib6142d Figure 6 7 Backlight Intensity Check Setup Note The intensity levels are read with a display bezel installed 5 If the photometer registers less than 50 Nits the display backlight lamp is bad Refer to the Replacement Procedures
75. En WS LC DL LL gp LLLA C2 Hid START 0 050 000 000 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz sb61 48d Figure 11 2 Typical ESF ESR W ithout Cables 11 10 Error Terms Reflection Tracking ERF and ERR Reflection tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path R path and the frequency response of the reflection test path A or B input path These error terms are characterized by measuring the reflection S1 S22 of the open and the short during the measurement calibration Note that coupler response is included in this error term Typically this appears as a slope of 0 5 dB from 0 84 GHz to 40 GHz and a roll off below 0 84 GHz which is typically 3 dB at 500 MEZ 15 at 100 MHz and 20 at 50 MHZ Significant System Components The open and short calibration devices have an effect on reflection tracking But large variations in this error term may indicate a problem in one of the signal paths Suspect the R signal path if the problem appears in both ERF and ERR Troubleshoot the A or B input paths first if only one reflection tracking term is affected Affected M easurements All reflection measurements high or low return loss are affected by the reflection tracking errors CH1 MEM log MAG 10 dB REF 0 dB START 0 050 000 000 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz OPTION 003 E
76. Figure 12 4 Simplifled Diagram of the Source Block The YIG oscillator has a main coil and an FM coil These are analogous to the woofer and the tweeter in a stereo speaker the woofer reproduces low frequencies and the tweeter reproduces high frequencies Similarly in the YIG oscillator the main coil allows large slow changes in frequency but cannot respond to high frequency deviations which are sent to the faster acting FM coils The tune current from the All phase lock assembly splits into two paths One path is lowpass filtered removing high frequency components and goes to the YIG main coil the other path is highpass filtered removing low frequency components and goes to the YIG FM coils The filters are matched in stop band response such that one picks up where the other leaves off Theory of Operation 12 17 The full YIG oscillator frequency range is achieved in two bands Band Frequency Range Low 50 MHz to 2 55 GHz High 2 55 GHz to 20 0 GHz Mid HP 8722D High HP 8722D 20 GHz to 40 GHz In the low band the 2 4 to 20 GHz output of YIG1 and the fixed 3 8 GHz output of the A57 fixed oscillator are mixed in the A53 mixer amplifier assembly In this band S2 and S8 switch A53 into the circuit The high band mid band HP 8722D uses the output of YIG1 The high band HP 8722D uses the output of YIG2 In the A58 M A D S microcircuit the YIG oscillator signal is modulated by the ALC OUT signal explained below to provide
77. GOG 000 GHz Figure 10 7 Location of Internal Counter Wading on Display 12 IF Det IF on AII phase lock after 40 MHz filter This node detects the IF as a voltage at the output of the 40 MHz filter on the All phase lock assembly The trace should be a flat line at about 1 7 V as shown in Figure 10 7 CH1 0 200 uU REF 1 691 U i START 050 000 600 GHz STOP 20 050 009 000 GHz Figure 10 8 Node 12 Typical IF Detector Voltage Trace Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1033 A12 Reference 13 14 15 16 17 18 Ext Ref Rear panel external reference input This node is used to detect an external reference voltage If an external reference timebase is used the voltage level should be about 0 6V If an external reference is not used the voltage level should be about 0 87V 100 kHz 100 KHz reference frequency Counter ON analog bus Reading 100 MHz This node counts the A12 100 kHz reference signal that is used on A13 the fractional N analog assembly as a reference frequency for the phase detector VCO Tune A12 VCO tuning voltage This node displays the tuning voltage for the A12 VCO It is used in the reference assembly VCO tune adjustment 2nd LO 2nd converter reference Counter ON analog bus Reading 9 996
78. Generator Check With Oscilloscope 7 16 A52 Pulse Generator Check With Spectrum Analyzer 7 17 A56 Lower Front Panel Assembly 12 21 A58M A D S 12 19 A60 and A61 DC Bias Tees 12 21 Index A62 and A63 Directional Couplers 12 21 A64 R Sampler 12 14 A69 Step Attenuator 12 21 A69 Step Attenuator Check 7 24 A74 Switch Splitter 12 20 A7 CC jumper positions 10 10 A7CPU digital control 12 8 CPU operation check 6 8 A8 fuses and voltages 5 14 A8 post regulator air flow detector 12 6 display power 12 7 green LEDs 12 6 shutdown circuit 12 6 theory of operation 12 6 variable fan circuit 12 6 A8 post regulator test points 5 6 A and B Sampler Check by Substitution 8 7 ABUS Cor 10 17 ABUS node 9 for power check 4 19 ABUS Test 10 14 accessories error messages check accessories troubleshooting 4 22 accessories troubleshooting chapter 9 1 accuracy of frequency adjustment 3 45 ADC Hist 10 15 ADC Lin 10 14 ADC main 10 27 ADC offset correction constants adjustment 3 14 ADC Ofs 10 14 ADC Ofs Cor 10 17 ADD 10 8 addresses for HP IB systems 4 7 adjustment Index 2 Jumper Switch Positions 3 8 ADC offset correction constants test 48 3 14 analog bus correction constants test 44 3 12 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband 3 49 frequency accuracy 3 45 IF amplifier correction constants test 47 3 13 initialize EEPROMs test 53 3 35 option numbers correction c
79. If you measure at least 8 dBm 3 dBm Option 007 at the other port either the directional coupler or the bias tee or the transfer switch S4 is faulty The power loss through each of these components should be negligible A69 Step Attenuator Check 1 Measure the input and output power of the step attenuator the loss should be negligible if the attenuator is set to 0 dB 2 If the 5 dB attenuation steps seem inconsistent the Operator s Check procedure in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here can be performed again 7 24 Source Troubleshooting Receiver Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise This section can be used to determine which receiver assembly of the instrument is faulty The two receiver assemblies that affect all three signal paths are the A10 digital IF and A12 reference assemblies The receiver assemblies that are associated with specific signal paths are listed in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Receiver Assemblies and Associated Paths Receiver Troubleshooting 8 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a re
80. LED remained on go to Display Troubleshooting A19 A18 a If the right LED does not remain on replace the A7 CPU assembly and repeat the three LED pattern checks a If the LEDs are held in any one of the patterns shown in Table 6 1 and have the corresponding error message replace the A7 firmware ICs Firmware ICs are not separately replaceable Replacement kits are listed in Chapter 13 Replaceable Table 6 1 LED Code and Pattern Versus Test Failed Message Displayed Faulty Component ROM IL FAIL ROM IM FAIL ROM 21 FAIL ROM 2M FAIL Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 11 Checking A7 CPU Red LED Patterns For instruments with firmware revisions 7 xx and above The A7 CPU has five red LEDs that can be viewed through a small opening in the rear panel of the analyzer See Figure 6 6 Four LEDs are easily viewable The fifth LED must be viewed by looking to the left at an angle 1 Cycle the power while observing five red LEDs Cycle the power on the analyzer and observe the five red LEDs After an initial pattern the five red LEDs on the A7 CPU board should remain off a If the LEDs remained off then proceed to the assembly that you suspect has a problem If the LEDs did not remain off switch off the power and remove the bottom cover for further troubleshooting 1 f o oo o LED IS OFF CPU LED WINDOW LED IS OM eboid Figure 6 6 CPU LED Window on Re
81. MHz This node counts the 2nd LO used by the 2nd converter assemblies to produce the 2nd IF of 4 KHz PL Ref Phase lock reference Counter ON analog bus Reading 1 MHz This node counts the reference signal used by the phase comparator circuit on the All phase lock assembly VCXO Tune 40 MHz VCXO tuning voltage This node displays the voltage used to fine tune the A12 reference VCXO to 40 MHz You should see a flat line at some voltage level the actual voltage level varies from instrument to instrument Anything other than a flat line indicates that the VCXO is tuning to different frequencies Refer to the frequency accuracy adjustment in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 10 34 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 19 12 Gnd Ground reference 20 12 Gnd Ground reference 14 Fractional N Digital 21 FN VCO Tun 14 FN VCO tuning voltage This node displays the Al4 FN VCO tuning voltage This voltage comes from the A13 fractional N analog assembly and is the return path for the fractional N phase locked loop If the A13 and A14 assemblies are functioning properly and the VCO is phase locked the trace should look like the trace shown in Figure 10 8 when in Log Freq sweep mode Any other waveform indicates that the FN VCO is not phase locked The vertical lines in the trace indicate the band crossings The counter can also be enabled to count the VCO frequency Use CW mode CHI AUZ
82. PLL OUT TO SS wi 4 J3 2 50 PHASE LOCK BD F 40MHz 55 YiG1 a ss 7 9 1 0 4 ec OXY Sear aye ee DENIS 27D ARPS soy Sige sD pate ate at om ton gt E L REFERENCE BOARD I eee PL REF 1MHz SWPERR 2 2 cnz j W6 Ay PRETUNE E RED LED AMBER LED DAC EQ y SR E _ 2 UNLOCK PULL DOWN meas LIII due Qu gt oO tmixer lt 0 05 2 55 GHz SRE TUNE 012 gt AC HIGH amp MI amp 12 REFERENCE PL REF 17 lt gt LONBAND MEAD gt URN w Std and 089 p mr i xiu RAE READ gt SAMPLER B fos a r7 3 SAMPLER A 1 11 IN 1 1 Hd Bee IN i TUNE vexo 10MHz SRC TUNE p IN 1 18 Hz l SET DAC LOW EUREN ada ie EAT REF 40MHz eto win F4 4000 READ gt BdBm 457 1 UN RHE ood a m 100kHz TO A13 FIXED OPEN ON TEST PORT t 14 1 SRC TUNE 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP abe 40Mdz l LU pp fine MD aL D 1 I3 12 READS gt 5 dim OUT i OUT D ee 13 READS gt 19 d amp m DESEE VCXO ADY SIGNAL SEPARATION er 52 DIRECTIONAL 5 aem o 15 vco TUNE L COUPLER 18 2nd LO 9 99
83. POWER SUPPLY HOT 10 52 power supply shutdown 15 green LED 12 5 15 red LED 12 5 theory of operation 12 5 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN 10 52 power supply troubleshooting chapter 1 Power Supply Troubleshooting Flowchart 5 2 POWER UNLEVELED 10 51 power up sequence check 4 12 precision frequency reference assembly replacement 14 36 part numbers 13 32 Preliminary Checks 2 5 preregulated voltages theory of operation 12 5 Index 12 preregulator theory of operation 12 4 preregulator LEDs check 4 11 preregulator voltages 5 10 Preset 10 9 preset sequence 4 3 Pretune Cor 10 17 preventive maintenance 1 l l principles of microwave connector care 1 4 PRINTER error 10 52 not handshaking 10 52 not on not connected wrong addrs 10 52 printer HP IB address 4 7 procedures Jumper Switch Positions 3 8 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 3 14 Analog Bus Correction Constant Test 44 3 12 EEPROM Backup Disk 3 36 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment 3 49 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment 3 45 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 47 3 13 Initialize EEPROMs Test 53 3 35 Option Numbers Correction constant Test 50 3 17 retrieve correction constant data from EEPROM backup disk 3 38 Serial Number Correction Constant Test 49 3 15 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 3 10 PWR MTR NOT ON CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR 10 51 R rack mount flange kit with handles
84. QUT Wis 82 5 W69 m EEEE A70 STEP I GNAL 5 ONT ON 62 DIRECTIONAL m LT PATTEN m COUPLER n SWITCH COUPLER 55 r 4 W63 TO SAMPLER A y 1 REAR PANEL s4 S OPT 012 ATTEN S iid FRONT PANEL ree eL one JUMPER 62 6 ert eee 71 STEP A63 DIRECTIONALI LOCIS b TEN COUPLER wes 56 LOWER 0 7048 SAMPLER FRONT PANEL w67 E adi _ Figure 8 11 HP 8720D OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM STANDARD 4 24 1 TroubleshootingHere HP 8720D OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM OPT 400 089 and 012 HIGH STABILITY IFREQUENCY REFERENCE SOURCE OPTION 105 AE 20 tow 5 10MHz ADJ ms _ _ i A14 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL RECEIVER CW 1 GHZ TEST PORT POWER 5 dim SMB TEE 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP CW 1 GHZ TEST PORT POWER 5 dBm OPEN ON TEST PORT 10 MHz SINEWAVE O 1 VPP 71 EXT TRIG ee IFNVCOTUNE Veo End 459 SOURCE INTERFACE _ 2 A10 DIGITAL SOURCE SAMPLER 74 N l FROM A12 APAD LSWP FROM 14 Ey RTE M SOURCE CONTROL SWITCH TO A i 42 80 240 MHz ESM Veni es ma 2 41 AUX W47 541 J3 OO CONTROL LOWBAND 4 MHz FROM 12 sy 5 wy AND I 9 TRL ese BIAS CAL
85. SR 08722 20076 54 TO A69 8722D SR 08720 20249 60 TO A62 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20056 A60 TO 62 8722D SR 08720 20025 A61 TO 63 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20057 A61 TO A63 8722D SR 08720 20248 84 TO A60 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20073 84 60 8722D SR 08722 20077 84 TO A60 8722D SR 08720 20011 84 TO 1 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20074 84 TO A61 8722D SR 08722 20078 84 TO A61 8722D SR 08720 20009 84 TO A69 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20072 84 TO A69 8722D SR 08722 20076 84 TO A69 8722D SR 08720 20033 A62 TO A65 SR 3TD 012 007 089 08720 20021 58 A69 8719D 8720D SR 085 089 08720 20146 58 TO A69 8719D 8720D SR 3TD 012 007 089 08722 20060 A58 TO A69 8722D SR 085 08722 20086 A58 TO A69 8722D SR 400 08720 20073 A58 TO A74 8719D 8720D SR 400 08722 20054 A58 TO A74 8722D 13 16 Replaceable Parts i SR 08720 20041 A72 TO A64 SR 08720 20169 74 TO A70 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20063 A74 TO A70 8722D SR 08720 20168 74 TO A71 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20062 A74 TO A71 8722D SR 08720 20173 A74 TO A58 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20054 A74 TO A58 8722D SR 08720 20171 A74 TO A76 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20055 A74 TO A76 8722D SR 08720 20174 TO 55 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20064 A74 TO 85 8722D SR 08720 20103 A67 TO A73 SR 08720 20075 JUMPER 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20024 JUMPER 8722D SR 08720 20135 A69 TO REAR PANEL SOURCE OUT 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20085 A60 TO REAR PA
86. Tests 2 6 Run the Operation 2 6 Clean and Gage Connectors 2 7 Check the Test Port Cables 2 8 Return Loss of Cables 2 8 Insertion Loss of Cables 2 10 Magnitude and Phase Stability of Cables 2 11 Cable connector Repeatability 2 12 System Verification 2 15 Verification Kit aaa a 2 15 Measurement Uncertainty 2 16 Measurement Traceability 2 16 What the System Verification Verifies 2 17 Required Equipment and Accessories 2 18 Cable Substitution 2 18 Calibration Kit Substitution 2 19 Equipment Initialization 2 20 Measurement Calibration 2 22 Verification Device Measurements 2 25 Connecting a 2 25 In Case of Difficulty 2 29 If the System Fails the Verification Test 2 29 Interpreting the Verification Results 2 32 1 Frequency Accuracy Performance Test 2 35 If the Instrument Fails This Test 2 2 36 2 Power Flatness Performance Test 2 37 If the Instrument Fa amp ThisTest 2 38 Power Linearity Performance Test 2 40 For 8719D 20D Only 2 40 For 8722D Only 2 41 I tbe Instrument Fails This Test 2 43 4 Dynamic Range Per
87. Tests Run the Operation Check a Clean and Gage all Connectors a Check the Test Port Cables System Verification Equipment Initialization Measurement Calibration a Verification Device Measurements a Interpreting the Verification Results Performance Tests 1 Frequency Accuracy Test 2 Power Flatness Test 3 Power Linearity Test 4 Dynamic Range Test a Performance Test Record 24 System Verificationa n d Performance ests Preliminary Checks Check the Temperature and Humidity Required Equipment and Tools HP 8719D 20D Only CaS MOU EET HP85052B D RE Cable Set icono c his sax Pa eae HP85131C D Verification ee ao obra taa eae aes HP 85053B Required Equipment and Tools HP 8722D Only Calibration Fico nl Seca EUR eO aA aia A HP85056A D RE Sel Soit Rc HP85133C D Verifiedton TT stare ste tenn ls hapten ducta Puce lle dota ad HP85057B Caution Use an antistatic work surface and wrist strap to lessen the chance of electrostatic discharge 1 Measure the temperature and humidity of the environment and write the values on the Performance Test Record The performance is specified at an ambient temperature of 23 C 3 Therefore the environmental TEMPERATURE M UST remain in the range of 20 C to 26 C Once the measurement calibration has been done the ambient te
88. Traceability To establish a measurement traceability path to a national standard for a network analyzer system the overall system performance is verified through the measurement of device characteristics that have a traceability path This is accomplished by electrically measuring devices in an HP verification kit The measurement of the verification kit device characteristics has a traceable path because the factory system that characterizes the devices is calibrated and verified by measuring standards that have a traceable path to the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST see Figure 2 7 This chain of measurements defines how the verification process brings traceability to the HP 8719D 20D 22D system measurements Therefore when your analyzer system is verified through the performance of the System Verification procedure a measurement traceability path is established 2 16 System Verification and Performance Tests NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF THEORY STANDARDS TECHNOLOGY MECHANICAL STANDARD GAGES RESISTOR DC RESISTANCE HEWLETT PACKARD STANDARDS LAB SELECTED VERIFICATION DEVICES SELECTED PRODUCTION BRAT LON CENTER d PROCESS CONTROL VERIFICATION KIT DEVICES TEST SYSTEM t VERIFICATION CALIBRATION KITS KITS Figure 2 7 National Institute of Standards and Technology Traceability Path for HP 8719D 20D 22D System Calibration and Verificat
89. Troubleshooting EPROM LOCATIONS NORMAL HRM ALTER ALT 5661410 Figure 6 3 7 Jumper Positions Firmware revisions 6 and below A7 CPU Assembly emm Normal Mode Alter Mode Rocker Slide sb6165d Figure 6 4 A7 Switch Positions Firmware revisions 7 xx and above Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 9 Checking A7 CPU Red LED Patterns For instruments with firmware revisions 6 xx and below The A7 CPU has four red LEDs that can be viewed through a small opening in the rear panel of the analyzer See Figure 6 5 1 Cycle the power Cycle the power on the analyzer and observe the four red LEDs All four LEDs should be on momentarily after power up If the four LEDs did not turn on replace the A7 CPU after verifying the power supply 2 Hold in the PRESET key Press and hold down the key while observing the four LEDs on A7 The far right LED should be off See Figure 6 5 a 9 LED WINDOW e LED IS OW LED 15 OFF Figure 6 5 CPU LED Window on Rear Panel 6 10 Digital Control Troubleshooting 3 Release the key Release the key and watch for the rapid sequence shown below Note that the far right LED always remains on still held down released Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 two left LEDs flicker 4 Observe and evaluate results a If the above sequence is observed and the far right
90. Us REF 40 Eus VEO LLL START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz Figure 10 9 Node 21 FN VCO Tun FN VCO Tuning Voltage 22 14 Gnd Ground reference 23 Count Gate Analog bus counter gate This node checks the analog bus counter gate signal You should see a flat line at 5V The counter gate activity occurs during bandswitches and therefore is not visible on the analog bus To view the bandswitch Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 35 activity look at this node on an oscilloscope using AUX OUT ON refer to AUX OUT on OFF under the Analog Bus Menu heading PEEK POKE Menu To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE Allows you to edit the content of one or more memory addresses The keys are described below Caution The PEEK POKE capability is intended for service use only PEEK 55 accesses any memory address shows it in the PEEL D active entry area of the display Use the front panel knob entry keys or step keys to enter the memory address of interest PEEK PEEK Displays the data at the accessed memory address allows you to change the data at the memory address accessed by the P Softkey Use the front panel knob pus keys Or step keys to change the data The A7CC jumper must be in the ALT position in order to poke Resets or clears the
91. a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top item 1 and bottom covers refer to Covers in this chapter 2 Remove the four rear standoffs item 2 3 If the analyzer has option 1D5 remove the BNC jumper from the high stability frequency reference item 3 If the analyzer has option 085 remove the RF cable item 4 and the connectors attaching hardware item 5 Remove the hardware item 6 that attaches the RS 232 connector to the rear panel Remove the four screws item 7 that attach the interface bracket to the rear panel Remove the six screws item 8 and item 9 that attach the preregulator to the rear panel Remove the eight screws item 10 from the rear frame four from the top edge and four from the bottom edge Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer and remove the stabilizer 10 Lift the reference board A12 from its motherboard connector and disconnect the flexible RF cable item 11 14 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Rear Panel Assembly 11 Pull the rear panel away from the frame Disconnect the ribbon cable item 12 from the motherboard connector pressing down and out on the connector locks Disconnect the wiring harness item 13 from the motherboard Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure iz E places dB 3 pla
92. a very significant contributor to the system performance substituting specified cables with cables of lower performance will increase the uncertainty of your measurement verification Refer to the 2 18 System Verification and Performances est s plots in the cable checks earlier in this chapter that show the performance of good cables It is highly recommended to periodically check test port cables to determine if they are good If the system verification is performed with non HP cables and fails but is then repeated with HP cables and passes the non HP cables are at fault It must be documented in the comments area of the performance verification printout that non HP cables were used in the system The effects of the non specified cables cannot be taken into account in the performance verification procedure See supported system configurations in Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 Calibration Kit Substitution The accuracy of the analyzer when it is used with any calibration kit is dependent on how well the kit standards are defined The measurement specifications for the system assume a measurement calibration with an HP calibration kit Measurement calibrations made with user defined or modified calibration hits are not subject to the performance specifications although a procedure shnilar to the standard verification procedure may be used See supported system configurations in Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 System Verification and 2 18 Perfo
93. access the other tests use the numeric keypad step keys or front panel knob The test number name and status abbreviation will be displayed in the active entry area of the display 104 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Table 10 1 shows the test status abbreviation that appears on the display its definition and the equivalent HP IB code The HP IB command to output the test status of the most recently executed test is OUTPTESS For more information refer to HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions located at the end of this chapter Table 10 1 Test Status Terms PASS PASS FAIL FAIL P IN PROGRESS NA NOT AVAILABLE ND NOT DONE DONE DONE EXET runs the selected test and may display these softkeys 5 1 continues the selected test TESR2 alters correction constants during adjustment tests evaluates the analyzer s internal operation These tests are completely internal and do not require external connections or user interaction evaluate the analyzer s external operation These additional tests require some user interaction such as keystrokes Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 5 verifies the analyzer system operation by examining the contents of the measurement calibration arrays The procedure is in the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Information about the calibration arrays is provided in the Error Terms chapter generates
94. analysis use the following approach to isolate the fault 1 Check the cable by examining the load match and transmission tracking terms If those terms are incorrect go to Cable Test 2 Verify the calibration kit devices Loads If the directivity error term looks good the load and the test port are good If directivity looks bad connect the same load on the other test port and measure its directivity If the second port looks bad as if the problem had shifted with the load replace the load If the second port looks good as if the load had not been the problem troubleshoot the first port Shorts and opens If the source match and reflection tracking terms look good the shorts and the opens are good If these terms look bad while the rest of the terms look good proceed to Verify Shorts and Opens Accessories Troubleshooting 9 3 Isolate the Fault in the RF Path Since the calibration devices have been verified the problem exists in the test port connector the coupler or elsewhere in the internal RF path Table 9 1 shows which assemblies affect each error term If more than one error term is bad note which assemblies are common to each of the bad terms These are the suspects The method of fault isolation that must be used is assembly substitution Assembly Substitution Fault Isolation At this point the error term problem has been isolated to a specific port and you should have a list of suspected assemblies
95. and stores the correction constants For more information refer to the Adjustments chapter Display Tests These tests return a PASS FAIL condition All six amber front panel LEDs will turn off if the test passes Press to exit the test If any of the six LEDs remain on the test has failed 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Disp cpu corn Checks to confirm that the CPU can communicate with the A19 GSP board The CPU writes all zeros all ones and then a walking one pattern to the GSP and reads them back If the test fails the CPU repeats the walking 1 pattern until is pressed DRAM cell Tests the DRAM on A19 by writing a test pattern to the DRAM and then verifying that it can be read back Main VRAM Tests the VRAM by writing all zeros to one location in each bank and then writing all ones to one location in each bank Finally a walking one pattern is written to one location in each bank VRAM bank Tests all the cells in each of the 4 VRAM banks VRAM video Verifies that the GSP is able to successfully perform both write and read shift register transfers It also checks the video signals LHSYNC LVSYNC and LBLANK to verify that they are active and toggling RGB outputs Confirms that the analog video signals are correct and it verifies their functionality Inten DAC Verifies that the intensity DAC can be set both low and high 10 6 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Test Options Menu To access this menu
96. and then press Table 2 3 Power Values for Flatness Test odel O ption Test Power Setting HP 8719D 20D HP 8719D 20D Option 007 5 dBm HP 8722 5dBm HP 8722D Option 007 10 1 to set a 300 second sweep to initiate a single sweep 8 During the sweep notice the maximum and minimum power level readings and write these on the Performance Test Record The analyzer remains at each frequency point for 1 5 seconds to allow the power meter sufficient time to settle 9 Connect th r sensor to port 2 and press 10 Repeat steps 5 through 8 If the Instrument Fails This Test 1 Ensure that the power meter and power sensor are operating to specification 2 Inspect the analyzer port connectors the adapter and the power sensor connector for damage Poor match at these connections can generate power reflections and cause the analyzer to appear to be out of limits 3 Marginal failures especially at the high or low end may be due to the power sensor calibration factor approximation method A calibration factor approximation of 4 as in the above example induces an error of about 2 38 SysteWerification and Performances cst s 0 15 dB lb eliminate the calibration factor approximation as the cause of failure do the following nd rotate the knob to the frequency in question b Set the calibration factor on the power meter to the value indicated by the power sensor c The
97. before removing or disconnecting assemblies a When extensive disassembly is required refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures m Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts to identify specific cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter If the red LED goes out the particular assembly removed or one receiving power from it is faulty If the red LED is still on after you have checked all of the assemblies listed in Table 6 3 continue to the Operating Temperature Table 5 3 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection for Troubleshooting the 15 Assembly RemovalOr otherAssembliesthatReceive DisconnectionMethod Power from the Removed Assembly 1 A14 Frac N Digital Remore from Card Cage Nome 2 1 Test Set Interface 84 Transfer Switch 56 LED Front Panel Disconnect W91 from A7 A3 Disk eae E 5 A2 Front Panel Interface Disconnect W83 from 2 Front Panel Keyboard 5 12 Power Supply Troubleshooting Check the Operating Temperature The temperature sensing circuitry inside the A15 preregulator may be shutting down the supply Make sure the temperature of the open air operating environment does not exceed 55 C 131 F and that the analyzer fan is operating a If the fan does not seem to be operating correctly refer to Fan Troubleshooting at the end of this chapter a If there does not appear to be a temperatu
98. check the source a If you have unexpected results or if the analyzer indicates a specific test failure refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting The analyzer reports the first failure detected If the analyzer indicates failure but does not identify the test press GD to search for the failed test Then refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Likewise if the response to front panel or HP IB commands is unexpected troubleshoot the digital control group 2 Press 19 ki to perform the Analog Bus test If this test fails refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting If this test passes continue with the next procedure to check the source Start Troubleshooting Here 4 16 Source Phase Lock Error Messages The following list contains all phase lock error messages and their descriptions NO IF FOUND CHECK INPUT LEVEL The first IF was not detected during the pretune stage of phase lock NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL The first IF was detected at the pretune stage but phase lock could not be acquired thereafter PHASE LOCK LOST Phase lock was acquired but then lost PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed at power on when pretune values drift or when phase lock problems are detected A problem aborted a calibration attempt POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK The analyzer is achieving phase lock but possib
99. could 7 not be acquired Refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS Error Number You cannot store a calibration set due to insufficient memory 70 You can free more memory by clearing a saved instrument state from an internal register which may also delete an associated calibration set if all the instrument states using the calibration kit have been deleted You can store the saved instrument state and calibration set to a disk before clearing them After deleting the instrument states press to run the memory packer Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1047 NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL Error Number When the analyzer is performing a power meter calibration the 198 HP IB bus is unavailable for other functions such as printing or plotting OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 14 dBm at one of the test 58 ports The RF output power is automatically reduced to 85 dBm The annotation PJ appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch on the power again OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 14 dBm at one of the test 59 ports The RF output power is automatically reduced to 85 dBm
100. divided down to 1 MHz then applied to a phase frequency detector that compares it to a crystal controlled 1 MHz signal PL REF from the 12 reference assembly see 12 Reference the Crystal Reference Frequencies below Any phase or frequency difference between these two signals produces a proportional DC voltage Tuning the YIG Oscillator The output of the phase frequency detector is filtered to remove any 1 MHz feedthrough and fed to an integrator The output of the integrator is converted to a tune current This brings the appropriate YIG oscillator closer to the desired frequency which in turn reduces the phase frequency detector output voltage When the voltage is reduced to zero and the divided down 1st IF frequency is equal to the 1 MHz reference frequency PL REF phase lock is achieved Phase Locked Sweep When the source is phase locked to the synthesizer at the start frequency the synthesizer starts to sweep The phase locked loop forces the source to track the synthesizer maintaining a constant 10 MHz Ist IF signal The full sweep is generated in a series of subsweeps by phase locking the source signal to the harmonic multiples of the synthesizer At the transitions between subsweeps phase lock is broken the source is held at this frequency Table 12 1 lists the subsweep frequencies from the synthesizer and the source Theory of Operation 12 15 Table 12 1 Subsweep Frequencies Band Synthesizer Harmonic MHz
101. front panel 6 22 CPU control 6 8 A8 fuses and voltages 5 14 accessories error messages 4 22 CPU control 6 8 digital control 4 12 disk drive 4 8 fan voltages 5 20 for a faulty assembly 5 11 HP IB systems 4 7 line voltage selector switch fuse 5 8 motherboard 5 13 operating temperature 5 13 operation of A7 CPU 6 8 phase lock error messages 4 16 plotter or printer 4 8 post regulator voltages 5 6 power supply 4 11 power up sequence 4 12 preregulator LEDs 4 1 1 rear panel LEDs 4 11 source 4 16 Check A12 Reference 7 9 Index 4 Check 14 Fractional N Checks With ABUS 7 10 check front panel cables 6 24 Check Open Loop Power 7 8 Check the Analyzer Internal Tests 2 6 Check the Temperature and Humidity 2 5 Check the Test Port Cables 2 8 Clean and Gage All Connectors 2 7 cleaning of connectors 1 4 CLEAR LIST 10 8 CMOS RAM 10 10 codes for analog bus 10 39 coefficients 11 1 components related to specific error terms 9 2 Connecting Device 2 25 connection techniques 1 4 connector care of 1 4 Connectors Clean and Gage 2 7 connectors inspection and gaging 9 2 CONTINUE TEST 10 7 controller HP IB address 4 7 controller troubleshooting 4 9 conventions for symbols 10 38 correction constants ADC offset test 48 3 14 analog bus test 44 3 12 display intensity test 45 6 14 IF amplifier test 47 3 13 initialize EEPROMs test 53 3 35 option numbers test 50 3 17 retrieval fr
102. in the slots on the back side of the preregulator and also in the slot in the card cage wall After reinstalling the preregulator A15 be sure to set the line voltage selector to the appropriate setting 115 V or 230 V 14 26 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures A 15 Preregulator Assembly sb 52d Assembly Replacement and Pest Repair Procedures 14 27 A19 Graphics Processor Assembly Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver a 15 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the front panel refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Disconnect the two ribbon cables item 1 and item 2 3 Remove the two screws item 3 that attach the GSP to the front of the analyzer 4 Pull the GSP board out of the analyzer Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 28 Assembly Replacement and Poet Repair Procedures A19 Graphics Processor Assembly Ld sbe90d Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 29 A3 Disk Drive Assembly Tools Required m 2 mm extended bit allen wrench 1 5 TORX screwdriver T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver T 20 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD
103. md 8722D Only 4 690 GHz 2529 20 17 GHz HP Fes Only m If the IF signals are correct replace the A11 7 6 Source Troubleshooting a If the IF signals are incorrect check the pulse generator bias voltages see A51 Interface Power Supplies If the voltages are correct replace the A52 pulse generator A52 Pulse Generator Check With Spectrum Analyzer 1 Connect the spectrum analyzer to the network analyzer A65 A sampler J3 IF output 2 Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer center frequency 10 MHz span 20 MHz marker 10 MHz 3 Press the following keys on the network analyzer to set the fractional N vco to 180 MHz MODE UNE DAC W BAND 1 4 Slowly turn the network analyzer front panel knob until the spectrum analyzer measures an output frequency of 10 MHz o If the 10 MHz signal appeared disregard the rest of this step and continue with the next step a If the 10 MHz signal didn t appear connect the R sampler J3 to the spectrum analyzer input and change the center frequency to 10 MHz a If the 10 MHz signal appears on the R sampler but not on the A sampler the A sampler is faulty a If the 10 MHz signal didn t appear at either the A sampler or the R sampler connect the network analyzer s PORT 1 to the spectrum analyzer input Press the following keys on the network analyzer SYSTEM ON o Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer center fre
104. operation of the assemblies within each of the functional groups Theory of Operation 12 3 Power Supply Theory The power supply functional group consists of the A15 preregulator and the 8 post regulator These two assemblies comprise a switching power supply that provides regulated DC voltages to power all assemblies in the analyzer The 15 preregulator is enclosed in a casting at the rear of the instrument behind the display It is connected to the A8 post regulator by a wire bus A15W1 Figure 12 2 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group AB POUST REGULATOR SWITCHING LANE 1 INSTRUMENT POWER POWER 77 REGULATOR REGULATORS MI CROC FAN POWER PROBE POWER 5V0 GREEN LEDS 2 i ALL DURING OFF DURING E HORMAL OPERATION HORMAL OPERATION DURING NORMAL OPERATION sg6105e Figure 12 2 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram A15 Preregulator The 15 preregulator steps down and rectifies the line voltage It provides a fully regulated 5 V digital supply and several preregulated voltages that go to the A8 post regulator assembly for additional regulation The A15 preregulator assembly includes the line power module a 60 KHz switching preregulator and overvoltage protection for the 5 V digital supply It provides LEDs visible from the rear of t
105. power control and leveling ALC Automatic Leveling Control A portion of the source output is detected in the M A D S and sent back to the source Interface Board ALC circuit This circuit generates a control signal which is sent to the modulator in the M A D S to control the power The tune voltage from the main coil drive is used to change the source amplitude as a function of frequency thus compensating the source for losses in the transfer switch bias tees and couplers 12 18 Theory of Operation Signal Separation pu AG DIRECTIONAL PORT 1 COUPLER 54 TRANSFER San Ts i va A58 M A D S A amp 9 STEP i _ ATTEN PORT 1 E p nd gt 1 10 dBm 50 SS eC _e_ Mec A63 TO DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 65 dBm PORT 2 sb623d Figure 12 5 Signal Separation Simplified Block Diagram A58 M A D S Modulator Amplifler Detector Splitter The M A D S microcircuit accomplishes four separate functions The modulator controls the output power proportionally to the signal produced by the ALC circuit on the source Interface board The amplifier provides up to 30 dB of amplification that will allow up to 5 dBm 10 dBm HP 8722D to be output from the test port The detector outputs a voltage that is proportional to the RF power out of the amplifier This voltage is used by the ALC circuit on the source Interface board The
106. programmed to divide by N part of the time and by N 1 part of the time The ratio of the divisions yields an average equal to the desired fractional frequency API analog phase interpolator current sources in the A13 assembly correct for phase errors caused by the averaging The resulting synthesized signal goes to the pulse generator A52 Pulse Generator the Harmonic Comb The signal from the synthesizer drives a step recovery diode SRD in the A52 pulse generator assembly The SRD generates a comb of harmonic multiples 1st LO of the VCO frequency which goes to the samplers One of the harmonics is 10 MHz above the desired start frequency A64 R Sampler Down Converting the Signals The A64 assembly is part of the receiver functional group It is also included here because it is an integral part of the source phase locking scheme In the R sampler the 1st LO signal from the pulse generator is mixed with the SOURCE OUT signal from the source The difference IF intermediate frequency produced is nominally 10 MHz For phase locking part of this IF signal is routed back to the All phase lock assembly Additional information on the sampler assemblies is provided in Receiver Theory 12 14 Theory of Operation 11 Phase Lock Comparing Phase and Frequency The 10 MHz 1st IF signal from the A64 sampler is fed back to the All phase lock assembly In All it is amplified limited and filtered to produce a 10 MHz square wave This is
107. reflection Ctml cable 1 transmission magnitude stability Crml cable 1 reflection magnitude stability Crm2 cable 2 reflection magnitude stability Dmsl drift magnitude C source to port 1 Efs effective source match error Efr effective reflection tracking error Efl effective load match error Efd effective directivity error Crr2 Connector repeatability reflection The detailed equation for each of the previous terms is derived from the signal flow model located at the end of this appendix Reflection Phase Uncertainty Erp Reflection phase uncertainty is determined from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty with the test signal magnitude The worst case phase angle is computed This result is combined with the error terms related to thermal drift of the total system port 1 cable stability and phase dynamic accuracy Er Erp Arcsin 2Cpfl x f Dpsl Dpfsl x f where Cpfl cable phase frequency port 1 Dpsl drift phase degree source to port 1 Dpfsl drift phase degree frequency source to port 1 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties A 5 Transmission Uncertainty Equations Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Etm An analysis of the error model located at the end of this appendix yields an equation for the transmission magnitude uncertainty The equation contains all of the first order terms and some of the significant second order terms The terms under the radical are random in c
108. test verify and adjust the instrument This section describes those tests InternalTests This group of tests runs without external connections or operator interaction All return a PASS or FAIL condition All of these tests run on power up and preset except as noted 0 ALL INT Runs only when selected It consists of internal tests 3 1 1 13 16 and 20 Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed If all pass the test displays a PASS status Each test in the subset retains its own test status 1 PRESET Runs the following subset of internal tests first the ROM RAM tests 2 3 and 4 then tests 5 through 11 14 15 and 16 If any of these tests fail this test returns a FAIL status Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed If all pass this test displays a PASS status Each test in the subset retains its own test status This same subset is available over HP IB as TST It is not performed upon remote preset 2 ROM Part of the ROM RAM tests and cannot be run separately Refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter for more information Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 9 Note The following descriptions of tests 3 and 4 apply to instruments with firmware revisions 6 xx and below 3 CMOS RAM Verifies the A7 CPU CMOS long term memory with a non destructive write read pattern A destructive version that writes over stored data is shown in Table 10 2
109. test 1 and outputs an integer test status Status codes are as follows 0 2 pass 1 2 in progress 3 not available 4 not done 5 done Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 38 Error Messages This section contains an alphabetical list of the error messages that pertain to servicing the analyzer The information in the list includes explanations of the displayed messages and suggestion to help solve the problem Note The error messages that pertain to measurement applications are included in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide ADDITIONALSTANDARDSNEEDED Error Number Error correction for the selected calibration class cannot be 68 computed until you have measured all the necessary standards ADDRESSED TO TALK WITH NOTHING TO SAY Error Number You have sent a read command to the analyzer such as ENTER 31 716 without first requesting data with an appropriate output command such as OUTPDATA The analyzer has no data in the output queue to satisfy the request FLOW RESTRICTED CHECK FAN FILTER Error Number Something is restricting the air flow into the analyzer Check for 20 any debris and clean or replace the fan filter ANALOG INPUT OVERLOAD Error Number The power level of the analog input is too high Reduce the 60 power level of the analog input source 1040 Service Key Menus and Error Messages BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED Error Number The battery prote
110. to avoid spending a considerable amount of time on the verification only to have a failure caused by the cables Return Loss of Cables 1 Press Preset Menu 2 Perform an 13 l port measurement calibration at test port 1 Use a lowband and sliding load combination or a broadband load for the loads portion of the calibration If necessary refer to the operating manual for a detailed measurement calibration procedure to activate step sweep Note If the fixed load in your calibration kit is labeled BROADBAND you can use this load in the lowband portion of the measurement calibration 3 Connect the test port cable to port 1 and tighten to the specified torque for the connector type 4 Connect a broadband termination to the end of the cable 5 measure the return loss over the entire specified band press Marker Fctn activate the marker search tracking and find the worst case Si measurement See Figure 2 3 for an example of a return loss measurement Refer to the cable manual to see if the cable meets the return loss specification If it doesn t the cable should be either repaired or replaced 2 8 System Verification and Performance ests CHL 544 109 10 REF 1 14 278 dB 18 250 odo START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz Figure 2 3 Return Loss Measurement of Cables SystemVerificationa
111. troubleshoot the RF signal path 8 Press IODES NUM H to enter the service mode 9 Measure the M A D S output power at the R CHANNEL OUT port on the front panel For the HP 8719D 20D the power should be at least 18 dBm 13 dBm Option 007 For the HP 8722D the power should be at least 27 dBm 22 dBm Option 007 10 If the power level is correct replace the R sampler If the power level is not correct replace A58 Source Troubleshooting 7 7 Check Open Loop Power HP 8719D 20D Only 1 Press SYSTEM CSTW SERVICE MENU SERVIC Use a power meter to measure power at the R CHANNEL OUT port on the front panel The power should be at least 23 dBm 18 dBm Option 007 Press G3 GJ The power should be at least 18 dBm 13 dBm Option 007 You may have to change the DAC number slightly to achieve a good power reading If power is correct proceed with Check A12 Reference If the high band power level is lower than 18 dBm check A55 YIG 1 power at S2J3 Connect a power meter to S2J3 and measure the DAC num high band values from about 3200 to 4095 If the power at S2J3 is greater than 0 dBm replace the A58 M A D S m If the power is less than 0 dBm check YIG 1 output power at the A53 end of W6 Power greater than 10 dBm indicates proper power out of YIG at about 4 5 GHz If the analyzer is not phase locking at this frequency in normal operation the problem is wi
112. 0 Route du Nant d Avril 1 Avenue Du Canada Hewlett Packard Strasse 1217 Meyrin P Geneva Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf 61352 Bad Homburg v d H Switzerland F 91947 Les Ulis Cedex Germany 4122 780 8111 France 49 6172 16 0 33 1 69 82 60 60 Great Britain Hewlett Packard Ltd Eskdale Road Winnersh Triangle Wokingham Berkshire RG41 5DZ England 4 4 734 696622 INTERCON FIELD OPEBATIONS Headquarters Australia Canada Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 3495 Deer Creek Road 31 41 Joseph Street 17500 South Service Road Palo Alto California USA Blackburn Victoria 3130 Trans Canada Highway 94304 1316 61 3 895 2895 Kirkland Quebec H9J 2X8 416 857 5027 Canada 514 697 4232 China Japan Singapore China Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Japan Ltd Hewlett Packard Singapore Pte Ltd 38 Bei San Huan X1 Road 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji 150 Beach Road Shuang Yu Shu Tokyo 192 Japan 29 00 Gateway West Hai Dian District 81 426 60 2111 Singapore 0718 Beijing china 65 291 9088 86 1 256 6888 Taiwan Hewlett Packard Taiwan 8th Floor H P Building 337 Fu Hsing North Road Taipei Taiwan 886 2 7129404 Safety and licensing 15 3 Safety Symbols The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument Caution Caution denotes a hazard It calls att
113. 0 ASSY M A D S2 8722D 400 5086 6980 ASSY M A D S2 8722D REBUIIT EXCHANGE 08720 60139 BD ASSY SOURCE INTERFACE 5086 7968 ASSY DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 8719D 8720D 5086 7518 ASSY DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 8722D 0055 0462 ATTENUATOR 6 DB 8719D 8720D NOT SHOWN see Cables Front NOT SHOWN see Cables Front NOT SHOWN see Cables Front 1826 0423 IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR 5086 7589 ASSY SWITCH 40 GHZ 8722D 08415 60057 ASSY MICROWAVE SWITCH For fuse part numbers on the A8 Post Regulator refer to Table 13 1 in this chapter Replaceable Parts 13 7 Major HP 8719D 20D Assemblies Top Ag All al i m 7 BENE PU E ry j 00 13 8 Replaceable Parts Major HP 8722D Assemblies Top AS ASS 54 AG 12 A13 Als AST Gaei 90 77 5377 eee Ao SHAG 2 59 58 1 S1
114. 11 EE 48V 7 8 04 as Dar FILTER REG Te BE 7 AGND 7 TPO 9 10 FILTER 5 2V d TPS 18v 5 8 FILTER REG 2 AS ph MOTHER DRIVE o ro 12 8VPP BOARD FT Bs 6 Ana ABP1 i 5VD 3 18 19 5 05 Ll be id it I nan 5 52 53 TP4 H 5018 ENSE l 3 I ces STATUS SHUTDOWN CAUSES n A TO A8 EXCESSIVE CURRENT AIRFLOW 22 Foe mers DISPLAY OVER TEMP EA INTERFACE SHUTDOWN DISABLE SDIS AGNO 18V L d esp A oe eee eee Figure 5 7 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK D AGRAM Digital Control Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting digital control group assemblies consist of the following a Al front panel keyboard m 2 front panel interface 1 A7 CPU a AIO digital IF a 16 rear panel a A18 display A19 GSP Begin with CPU Troubleshooting then proceed to the assembly that you suspect has a problem If you suspect an HP IB interface problem refer to HP IB Failures at the end of this chapter Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here
115. 12 15 Phase Locked 12 15 A12 Reference the Crystal Reference Frequencies 12 16 Source Block The YIG Oscillator Signals 12 17 ALC Automatic Leveling 12 18 Signal Separation 12 19 A58 M A D S Modulator Amplifier Detector Splitter 12 19 Option 400 A58 M A D and A74 Switch Splitter 12 20 A69 Step Attenuator 12 21 S4 Transfer Switch 12 21 A56 Lower Front Panel 12 21 A60 and A61 DC Bias Tees 12 21 A62 and A63 Directional Couplers 12 21 Receiver Theory ee Abe 12 22 Samplers and Second Converters 12 22 Digita Wc s io o x ee Sy E EA eA A 12 23 Contents 9 13 Replaceable Parts Replacing an assembly ae RB Re ee Rebuilt Exchange Assemblies Ordering Information Replaceable Part Listings a 0 0 Major Assemblies Top Major Assemblies Bottom Cables Top 25 5 e Mee EAA Cables Bottom 3g do Cables Front lt 2 Sex v xo ao dh e ae de aS Cables Rear ina mirom Sank Dati ee ende Xu A RE Front Panel Assembly Outside Front Panel Assembly Inside Rear Panel Assembly 5 4 4 80 ew ro 9 xo a Rear Panel Assembly
116. 19D HP 8719D Opt 007 HP 8720D HP 8722D HP 8722D Opt 007 13 0 dBm PESE System Verification and 2 51 Performance Tests Test Description Power Linearity Power Settings Py BP 8719D 20D HP 8722D 0 05 20 GHz HP 8722D 20 40 GHz P2 HP 8719D 20D HP 8722D P3 HP 8719D 20D HP 8722D 0 05 20 GHz P4 HP 8719D 20D HP 8722D Power Value Settingsfor Testing Linearity Power Settings HP 8719D 20D HP 8719D 20D HP 8722D HP 8722D Option 007 option 007 04 Ft 10 dBm Prat 5 dBm Pret 548 104 154 10 dBm 1048 uum 20 Ps 8 tum cum mam 2 52 System Verification and Performance Tests 4 Dynamic Range HP 8719D 20D 0 05 to 0 050000101 GHz 0 839999899 to 0 84 GHz 0 84 to 2 GHz 2 to 8 GHz 8 to 20 GHz HP 8722D 0 05 to 0 050000101 GHz 0 889999899 to 0 84 GHz 0 84 to 2 GHz 2 to 8 GHz 8 to 20 GHz 20 to 40 GHz 3 dB less for Option 085 or Option 012 System Verification and 2 53 Performance Tests Adjustments and Correction Constants The accuracy of the analyzer is achieved and maintained through mechanical adjustments electrical adjustments and correction constants The correction constants are empirically derived data that are stored in memory and then recalled to refine the instrument s measurements and to determine its proper oper
117. 2 HP 8722D 0 25V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 a If the waveform appears normal in one but not all frequency bands go to Band Related Problems located later in this chapter a If the waveform appears abnormal in all frequency bands refer to Broadband phase Lock Problems below Source Troubleshooting 7 5 Power Not Within Specifications Perform these power adjustments 1 output power adjustments 2 blanking adjustments a If power holes exist use the block diagram located in Start Troubleshooting Here and the location diagrams in Replaceable Parts to check the cables and connections in the RF path If power levels are incorrect are not 3 dBm of setting in only one or two bands go to Band Related Problems located later in this chapter If power levels are incorrect in all bands go to Broadband Power Problems Broadband Phase Lock Problems Phase lock problems can be caused by incorrect pretune correction constants 1 Perform the source pretune correction constant procedure service test 43 see Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants to fix this potential problem 2 Then press PRESET persists to see if the phase lock problem 3 If the phase lock problem persists continue It could be caused by a fault in one of these source assemblies All phase lock A12 reference A18 fractional N analog A14 fractional N digital AD1 test set interface 52 pulse generator A58
118. 2 8 revision firmware softkey 10 37 RGB outputs 10 6 10 19 ROM 10 9 S S4 Transfer Switch 12 21 Samplers and Second Converters 12 22 Sampler Voltage Check 8 8 SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 10 53 SEGMENT 10 8 selector switch check 5 8 Index 13 self diagnose softkey 10 9 self test 4 3 SELF TEST n FAILED 10 53 sequence check for power up 4 12 Serial Cor 10 17 serial number correction constants adjustment 8 15 service and support options 1 8 service center procedure 4 2 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 1 service features 10 22 service key menus 10 1 service features 10 22 service key mnemonics 10 1 service mnemonic definitions 10 38 SERVICE MODES 10 23 service modes more menu 10 25 service test equipment 1 1 service tools list l l servicing the analyzer 4 2 setup fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 50 frequency accuracy adjustment 3 46 intensity check 6 15 source power check 4 17 setup check for disk drive 4 8 setup check for plotter or printer 4 8 short and open device verification 9 5 shutdown circuit post regulator 12 6 shutdown circuit on A8 12 6 shutdown circuitry disable 5 16 Signal Separation 12 19 softkeys 10 1 Source Block 12 17 source check 4 16 Index 14 Source Group Theory 12 12 source match ESF and ESR 11 10 SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF RESET UNDER POWER MENU 10 53 Source Pretune 12 14 source pretune correct
119. 2 TO 14 08720 20061 A53 TO 52 08722 20016 1 A54 51 8722 08720 60132 1 A9J1 TO A4 08720 60134 A9J2 TO A6 08720 60133 1 A9J5 TO 08514 60033 A11J8 TO A54J2 8722D 08720 60131 17 15 TO A54 8722D 08720 60144 A17J15 TO mW Wire Bundle n is the number of wires in the bundle Flexible Coax Cable SR Semi Rigid Coax Cable Replaceable Parts 13 13 HP 8719D 20D Cables Top PART GF REAR PAHEL E TERI I amp L PEFEFEI ICE JY iil 17 Hit Sm i ae H 7 7 f qT TA il zu g Tall A di i tL 74 13 14 Replaceable Parts EM Tl HP 8722D Cables Top PART OF REAR PANEL wil WA W31 W79 REFERENCE 5 1 WIO W7 WIL 4 We 3 2 427 7 49 48 7 WS W47 W52 sb6titd Replaceable Parts 13 15 Cables Bottom Type HP Part Description Number SR 085 089 08720 20150 85 TO FRONT PANEL R CHANNEL IN 8719D 8720D SR 085 080 08722 20058 85 TO FRONT PANEL R CHANNEL IN 8722D SR 085 089 08722 20058 85 TO 58 8722D SR 400 08720 20174 74 TO A55 8719D 20D SR 400 08722 20064 74 55 8722D SR 089 08720 20134 85 TO A74 SR 085 08720 20147 55 TO A74 SR 400 08720 20134 75 TO 55 8719D 20D SR 400 08722 20134 A75 TO A55 8722D SR 08720 20026 A63 TO A66
120. 3 9223 5063 9236 5063 9216 5063 9229 HP 92192A Table 13 2 Reference Designations and Abbreviations REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ID esse osos inside diameter intermediate frequency input output light emitting diode meters metric hardware megahertz millimeters monitor nominal nylon outside diameter fan motor electrical connector stationary portion jack rotary pulse generator Wir Ee AE eA tede cable transmission path wire auxiliary boa rd option coaxial central processing unit conical washer screws diameter electrostatic discharge external eene YIG oscillator reference SPARE e flathead screws replacement frontpanel rear panel MODA AA fractional N eee Socket head cap screws frequency TORX recess screws gigahertz quantity hexagonal volt Hewlett Packard wire formed Hewlett Packard interface bus Without hex recess screws yttrium iron garnet patch lock screws printed circuit peripheral interface group panhead screws Replaceable Parts 1345 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major assemblies of the HP 8719D 8720D 8722D network analyzer A table showing the corresponding post repair procedures for each replaced assembly is located at the end of this chapter Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 1 Replacing an Assembly The fol
121. 4A Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment minimizes the spurs caused by the API analog phase interpolator on the fractional N assembly circuits It also improves the sideband characteristics 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 1 1 2 Make sure the instruments are set to their default HP IB addresses HP 8719D 20D 22D 16 Spectrum Analyzer 18 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 49 500 COAX BNC NETWORK ANALYZER cc per input 10 MHz REF IN OUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER 2 4mm TO TYPE N f HP 87190 200 3 5mm TO TYPE N f 500 TYPE N CABLE ASSEMBLY sb644d Figure 3 11 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 3 Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows Reference Level 0 dBm Resolution Bandwidth 100 Hz Center Frequency 2 3451 GHz Span 2 5 GHz 3 50 Adjustmentsand Correction Constants 4 On the network analyzer press 5 Adjust the 100 kHz R77 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer The minimum signal may or may not drop down into the noise floor 100kHz API1 API2 APIS 4 ORANGE R77 R35 R43 R45 R47 AiSFractional N Analog Assembly 54692 Figure 3 12 Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments 6 On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 530 039 MHz 7 On the network analyzer press 8 Adjust the R35 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum a
122. 5 A6 Second Converters The Ist IF and the 2nd LO are mixed in the second converter The resulting difference frequency is a constant 4 kHz 2nd IF signal that retains the amplitude and phase characteristics of the measured signal The 2nd IF signals from all three second converter assemblies are input to the 10 digital IF assembly A10 Digital IF In this assembly the 2nd IF signals from the A and B second converters go through a gain stage Signals lower than 30 dB on these two signal paths are amplified by 24 dB to ensure that they can be detected by the ADC analog to digital converter For troubleshooting purposes the gain can be forced on or off using the service menus refer to Receiver Troubleshooting The R path signal is fixed at a level high enough to maintain phase lock and therefore requires no amplification All three signals are sampled at a 16 kHz rate set by a divided down 4 MHz clock pulse from the 12 reference assembly The signals are sequentially multiplexed into the ADC where they are converted to digital form The ADC conversions are triggered by timing signals from the CPU or the synthesizer or an external signal at the rear panel EXT TRIG connector The digitized data is serially clocked into the A7 CPU assembly to be processed into magnitude and phase data Theory of Operation 12 23 The processed and formatted data is finally routed to the display and to the HP IB for remote operation Refer to Di
123. 5 dB IN KI dy ext uq ein 3 REF IN exo e n DAC f LOWBAND m n pum I W52 Cn w52 21 40MHz 4MHz TO A10 40007 READ 8 dBm 457 1 TEST PORT 5 dBm w40 D NR 1 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP NE FA z 1 1 40MHz ose fU 1 OUT L OUT e SL Lo 3 8GHz vero ADs lt gt SIGNAL SEPARATION c as DIRECTIONAL 5 _ nn __ 1 15 vco TUNE pes en COUPLER w39 A74 SWITCH CN i SPLITTER 39 984MHz w40 511 922 w71 1 84 27 dBm i W26 LL N 63 DIRECTIONAL LEGEND SEE 4 i COUPLER i MEASURE ASG LOWER St1 saty Ej RESTART o gt cee ow QA 2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR Zh visitat i e r 1 1 TEST 5 1 0 5 5 1 0 i A1 FRONT PANEL This indicates Analog Bus node location 1 INTERFACE INTERFACE f Frequency Node IL Le d v Voltage Node eee EXT BIAS TO A17 ORS FAN POWER EXT REF A12 1 FRONT e This symbol indicates a node for the counter MICROCIRCUIT POWER AUX INPUT _ gt PANEL TNNT INSTRUMENT POWER 10 PROCESSOR ndicates main signal path EXT
124. 5 is On earlier in this procedure POWER SUPPLY HOT The temperature sensors on the 8 post regulator assembly detect an overtemperature condition The regulated power supplies on A8 have been shut down Check the temperature of the operating environment it should not be greater than 55 C 131 F The fan should be operating and there should be at least 15 cm 6 in spacing behind and all around the analyzer to allow for proper ventilation Check the Fuses and Isolate 8 Check the fuses associated with each of these supplies near the 8 test points If these fuses keep burning out a short exists Try isolating A8 by removing it from the motherboard connector but keeping the cable A15W1 connected to A8J2 Connect a jumper wire from A8TP2 to chassis ground If either the 15 V or 12 6 V fuse blows or the associated green LEDs do not light replace A8 If the 15 V and 12 6 V green LEDs light troubleshoot for a short between the motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 6 and 36 12 6 V and the front panel probe power connectors Also check between motherboard connector pins 2 pins 4 and 34 15 V and the front panel probe power connectors Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 19 Fan Troubleshooting Fan Speeds The fan speed varies depending upon temperature It is normal for the fan to be at high speed when the analyzer is just switched on and then change to low speed when the analyzer is cooled Check the Fan Vo
125. 63 sb6ll d Replaceable Parts 13 9 Major Assemblies Bottom Major Assemblies Bottom Ref option HP Part Description Number 08720 6014 BD ASSY CPU F W REV 6 AND BELOW 08720 60253 CPU REPAIR KIT F W REV 7 XX AND ABOVE AT 08720 6926p CPU REPAIR KIT F W REV 7 XX AND ABOVE REBUILT EXCHANGE 1420 0338 BATTERY LITHIUM 3 1 2AH A51 08720 60137 BD ASSY TEST INTERFACE 51 08720 60178 BD ASSY TEST INTERFACE A52 5086 7456 ASSY PULSE GENERATOR A52 6086 6466 ASSY PULSE GENERATOR REBUILT EXCHANGE A60 61 5086 7458 BIAS TEE 8719D 8720D A60 61 5086 6458 BIAS TEE 8719D 8720D REBUILT EXCHANGE A60 61 5086 7484 BIAS TEE 8722D A60 61 5086 6484 BIAS TEE 8722D REBUILT EXCHANGE A62 68 5086 7968 ASSY DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 8719D 8720D A62 63 5086 6968 ASSY DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 8719D 8720D REBUILT EXCHANGE A62 63 5086 7518 ASSY DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 8722D A62 63 5086 6518 ASSY DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 8722D REBUILT EXCHANGE 64 65 66 67 5086 7614 ASSY SAMPLER A64 A65 66 67 5086 6614 ASSY SAMPLER REBUILT EXCHANGE A69 33321 60050 ATTENUATOR 0 55 DB A69 085 400 33326 60006 ATTENUATOR 0 55 DB 70 71 75 76 33326 60006 ATTENUATOR 0 55 DB 474 400 089 5086 7975 ASSY SWITCHSPLITTER 8719D 8720D 474 400 089 5086 6975 ASSY SWITCH SPLITTER 8719D 8720D REBUILT EXCHANGE 74 400 089 5087 7002 ASSY SWITCH SPLITTER 8722 74 400 089 5087 6002 ASSY
126. 6MHz ae 5 vco 4 em 1 A a ST p 1 TRANSFER SWITCH i i 39 984MHz i w32 E og gl d 7 a l L w28 i i 2 V Na Lc 0 5 548 1 pe errs 2 UN 511 522 fA60 BIAS TEE eren W26 LA 63 DIRECTIONAL i t t COUPLER A56 LOWER 511 521 MERE SR FRONT PANEL 4 wan 3 LEGEND p i a 2 MEASURE A8 POST REGULATOR 16 REAR PANEL RESTART r7 gt 71 2 2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR visitat Bus I E Se TEST 1 0 TEST 5 1 0 1 FRONT PANEL This indicates Analog Bus node location INTERFACE INTERFACE f Frequency Node Sees OPT 0 12 uii Voltage Node ERE EXT BIAS A17 FRONT PANEL SUPPLY HY I FAN POWER EXT REF JP TO 12 FRONT i This symbol indicates a node for the counter JUMPER AND REGULATORS MICROCIRCUIT POWER AUX INPUT PANEL REGULATOR av INSTRUMENT POWER ext IRIG Jro A10 PROCESSOR Indicates main signal path W14 OUT w52 Wes i 1 1 1 a 18V EXT AM Be A17 i M CEN A70 STEP FEET WES 5 SIGNAL SEPARATION 62 DIRECTIONAL Ld HATTEN U
127. ALLY ON SELECTOR SWITCH sb618d Figure 4 4 15 Preregulator LEDs Check the 8 Post Regulator LEDs Remove the analyzer s top cover Switch on the power Inspect the green LEDs along the top edge of the 8 post regulator assembly a All green LEDs should be on a The fan should be audible In case of difficulty refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Start TroubleshootingHere 4 1 Digital Control Observe the Power Up Sequence firmware revisions 6 xx and below Switch the analyzer power off then on The following should take place within a few seconds On the front panel observe the following 1 All six amber LEDs illuminate 2 The port 2 LED illuminates 3 The amber LEDs go off after a few seconds except the CH 1 LED At the same moment the port 2 LED goes off and the port 1 LED illuminates See Figure 4 5 w The display should come up bright with no irregularity in colors m Four red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should illuminate They can be observed through a small opening in the rear panel If the power up sequence does not occur as described or if there are problems using the front panel keyboard refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting 4 12 Start Troubleshooting Hore ILLUMINATES DURING AND AFTER POWER UP 0000 0000 ILLUMINATES 24 SECONDS DURING POWER UP ILLUMINATES AFTER POWER UP sb625d Figure 45 Front Panel Power Up Sequ
128. ANDARD sb lizd Replaceable Parts 13 25 Cables Rear 08720 20098 08722 20024 08720 20135 08722 20085 08720 20144 08722 20084 8120 6876 8120 6407 8120 6382 8120 6379 13 26 Replaceable Parts Description REAR PANEL SOURCE OUT TO IN W58 TO W59 8719D 20D REAR PANEL SOURCE OUT TO IN W58 TO W59 8722D A69 TO REAR PANEL SOURCE OUT 8719D 8720D A69 TO REAR PANEL SOURCE OUT 8722D 84 TO REAR PANEL SOURCE 8719D 8720D 54 TO REAR PANEL SOURCE IN 8722D VGA OUT TO A22J2 A16 TO A17 TO A17 TO A17 Front Panel Assembly Outside 2950 0006 NUT HEX 1 4 32 2190 0067 WASHER LK 256 ID 1510 0038 GROUND POST 5061030 Replaceable Parts 13 27 Front Panel Assembly Inside Option HP Par Number 08720 40012 2090 0566 08720 60160 1000 0995 2190 0067 2950 0006 STD 089 08720 60162 012 08720 60163 085 08720 60164 012 085 08720 60165 08720 00096 1990 1864 08720 40010 0516 0430 0515 0665 0515 0372 8120 6892 08720 60180 E4400 40003 08719 80022 08720 80045 08722 80019 08720 60127 08720 60128 0950 8068 8120 6432 08720 60074 ND DF WwW t 13 28 Replaceable Parts Description DISPLAY HOLD DOWN DISPLAY LAMP ASSY COLOR LED A18 DISPLAY GLASS WASHER LK 256 ID NUT HEX 1 4 82 FRONT PANEL ASSY FRONT PANEL ASSY FRONT PANEL ASSY FRONT PANEL ASSY GASKET RPG INCLUDES CABLE AND HARDWARE FLUBBER KEYPAD
129. C Verifies that the intensity DAC can be set both low and high Test Patterns Test patterns are used in the factory for adjustments diagnostics and troubleshooting but most are not used for field service Test patterns are executed by entering the test number 62 through 76 then pressing IE The test pattern will be displayed and the softkey labels blanked To increment to the next pattern presssoftkey 1 to go back to a previous pattern press softkey 2 To exit the test pattern and return thesoftkey labels press softkey 8 bottom softkey The following is a description of the test patterns 62 Test Fat 1 Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output of the A18 display and checks for color purity Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 19 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 Test Pat 2 4 Displays a red green and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of the display and also the ability to independently control each color Test Fat 5 Displays an all black screen This is used to check for stuck pixels Test Pat 6 Displays a 16 step gray scale for verifying that the 19 GSP board can produce 16 different amplitudes of color in this case white The output comes from the RAM on the GSP board it is then split The signal goes thru a video DAC and then to an external monitor or thru some buffer amplifiers and then to the internal LCD display If the external display looks good but the internal displa
130. CH1 R log MAG 10 0 R Signal Path CH2R log MAG 10 dBm REF 0 dBm START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz CH1A log MAG 10 dBm REF 0 dBm CH2B ee cp START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz sb6115d Figure 8 1 Typical R1 R2 A and B Traces Receiver Troubleshooting 8 5 Directional Coupler Check 1 For the HP 8719D 20D set the output power to 10 dBm by pressing POWER POWER RANGE NAN POWER RANI E 2 For the HP 8722D set the output power to 15 dBm by pressing POWER POWER RANGE NAN POWER RANGES RANGE 3 Ii 3 Connect a 3 5 mm f to 2 4 mm m adaptor to one end of the RF flexible cable that is supplied with the tool kit 4 Connect the RF flexible cable from the output of the A69 step attenuator 3 5 mm directly to the J2 RF INPUT 2 4 mm of the suspect sampler Note To disconnect the rigid cable of the A69 step attenuator it may be necessary to disconnect addition rigid cables and loosen the transfer switch 5 Press Meas INPUT PO and measure the signal at the X sanies or press 2 to bypass the port 2 coupler and measure at the B Compare the trace to Figure 8 2 for the 8719D 20D For HP 8722D the normal power level of the trace would appear to be reduced by approximately 15 dBm Further increase in power 5 dBm would also be expected for in
131. CK 11 PHASE LOCK OR REPLACE 7 2 Source Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Before You Start Troubleshooting 1 Make sure all of the assemblies are firmly seated 2 Make sure that input R has a signal of at least 35 dBm about 0 01 Vp p into 50 ohms at all times to maintain phase lock To make this measurement perform the following steps a Perform steps 1 and 2 of the Source Pretune Correction Constants procedure located in Chapter 3 Make note of the DAC number that is displayed and then abort the procedure c Enter the DAC number determined from step a and press xi d Disconnect the front panel R CHANNEL jumper e Zero and calibrate a power meter Measure the power at R CHANNEL OUT Source
132. D 08722 20055 74 TO 75 8722D 08720 20103 A67 TO ATS Semi Rigid Coax Cable Wie WIZ Wo Wi4 W15 HP 6719D 20D 22D OPTIONS 007 012 089 sb6131d Replaceable Parts 13 23 Cables Front zu W 17 wit AID AZ SHOWN W41 A75 A76 W20 W75 WI ra HP 719D 20D 220 OPTIONS 400 089 13 24 Replaceable Parts 85 89 2 WII W3e 7 A75 W20 EN I i dg 17 Cables Front OPT 85 89 WI WoE 012 OPT O85 EIC E 2 4 A n tg 521 OS K l E X Ux UE i Wed WOS s 2 Ads Woe 012 0852 OPT 085 Wel wih WIS Wot ORE PT 012 012 HP 27120 20 220 OPTION 685 017 029 gt af uS 3 an Le NO aon H Ec o D D eu A OJ o o Q HP 8719D 200 ST
133. Drive Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Power Supply Check the Rear Panel LEDS Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs Digital Control Observe J Power Up Sequence firmware revisions 6 xx and CLOW aaa OD aces CR S Observe the Power Up Sequence firmware revisions 7 xx and above ee diee Mes ope gl ep die eo ce a EN Verify Internal Tests doa beo dou Next aene co Phase Lock Error lt _ Check Source Output Power No Oscilloscope or Power Meter Try the ABUS RECEIVERS nscale wk ee Switch Accessories 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Power Supply Troubleshooting Flowchart Assembly Replacement Sequence Simplified Block Start Heres ccs soo ant te Ue he sar fa sein 5 Check the Green LED and Red LED on 15 Check the Green 8 Measure the Post Regulator Voltages If the Green LED of the Alb is Off or Blinking
134. E RECE I VER ROF i fest PORT POWER 5 dBm R CHANNEL CW 1 GHZ TEST PORT POWER 5 dBm SMB TEE FRONT PANEL D w52 OPEN ON TEST PORT 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP JUMPER 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP 22 rows 4 10MHz ADJ LEX TRIG PUE IN IFNVCOTUNE 21 __ MORE UL 2 OY Se SQUE CONTROL Lo A59 SOURCE INTERFACE umm uuu A10 DIGITAL IF cot SAMPLER 65 SAMPLER re SOURCE CONTROL SWITCH TO 9 i FROM A12 LSWP FROM A14 As ES un F 30MHz l l 60 TO 240 MHz ror zz 41 AUX W47 d 43 lt 5 42 CONTROL LOWBAND Cy ec V AND COUNT Ve BIAS OSCILLATORS 5 gt counter n 52 PULSE 1 Lis I M A D S E 2 GENERATOR l INSTRUMENT EITAN ARG SAMPLE pd R RATE 15 A OUT os TP20 17 ext OFFSET f 16 IFA 4KHz T EM SLOPE f 9 lt 2 PIT ADC S 0g B OUT lt 5 LOW BAND ADJ BLANKING ADJ 54 Yic2 10 IFB 4KHz eue me E 2 EL m P 11 PHASE LOCK ues f n ont 20 40 j lt
135. E 419 65 77775 l A18 DISPLAY 5 VD FROM KIF 22 DISPLAY as 2 INTERFACE Wm CRYSTAL Te va CT F7 ve 1 T PORT INTERFACE EEPROM I MAIN CPU 2 DIGITAL SIGNAL FLASH RAM PROCESSOR z MAIN RAM RED LEDS NORMAL OFF CONTROL REFRESH CAUTION 700 20 55 ISS WR sb6164d Figure 6 2 DIGITAL CONTROL GROUP BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR FIRMWARE REVISIONS 7 XX AND ABOVE 6 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting This page is left intentionally blank Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 7 CPU Troubleshooting A7 A7 Jumper Switch Positions The A7 jumper switch must be in the Normal position NRM for these procedures This is the position for normal operating conditions To move the jumper switch to the Normal position NRM do the following 1 Remove the power line cord from the analyzer 2 Set the analyzer on its side 3 Remove the two comer bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a T 15 TORX screwdriver 4 Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover s back edge 5 Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument Caution Be sure to observe proper ESD procedures and precautions when performing the following step 6 Move the jumper switch to the Normal position NRM as shown in Figure 6 3 7 Replace the bottom cover comer bumpers and power cord 6 8 Digital Control
136. ED Error Number You have changed the active channel during a calibration so the 74 calibration in progress was terminated Make sure the appropriate channel is active and restart the calibration CALIBRATION REQUIRED Error Number A calibration set could not be found that matched the current 63 stimulus state or measurement parameter You will have to perform a new calibration CANNOT READ WRITE 1FILESYSTEM Error Number The disk is being accessed by the analyzer and is found to 203 contain an hierarchical file system or files nested within subdirectories The analyzer does not support 1 Replace the disk medium with a LIF or DOS formatted disk that does not contain files nested within subdirectories CAUTION POWER OUT MAY BE UNLEVELED Error Number There is either a hardware failure in the source or you have 179 attempted to set the power level too high The analyzer allows the output power to be set higher or lower than the specified available power range However these output powers may be unleveled or unavailable Check to see if the power level you set is within specifications If it is refer to the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer Service Guide for troubleshooting 1042 Service Key Menus and Error Messages CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED Error Number A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful You must 3 change the position of the jumper on A7 CPU assembly Refer to the A7 CC Jumper Position P
137. ER 10 54 WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK 10 54 messages error 10 2 microwave connector care 1 4 mnemonic definitions 10 38 mnemonics for service keys 10 1 monitor ABUS node 9 for power 4 19 motherboard check 5 13 N NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS 10 46 NO FILE S FOUND ON DISK 10 47 NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 10 47 NORMAL and ALTER jumper switch position adjustment 3 8 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS 10 47 NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL 10 48 NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE 10 46 NRM and ALT jumper switch position adjustment 3 8 number option adjustment 3 17 number serial adjustment 3 15 0 offset ADC adjustment 3 14 Op Ck Port 1 10 15 Op Ck Port 2 10 15 open and short device verification operating temperature check 5 13 operation check of A7 CPU 6 8 operation verification 2 1 post repair 3 3 14 40 Operator s Check 4 5 option 1CM rack mount flange kit without handles 1 7 105 high stability frequency reference 1 6 option 1CP rack mount flange kit with handles 1 7 Option 1D5 assembly replacement 14 36 part numbers 13 32 Option Cor 10 17 option numbers correction constants adjustment 3 17 options 007 Mechanical Transfer Switch 1 6 010 time domain 1 7 012 Direct Access Receiver Configuration 1 7 085 High Power System 1 6 089 Frequency Offset Mode 1 6 400 4 Channel Receiver 1 7 descriptions
138. ERIFICATION KIT KIT SUBSTITUTED CABLES SUBSTITUTE SUBST TUTED CABLES TROUBLESHOOT NG CHAPTER ADAPTERS SUBST I TUTE SUBST TUTED ADAPTERS GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOT NG CHAPTER Figure 2 14 Verification Fails Flowchart sb69d System Verification and Performance Tests 231 Interpreting the Verification Results The following figures show typical verification results with dump graphics activated that could appear on a system verification printout These printouts compare the data from your measurement results with the traceable data and corresponding uncertainty specifications Use these printouts to determine whether your measured data falls within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 30 Apr 1996 16 24 38 START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 13 510 000 000 GHz sb6156d Figure 2 15 Graphic Print Out of Verification Results Upper limit points as defined by the total system uncertainty specifications Lower limit points as defined by the total system uncertainty specifications Data measured at the factory Results of magnitude measurement as measured in performance verification Correction is turned on Measurement parameter 1 linear magnitude Serial number of device Device being measured sys ver 1 20 dB attenuator 232 SystemVerification and Performance e t s 20 19 01 34 45 STIMULUS CH1
139. ES 2 PLACES X MTS 9 8 027 Fa 2 8 5 p dE rare eee UNE EIS 3 15 uv Y sbollod Replaceable Parts 1335 Hardware Bottom Number 0515 0430 0515 0458 0515 0430 0515 2086 0515 1400 0515 0433 3050 0001 0515 0375 0515 0430 0515 1400 2200 0105 0515 0375 0515 0375 0515 0666 0515 0665 0515 0430 1 SCREW SMM 3 0 6 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 5 8 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 0 6 PCFLTX SCREW SMM 4 0 7 PCFLTX SCREW SMM 3 5 8 PCFLTX SCREW SMM 4 0 8 CWPNTX WASHER FL 172ID 8 SCREW SMM 3 0 6 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 0 6 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 5 8 PCFLTX SCREW SM 440 312 PCFLTX SCREW SMM 3 0 16 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 0 16 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 0 18 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 0 14 CWPNTX SCREW SMM 3 0 6 CWPNTX 08722 00016 SWITCH BRACKET 0515 2194 SCREW SMM 3 0 50 CWPNTX 0535 0031 1 NUT HEX SMM 3 0 08720 00113 1 BRACKET ATTENUATOR O 0 0 o Ot c t B2 N wns DO 4 4 49 A PF FDNY FS 13 36 Replaceable Parts HP 27220 OPTION 007
140. Figure 411 HP 8719D 20D 22D Overall Block Diagram Start TroubleshootingHen 4 23 HP 8720D OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM STANDARD OPT 085 089 and 012 az 1 0 Eo sb6122d 6 HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCE PTION 1D5 10MHz a 10MHz ADJ rea cree 1 2 PRECISION REFERENCE JUMPER ONLY USED WITH OPTION 1D5 SOURCE INTERFACE 59 SOURCE CONTROL AND BIAS ALC LO MED i A14 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL FNVCOTUNE VCO 21 60 240 MHz SOURCE CONTROL SWITCH TO 9 LOWBAND OSCILLATORS M A D S 27 Cem INPUTS COUNTER LSwe B TO A10 COUNT CATE 52 PULSE eh GENERATOR I VER r 1 EXT TRIG 10 DIGITAL IF AUX LSWP FROM A14 I 4 MHz FROM A12 ext OFFSET A G 1 IFA 4KHz De SLOPE 4 lt 2 OUT LOW BAND ADJ BLANKING ADJ IFB 4KHz iC PR RUN GL lt Fai Phase LOGK i R our TP16 A11 PHASE LOCK Sis ir i IFR T 5 TIS A68 6 dB l 37 42 50 A10 GND J3 s 1 v 2 v 4 F 40NHz este 55 ss 1 b M leron Woo e 40 25V GHz id 3 EPOR PLL FROM wie 12 IF DET m Lese
141. Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 8 2 Digital Control Troubleshooting A10 DIGITAL IF T MEASURE 7 M TA OBEAD OD ANE RESTART eee eee A16 REAR PANEL FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR t o TEST SET 1 0 TEST 5 1 0 FRONT PANEL NSTR WENT INTERFACE INTERFACE oe NODES RATE IS EXT BIAS 17 16KHz EXT 12 FRONT lt IFA 4KHz AUX INPUT M9 PANEL TO A10 y EXT TRIG M PROCESSOR EXT AM gt 17 z 2 IFB 4KHz TEST 5 0 4 FROM AQ LIMIT v MEAS RESTART Me 17 A IFR 4KHz MOTHERBOARD 0 37 2 50 A10 GND v ei vo o e ET SS Din 1 85 222 7 PARALEL l P B LINTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT
142. If they are off or flashing a problem is indicated The troubleshooting procedures later in this chapter detail the steps to trace the cause of the problem Shutdown Circuit The shutdown circuit is triggered by overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage or overtemperature It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to be shut down It also sends status messages to the A7 CPU to trigger warning messages on the analyzer display The voltages that are not shut down are the 5VD and 5VCPU digital supplies from the preregulator the fan supplies and the display supplies The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes by using a jumper to connect the SDIS line A8TP4 to ground Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector The fan power is derived directly from the 18 V and 18 V supplies from the A15 preregulator The fan is not fused so that it will continue to provide airflow and cooling when the instrument is otherwise disabled If overheating occurs the main instrument supplies are shut down and the fan runs at full speed An overtemperature status message is sent to the A7 CPU to initiate a warning message on the analyzer display The fan also runs at full speed if the air flow detector senses a low output of air from the fan Pull speed is normal at initial power on 12 6 Theory of Operation Display Power The A8 assembly supplies 5VCPU and 65 V not used to the 22 GSP
143. LEDs to flash a If the analyzer fails any of the tests 59 through 61 replace the A19 assembly a If all of the following is true replace the A18 display assembly CPU passes the LED test a GSP passes all of the internal display tests 59 through 61 a Power supply checks out Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 21 Front Panel Troubleshooting A1 A2 Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset 1 Press on the analyzer 2 Observe that all front panel LEDs turn on and within five seconds after releasing PRESET all but the CH1 LED turns off If all the front panel LEDs either stay or off there is a control problem between A7 and A1 A2 See Inspect Cables located later in this chapter a If at the end of the turn on sequence the channel 1 LED is not on and all HP IB status LEDs are not off continue with Identify the Stuck Key a If you suspect that one or more LEDs have burned out replace the Al keypad assembly Note Port 1 and port 2 LED problems may be caused by the malfunction of the LED board or the transfer switch Identify the Stuck Key Match the LED pattern with the patterns in Table 6 2 The LED pattern identifies the stuck key Free the stuck key or replace the front panel part causing the problem 6 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting Table 6 2 Front Panel Key Codes 1 of 2 Decimal Front Panel Block Number CH CH2 R L T s Response Entry Entry Response Response Ent
144. M A D S A64 R sampler 82 83 PIN switches 54 YIG 2 HP 8722D Only YIG 1 A59 source interface board S1 PIN switch switch splitter A72 R channel buffer amp HP 8722D Only Option 400 only source control board S5 R channel remote input switch A75 R channel attenuator Options 085 089 only 7 6 Source Troubleshooting Swap Samplers to Check A64 R Sampler 1 At A66J3 the B sampler see location diagram or the Replacement Procedures chapter of this manual replace the IF OUT cable with the IF OUT cable removed from A64J3 the R sampler 2 Press MEAS Ref REV B R Ignore the trace 3 If the phase lock problem persists the R sampler was not the problem Continue with Check Open Loop Power 4 If the phase lock error message disappears either the control voltage bias voltage RF signal or the R sampler itself is faulty 5 Check for about 0 02 V on the green sampler control wire if it is bad replace A5 1 6 Check the 15 V and 15 V bias voltages see A51 Interface Power Supplies If they are bad replace A51 Note For the HP 8722D if 2 4 mm flexible cables and 2 4 mm power sensors are not available troubleshooting is possible using 3 5 mm equipment and 3 5 mm to 2 4 mm adapters such as HP 11901D 2 4 mm f to 3 5 mm m and HP 11901B 2 4 mm to 3 5 mm f 7 If the control and bias voltages are good use a power meter and the flexible cable from the tool kit to
145. MEHT MODE SERVICE MENU RETURN SERVICE TEST OPT ONS ME MENU TESTS CONT LHUE TEST TEST OPTIONS on OFF SELF FECORD DIAGNOSE on OFF SERVICE LIMITS MODES ENORMI ANALOG BUS PWR LOSS on OFF on OFF PEEK LOSS SENSR POKE LISTS FIRMWARE DUMP GRAPH REVISION on OFF RETURN RETURN sb649d OFFSET TABLE MENU USE SENSOR A B CAL FACTOR SENSOR CAL FACTOR SENSOP POWER LOSS Figure 10 1 Internal Diagnostics Menus ag EDIT LIST EDIT SENSOR MENL MENL SEGMENT FREGUEMC CAL FACTOR EDIT DELETE ADU CLEAF LIST CONE GONE EDIT LIST EDIT SENSOF MENU MEHU SEGMENT FREQUENCY LOSS EDIT DELETE ADU CLEAF LIST DONE DONE Service Kay Menus and Error Messages 10 3 Tests Menu To access this menu press SERVICE MENU TESTS TS TEST D accesses a menu that allows you to select or execute the service tests The default is set to internal test 1 Note Descriptions of tests in each of the categories are given under the heading Test Descriptions in the following pages The tests are divided by function into the following categories o Internal Tests 0 20 External Tests 21 25 a System Verification Tests 26 42 o Adjustment Tests 43 54 a Display Tests 55 61 a Test Patterns 62 76 To access the first test in each category press the category softkey To
146. N LEDS es 1 NORMAL NORMAL OFF NORMAL ON STEADY OPT 089 w20 a m es r I iN i zx i T pee R CHAN F oin kyo D 1 C 1 IN 35 71 nner 57 o e ee oe oe L INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT x W7 l CHANNEL doi py Sooo os FRONT PANEL w52 A51 TEST SET x ME JUMPER INTERFACE a aa e 1 r 4 A7 CPU ewe cO 1 419 GSP Pais DISPLAY Lj Ds I l STEP P pj TFT i ATTENUATORS LIQUID l CRYSTAL p w33 CONTROL TRANSFER SWITCH DIGITAL VIDEO VIDEO DISPLAY s TOWER ER CPANEL INTERFACE PALETTE BIAS Zu FOR CPU DETA L REFER TO CHAPTER 6 BIAS to BIAS TEE S L J l DIGITAL CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING MEMORY i 2 GA 71 l ser CAUTION es 700 INVERTER ASSY Seay E et Se US EA TO A12 TO A11 TO A14 sb6120d Figure 4 12 HP 87200 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM OPTION 4 26 Start Troubleshooting Hen HP 8722D OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM STANDARD OPT 085 089 and 012 OPT 085 089 w23 TO ASB 426 HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCE SOURCE OPTION 105
147. NEL SOURCE OUT 8722D SR 08720 20144 34 TO REAR PANEL SOURCE IN 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20084 34 TO REAR PANEL SOURCE IN 8722D SR 08720 20159 34 TO PORT 2 SWITCH 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20007 34 TO PORT 2 SWITCH 8722D SR 08720 20143 A62 TO A70 SR 08720 20158 A65 TO A70 SR 08720 20157 A66 TO A71 SR 08720 20142 A63 TO A71 SR 08720 20145 A60 TO A75 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20061 A60 TO A75 8722D SR 08720 20186 A61 TO A76 8719D 8720D SR 08722 20059 A61 TO A76 8722D ISR Semi Rigid Coax Cable Replaceable Parts 13 17 Cables Bottom Wad W7 W25 W26 W41 W3e W22 4 GPTAGQ ONLY HF 8719D 20D 22D OPTION 400 sbotied 13 18 Replaceable Parts Cables Bottom Wag 77 was wa E T W70 v A cie X3 W71 25 W26 41 W39 W40 W22 W3 W4e OPT400 CNL HP S719D ZoD 2zD OPTION 400 We 2 W3e WIS Wi HP 6719D 20D 220 OPTION 012 1330 Replaceable Parts 13 19 Cables Bottom Was w3 Wad WFO W71 WES Wo W4l W39 Wwa WIZ2 ONLY HF oS 10200220 OPTIONS 400 os i koe 23 7 UN
148. NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL 10 48 NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE 10 46 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED 10 48 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED 10 48 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED 10 49 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY 10 49 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO 10 49 PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 10 50 PHASE LOCK FAILURE 10 47 PHASE LOCK LOST 10 50 POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 10 50 POWER METER INVALID 10 51 POWER METER NOT SETTLED 10 51 POWER SUPPLY HOT 10 52 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN 10 52 POWER UNLEVELED 10 51 PRINTER error 10 52 PRINTER not handshaking 10 52 PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs 10 52 PWR MTR NOT ON CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR 10 51 SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 10 53 SELF TEST n FAILED 10 53 SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF RESET UNDER POWER MENU 10 58 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 10 53 TEST ABORTED 10 54 TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OVER 10 54 WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK 10 54 error messages 10 2 10 40 error term inspection 9 2 error terms 11 1 directivity EDF and EDR 11 9 isolation crosstalk EXF and EXR 11 12 load Match ELF and ELR 11 13 reflection Tracking ERF and ERE 11 11 source match ESF and ESR 11 10 transmission tracking ETF and ETR 11 14 E terms 11 1 external tests 10 4 10 15 EXTERNAL TESTS 10 5 F failure 1 2 front panel 6 22 key stuck 6 22 failures HP IB 6 27 fan air flow de
149. Normal 8 3 Directional Coupler Check 8 6 A and B Sampler Check by Substitution 2 8 7 Sampler Voltage 8 8 2nd Converter Check 8 9 9 Accessories Troubleshooting Inspect and Gage 9 2 Inspect the Error Terms 9 2 Isolate the Fault in the RF Path 9 4 Assembly Substitution Fault Isolation 9 4 Cable Testi 05 Xx E Be caedes 9 4 Verify Shorts and Opens 9 5 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Key Menus 10 1 Error Messages 10 2 Service Key Menus Internal Diagnostics 10 2 Tests Menu 10 4 Display Tests 10 6 Test 10 7 Self Diagnose Softkey 10 9 Test Descriptions 10 9 Internal Tests 10 9 External amp 10 15 System V erification Tests 10 16 Adjustment Tests ius Display Tests Test Patterns 10 19 Service Key Menus Service Features 10 22 Service Modes 10 23 Service Modes More Menu 10 25 Analog Bus 10 26 Description of the Analog Bus 10 26 The Main
150. Note If you will be measuring highly reflective devices such as filters use the test device connected to the reference plane and terminated with a load for the isolation standard b Press averaging to at least 16 Press 1 to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz d Press e Return th press 16 to change the urement and Error Terms 11 3 The following table lists the calibration coefficients along with their corresponding test numbers You may wish to refer to this table when performing the Error Term Inspection procedure Table 1 1 1 Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests Calibration Calibration Type Coefficient NOTES Meaning of first subscript D directivity S source match R reflection tracking X crosstalk L load match T transmission tracking Meaning of second subscript F forward R reverse Response and Isolation cal yields Ex or if a transmission parameter 821 812 or Ep or Eg if a reflection parameter S11 S22 TOne path 2 port cal duplicates arrays 1 to 6 in arrays 7 to 12 114 Error Terms Error Term Inspection Note If the correction is not active press CORRECTION ON 1 Press System 5 TS 81 1 The analyzer copies the first calibration measurement trace for the selected error term into memory and then displays it Table 11 1 lists the test numbers 2 Press Scale Ref and adjust the scale and reference to study th
151. ON TIME DELAY 0 25x 0 27 2110 0425 FUSE 0 754 125 V NON TIME DELAY 0 25 0 27 2110 0424 FUSE 2A 125 V NON TIME DELAY 0 25x 0 27 2110 0425 FUSE 4A 125 V NON TIME DELAY 0 25x0 27 2110 0475 FUSE 1 125 V NON TIME DELAY 0 25x0 27 2110 0047 FUSE 0 5A 125 V NON TIME DELAY 0 25x0 27 2110 0046 pr cables HP IB CABLE 1M 3 3 FT HP IB CABLE 2M 6 6 FT HP IB CABLE 4M 13 2 FT HP IB CABLE 0 5M 1 6 FT Po RmchapPant DOVE GRAY for use on frame around front panel and painted portion of handles 6010 1146 FRENCH GRAY for use on side top and bottom covers 6010 1147 PARCHMENT WHITE for use on rack mount flanges rack support flanges and front panels 6010 1148 Order the model number HP 8719DU 8720DU 8722DU plus the upgrade option designation Replaceable Parts 1343 Table 13 1 Miscellaneous Replaceable Parts continued Description ESD Supplies ADJUSTABLE ANTISTATIC WRIST STRAP 5 FT GROUNDING CORD for wrist strap 2 x 4 FT ANTISTATIC TABLE MAT WITH 15 FT GROUND WIRE ANTISTATIC HEEL STRAP for use on conductive floors Other KEYBOARD OVERLAY for external keyboard SYSTEM RACK KIT ALSO ORDER THE FOLLOWING FILLER PANEL 7 INCH RACK MOUNT FLANGE KIT for instruments with handles RACK MOUNT FLANGE KIT includes instrument handles RACK MOUNT FLANGE instrument handles not included FRONT HANDLE FLOPPY DISKS 3 5 INCH DOUBLE SIDED box of 10 1344 Replaceable Parts 08763 80131 HP 85043D HP 40104A 506
152. Preparatory Steps 24 24 544 2828 6 ee He eS For 8722D Analyzers Only For All Analyzers In Case of Difficulty Blanking Adjustment Test 54 In Case of Difficulty Initialize EEPROMs Test 53 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure Loading Loading Firmware into an Existing CPU In Case of Difficulty Loading Firmware IntoaNewCPU In Case of Difficulty Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustment In Case of Difficulty Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Instruments with Option 105 Only In Case of Difficulty Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment In Case of Difficulty Contents 3 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Assembly Replacement Sequence 0 Having Your Analyzer Serviced Step 1 Initial Initiate the Analyzer Self Test Step 2 Operators Description x eoi Roby Moto ze si a e CR CE Praced te Step 3 HP IB Systems If Using a Plotter or Printer If Using an External Disk
153. RR APPROXIMATELY 6 dB LOWER sb61 49d Figure 11 3 Typical ERF ERR Error Terms 11 11 Isolation Crosstalk EXF and EXR These are the uncorrected forward and reverse isolation error terms that represent leakage between the test ports and the signal paths The isolation error terms are characterized by measuring transmission S21 12 with loads attached to both ports during the measurement calibration Since these terms are low in magnitude they are usually noisy not very repeatable The error term magnitude changes dramatically with IF bandwidth a 10 Hz IF bandwidth must be used in order to lower the noise floor beyond the crosstalk specification Using averaging will also reduce the peak to peak noise in this error term Significant System Components Loose cable connections or leakage between components in the lower box are the most likely cause of isolation problems The transfer switch bias tees couplers and samplers are the most susceptible components Affected Measurements Isolation errors affect both reflection and transmission measurements primarily where the measured signal level is very low Examples include reflection measurements of a well matched DUT and transmission measurements where the insertion loss of the DUT is large CH1 MEM log MAG 10 dB REF 80 dB e ST spes IU t vn T
154. SA HP part number 08720 90292 Supersedes June 1998 Printed in USA February 1999 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fltness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Copyright 1996 1999 Hewlett Packard Company Network Analyzer Documentation Set The Installation and Quick Start Guide familiarizes you with the network analyzer s front and rear panels electrical and environmental operating requirements as well as procedures for installing configuring and verifying the operation Of the analyzer The User s Guide shows how to make measurementsexplains commonly used features and tells you how to get the most performance from your analyzer The Quick Reference Guide provides a summary of all available user features The Programmer s Guide provides programming information including an HP IB command reference an HP IB programming reference as well as programming examples The Service Guide provides information to adjust troubleshoot gt repair and verify conformance to published speculations Available 2 with Option OBW Contents 1
155. SWITCH SPLITTER 8722D REBUILT EXCHANGE 34 5086 7642 ASSY TRANSFER SWITCH SOLID STATE 8719D 8720D 54 007 08720 60006 ASSY TRANSFER SWITCH 8719D 8720D 34 08722 60015 ASSY TRANSFER SWITCH 8722D 34 08722 60015 ASSY TRANSFER SWITCH 8722D REBUILT EXCHANGE 34 85381 60088 ASSY TRANSFER SWITCH 8722D 36 5086 7689 SWITCH 13 10 Replaceable Parts 47 70 Major Assemblies Bottom A HP 8722D OPTIONS 400 089 HP 8719D 20D GPTIONS 400 089 5061520 Replaceable Parts 13 11 Major Assemblies Bottom AP 57220 HP 67 190 200 STANDARD STANDARD OPTION 007 places 54 1 HP 87220 HP amp 719D 200 OPTION 007 OPTIONS 085 059 OPTIONS 085 089 sbol4 d 13 12 Replaceable Parts Cables Top HP Part Description E Number part of A15 15 to A8 and A17 08720 20064 52 TO A68 8719D 8720D 08720 20014 2 TO 58 8722D 08720 60141 A9J3 TO A11J1 08720 20062 58 TO S2 8719D 8720D 08720 20015 82 TO S1 8722D 08722 20017 S1 TO A58 8722D 08720 20068 58 TO S8 08720 20063 A55 TO 88 08415 60040 1 12 18 08415 60041 14 18 08415 60081 55 TO All 08720 20065 1 57 08415 60035 5
156. Service Guide Agilent Technologies 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzers oes Agilent Technologies Manufacturing Part Number 08720 90292 Printed in USA Print Date February 1999 Supersedes J une 1998 Agilent Technologies Inc 1996 1999 Hewlett Packard to Agilent Technologies Transition This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies To reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP XXXX the current name number is now Agilent XXXX For example model number HP 8720D is now model number Agilent 8720D Documentation Warranty THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED AS 15 AND IS SUBJ ECT TO BEING CHANGED WITHOUT NOTICE IN FUTURE EDITIONS FUR THER TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW AGILENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AGILENT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD AGILENT AND THE USER HAVE
157. TEE S UNTEN A16 REAR PANEL Lui dd ni he TEST SET 1 0 1 TEST 5 1 0 INTERFACE INTERFACE EXT BIAS f_ TO 17 EXT REF TO 12 AUX p 10 EXT 10 EXT 17 TEST SEQ 8 LIMIT TEST 4 MEAS RESTART JBie 17 FROM AS I E TN pi amat 1 wem DIN KYBD INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT TERCONNEC o A7 CPU Pos A MEASURE RESTART Le ue A1 FRONT PANEL 1 s nd NN ius aee Lose 1 LEGEND 4p Digital Bua This indicates Analog Bus node locotion f Frequency Node v Voltage Node A2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR FRONT This symbol Indicates a node for the counter PANEL mh PROCESSOR Indicates main signal path Indicates phase lock loop pers 2 Aig GP l A18 DISPLAY QQ wg HJ I A22 DISPLAY 1 bist FRM INTERFACE i ae E 1 DIGITAL VIDEO DISPLAY 2 DISK i LcD FOR CPU DETAIL REFER TO CHAPTER 6 1 1 1 1 L INTERFACE DIGITAL CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING 1 2
158. TER ASSY TO 51 TO 12 TO 11 TO 14 sb6119d Figure 4 13 HP 8722D OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM STANDARD 428 Start Troubleshooting Here HP 8722D OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM OPT 400 089 and 012 HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCE SOURCE OPTION 105 Pa 22 10MHz 1OMHz ADJ gt I VER CW 1 GHZ TEST PORT POWER 5 dBm SMB TEE 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP CW 1 GHZ TEST PORT POWER 5 dBm OPEN ON TEST PORT 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP EXT TRIG MED ES L I os vco SOURCE CONTROL BOARD 575 1 fm em ee m 7 f A59 SOURCE INTERFACE 100kHZ 4 i EN a SAMPLER PASS SAMPLER 4 SOURCE CONTROL SWITCH TO 9 BRON 2 nie ts 3H 1 e w30 as Biel ft Hg 8 8 CONTROL LOWBAND _ ras OSCILLATORS INPUTS 52 PULSE i eim lt Cerin Sl M A D S LE auem mn GENERATOR 2285224 _ NODES 64 Ri SAMPLER mre ert errem pe E NODES S T AST RI 72 BUFFER 75 ATTEN AL SAMPLE 821 17 W34 W36 1 LO MED 1 RATE IS OUT 66 TP20 wa O de OFFSET y 18KHz 17 2 m gt la A lt IFA 4KHz N M
159. Test These tests are located in Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting t These checks are located in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Adjustments and Cornction Constants 3 6 Table 3 1 Related Service Procedures 4 of 4 Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants Ch 8 Ch 2 A62 A63 Directional System Verification Couplers 64 Sampler Sampler Checkt System Verification Power Adjustment Power Level Test 64 R2 Sampler Sampler Checkt System Verification Option 400 Only Power Adjustment Power Level Test A69 Step Attenuator T These checks are located in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here 3 6 Adjustments and Correction Constants This page is left intentionally blank Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 7 A7 Jumper Switch Positions 1 Remove the power line cord from the analyzer 2 Set the analyzer on its side 3 Remove the two corner standoffs from the bottom of the instrument with the T 10 TORX screwdriver 4 Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover s back edge with the T 15 TORX screwdriver 5 Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument Caution Proper ESD procedures must be used when performing the following step 6 Move the jumper or switch as shown in F igure 3 1 or F igure 3 2 m Move the A7 jumper switch to the Alter position ALT before you run any of the correction constant adjustment routines This is the
160. Troubleshooting 7 3 Start Here The use of this section is based on several assumptions The analog bus has passed test 19 If not press SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST a If the analyzer falls the test return to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section of the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter in this manual a If the test passes continue with this procedure a If you observed a phase lock error message in Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section of the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter in this manual m If incorrect power levels were observed in Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section of the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter in this manual m performance test or adjustment failed Phase Lock Error Message Displayed 1 Press the following keys to view the 0 25V GHz signal to the YIG oscillator drives Notice that for each band the waveform should start and stop exactly as shown in Figure 7 1 and Figure 7 2 with only one ramp in each band A problem in one band should not affect the appearance of the waveform in other bands 74 Source Troubleshooting CH1 AUX Re 2 es REF OU Low Band High Band START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz sb6154d Figure 7 1 HP 8719D 20D 0 25V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 CH1 AUX Re 2U REFOU E ggg pelsslswds spem tq A START 0 050 000 000 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz sb6153d Figure 7
161. V 12 6VPP Not Used AGND 5VD SDIS 15V Not Used 415V 45VU 5 2 22V sb642d Figure 5 8 8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations 5 6 PowerSupp y Troubleshooting 10 11 Table 5 1 8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages 65 V Not Used AGND 5 VD SDIS 15 V 12 6 PP Not Used 15V 5 VU 5 2 V 22 V 6 V 64 6 to 65 4 n a 4 9 to 45 8 n a 14 4 to 15 6 12 1 to 12 8 14 5 to 15 5 5 05 to 5 85 5 0 to 5 4 21 3 to 22 7 5 8 to 6 2 Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 7 If the Green LED of the A15 is Off or Blinking If the green LED is not on steadily the line voltage is not enough to power the analyzer Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse Check the main power line cord line fuse line selector switch setting and actual line voltage to see that they are all correct Figure 5 4 shows how to remove the line fuse using a small flat blade screwdriver to pry out the fuse holder Figure 5 2 shows the location of the line voltage selector switch Use a small flat blade screwdriver to select the correct switch position If the 15 green LED is still not on steadily replace 15 INSERT SCREWDRIVER PRY OPEN 996524 Figure 5 4 Removing the Line Fuse 6 8 Power Supply Troubleshooting If the Red LED of the A15 is On If the red LED is on or flashing the power supply is shutting down Use the following procedures to determine which assembly is causing t
162. W 1 GHZ EXT REF 40MHz 4MHz TO A10 244000 READS B dem TEST PORT POWER 5 dBm g 100kHz TO A13 OPEN ON TEST PORT 14 tooKHz 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1 VPP 40MHz 6 VCXO ADJ SIGNAL SEPARATION or 2 52 DIRECTIONAL 1 15 vco COUPLER 4 16 2nd 10 9 996MHz 74 SWITCH SPLITTER w32 Sa ee gh re EE CN ed LEGEND L 65 DIRECTIONAL 2 22 COUPLER A16 REAR PAN LJ ABS LORE om o N RESTART eee TO A51 REAR PANELI L RESTART 2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR Digital Bus F an a pennn a 4 TEST 6 1 0 TEST 1 0 1 FRONT PANEL This Indicates Analog Bus node location 512 522 1 INTERFACE l INTERFACE f Frequency Node SS eS 4 v Voltage Node EXT BIAS BM A17 I FAN POWER EXT REF B_ TO A12 FRONT This symbol indicates a node for the counter REGULATORS MICROCIRCUIT POWER AUX INPUT nm ois PANEL Indicat in signal poth INSTRUMENT POWER EXT TRIG Me PROCESSOR ndicates main signal poth EXT AM 17 Indicates phase lock loop TEST SEQ UU usep LIMIT TEST 44 7 MEAS RESTART 17 Lace Elec ere w23 REEN LED RED LED 9 GREE
163. a FAIL message for tests 2 through 20 See Table 6 3 for further troubleshooting information to perform all Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 25 Table 6 3 Internal Diagnostic Test with Commentary Failed Test 0 All Int 1 Preset 2 ROM 3 CMOS RAM 4 Main DRAM 5 DSP Wr Rd 6 DSP RAM 7 DSP ALU 3 DSP Intrpt 9 DIF Control LO DIP Counter 11 DSP Control 12 Fr Pan Wr Rd 13 Rear Panel 14 Post reg 15 Frac N Cont 16 Sweep Trig 17 ADC Lin 18 ADC Ofs 19 ABUS Test 20 FN count part of PRESET sequence AI part of ALL JNTERNAL sequence tin decreasing order of probability Sequence Probable Failed Assembliest Comments and Troubleshooting Hints Executes tests 3 11 13 16 20 Executes tests 2 11 14 16 Runs at power on or preset AT Repeats on fail refer to CPU Troubleshooting A7 in this chapte to replace ROM or A7 Replace 7 Repeats fail replace 7 AT Replace 7 AT Replace A7 AT Replace A7 A10 Remove 10 rerun test If fail replace 7 If pass replace 1 A7 A10 Most likely A7 assembly A10 A7 A12 Check analog bus node 17 for 1 MHz If correct A12 is verified suspect 10 A10 A7 Most likely A10 2 1 Run test 23 If fail replace 2 If pass problem is bus between 7 and 2 or on 7 assembly 16 Disconnect 16 and check A7J2 pin 48 for 4 MHz clock signal If OK replace A16 If not
164. aceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Power Supply Troubleshooting 63 Simplified Block Diagram Figure 5 1 shows the power supply group in simplified block diagram form Refer to the detailed block diagram of the power supply Figure 5 7 located at the end of this chapter to see voltage lines and specific connector pin numbers SWITCHING 25V ne POWER T i 18V i FAN POWER POWER SUPPLY D D gt REGULATORS 48V gt MICROCIRCUIT POWER REGULATOR NSTRUMENT POWER f 18V 1 70 1 L i NOT USED 7 LED 9 GREEN LEDS NORMAL ON NORMAL OFF NORMAL ON STEADY sb6126d Figure 5 1 Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram 64 PowerSupp y Troubleshooting Start Here Check the Green LED and Red LED on 15 Switch on the analyzer and look at the rear panel of the analyzer Check the two power supply diagnostic LEDs on the 15 preregulator casting by looking through the holes located to the left of the line voltage selector switch See Figure5 2 During norm
165. agram in the Start Troubleshooting chapter to see where the nodes are located in the instrument 10 26 Service Key Menus and Error Messages The analog bus consists of a source section and a receiver section The source can be the following any one of the 23 nodes described in Analog Bus Nodes a the A14 fractional N VCO a the A14 fractional N VCO divided down to 100 kHz The receiver portion can be the following a the main ADC the frequency counter When analog bus traces are displayed frequency is the x axis For a linear x axis in time switch to CW time mode or sweep a single band The Main ADC The main ADC is located on the A10 digital IF assembly and makes voltage measurements in two ranges See IN under Analog In Menu The Frequency Counter The frequency counter is located on the A14 assembly and can count one of three sources a selected analog bus node 14 fractional N VCO FRAC 14 fractional N VCO divided down to 100 kHz DIV FRAC frequency range is 100 kHz to 16 MHz The counts are triggered by the phase lock cycle one at each pretune acquire and track for each bandswitch The counter works in swept modes or in CW mode It can be used in conjunction with ES for troubleshooting phase lock and source problems To read the counter over HP IB use the command OUTPCNTR Notes The display and marker units U correspond to volts About 0 750 MHz is a t
166. air Procedures The following tables list the additional service procedures which you must perform to ensure that the instrument is working correctly following the replacement of an assembly These procedures can be located in either Chapter 2 or Chapter 3 Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table Table 3 1 Related Service Procedures 1 of 4 Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants Ch 8 Ch 2 1 Front Panel lt eyboard 42 Front Panel None rocessor 4 A5 A6 Second None System Verification Jonverter 452 Pulse Generator Output Power Adjustments A7 Jumper Switch Positions Power Level Test Load Firmware Dynamic Range Test CC Retrieval Serial Number CC Test 40 or Option Number CC Test 60 Display Intensity CC Test 45 System Verification Analog Bus CC Test 44 Source Pretune CC Test 43 IF Amplifier CC Test 47 EEPROM Backup Disk 1 If you have an EEPROM backup disk available you only need to perform the first five tests listed 2 Only for instruments with firmware revisions 7 xx and above Adjustments and Correction Constants 33 9 Source Control 11 Phase Lock 412 Reference 418 Fractional N Analog A14 Fractional N Digital Table 3 1 Related Service Procedures 2 of 4 Verification Correction Constants Ch 3 Ch 2 Jumper Switch Positions Dynamic Range Test Analog Bus CC Test 44 System Verification
167. al operation the bottom green LED is on and the top red LED is off If these LEDs are normal then 15 is 95 verified Continue to Check the Green LEDs on A8 a Ifthe green LED is not on steadily refer to If the Green LED of the A15 is Off or Blinking in this procedure Ifthe red LED is on or flashing refer to If the Red LED of the A15 is On in this procedure RED LED GREEN LED LINE VOLTAGE NORMALLY OFF NORMALLY ON SELECTOR SWITCH sb618d Figure 5 2 Location of A15 Diagnostic LEDs Power Supply Troubleshooting 6 6 Check the Green LEDs 8 Remove the top cover of the analyzer and locate the A8 post regulator use the location diagram under the top cover if necessary Check to see if the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are all on There are nine green LEDs one is not visible without removing the PC board stabilizer If all of the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are on there is a 95 confidence level that the power supply is verified To confirm the last 5 uncertainty of the power supply refer to Measure the Post Regulator Voltages next If any LED on the 8 post regulator is off or flashing refer to If the Green LEDs of the A8 are not All ON in this procedure Measure the Post Regulator Voltages Measure the DC voltages on the test points of 8 with a voltmeter Refer to Figure 5 3 for test point locations and Table 5 1 for supply voltages and limits 65
168. and Post Repair Procedures 14 21 A7 CPU Board Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 2 Disconnect the power cord Remove the four bottom feet and bottom cover refer to Covers in this chapter 3 Remove the four screws item 1 on the rear panel Turn the analyzer over and remove the screw item 2 that secures the CPU board to the deck Disconnect the ribbon cable item 3 sliding your finger nail between the cable and the connector Disconnect the ribbon cable item 4 from the CPU board 7 Slide the board towards the front of the instrument so that 1t disconnects 8 from the three standoffs item 5 Disconnect the ribbon attached at the rear of the CPU board 9 Lift the board off of the standoffs Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 22 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures A7 CPU Board Assembly sb61086d Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 23 Battery Tools Required 10 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap soldering iron with associated soldering tools Removal 1 Remove the CPU board refer to CPU Board Assembly in this chapte
169. and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 13 2 Replaceable Parts Rebuilt Exchange Assemblies Under the rebuilt exchange assembly program certain factory repaired and tested modules assemblies are available on a trade m basis These assemblies are offered for lower cost than a new assembly but meet all factory specifications required of a new assembly The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the rebuilt exchange assembly program Any spare assembly stock desired should be ordered using the new assembly part number Figure 13 1 illustrates the module exchange procedure Major Assemblies and Major Assemblies Bottom list all major assemblies including those that can be replaced on an exchange basis Ordering Information To order a part listed in the replaceable parts lists quote the Hewlett Packard part number indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Hewlett Packard office The Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices table is located in Chapter 15 To order a part that is not listed in the replaceable parts lists include the instrument model number compl
170. ar Panel 2 Cycle the power while observing all eight red LEDs With the analyzer positioned bottom up cycle the power and observe the eight red LEDs while looking from the front of the instrument 6 12 Digital Control Troubleshooting Note If firmware did not load a red LED on the CPU board will be flashing Refer to Loading Firmware in Chapter 3 3 Evaluate results a If either of the following LED patterns remain go to Display Troubleshooting e e e Be e e e oO front of instrument a If any other LED patterns remain replace the A7 CPU after verifying the power supply Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 13 Display Troubleshooting A18 A19 This section contains the following information a Evaluating your Display A19 GSP and A18 Display Troubleshooting Evaluating your Display There are four criteria against which your display is measured a Background Lamp Intensity a Green Red or Blue Stuck Pixels a Dark Stuck Pixels a Newton s Rings Evaluate the display as follows If either the A19 GSP 7 CPU or A20 assemblies are replaced perform a visual inspection of the display a If it appears that there is a problem with the display refer to the troubleshooting information that follows If the new display appears dim or doesn t light see Backlight Intensity Check next Backlight Intensity Check Required Equipment and Tools Photombetet els ento d b ee
171. are calculated only the uncertainties associated with the items indicated in the following chart will be used for the system verification The other characteristics are less significant for verifylug system performance therefore they will not appear on the printout If a measurement fails note which device and S parameter failed and continue on with the remaining tests Also note that both the measured data and the factory data are displayed as DATA and MEMORY respectively 2 26 System Verification and Performance Tests Verification 811 822 1 822 821 812 821 812 Device Magnitude Magnitude Airline Stepped impedance airline rho 0 6 std softkey menu will appear 42 When all measurements are complete the Disconnect the verification device 43 Enter Test 28 using step keys entry keys or front panel knob Repeat steps 38 through 42 with the 40 or 50 dB attenuator 44 Enter Test 29 using step keys entry keys or front panel knob Repeat steps 38 through 42 with the 500 airline For an example of how to perform proper airline connections refer to the following figures Caution Be especially careful not to drop either the center conductor or the outer conductor when handling these airlines Irreparable damage will result if these devices are dropped During this procedure you will be touching the exposed center conductor of the test port with the center conductor of the airline Ground yourself to pr
172. ase of Difficulty If VCO TUNE cannot be adjusted as specified and the instrument passes the Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 adjustment the 12 assembly must be replaced 344 Adjustments and Correction Constants Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Required Equipment and Tools HP 8719D 20D Only Erequency Counter coc e re PRAE NP QUERER DRE ERI HP 5350B dec HP 85131C D Non metallic Adjustment 7501 eter Leere eee Ee 8830 0024 Antistatic Ie ARE A LEARN eins 9300 1367 Aditistatic Wrist Strap EA guides 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire 9300 0797 Required Equipment and Tools HP 8722D Only Frequency Counter HP 8722D HP 5351B RF Cable HP 8722D Only dieere Con EUR eO nets HP 85133C D 2 4 mm f to 3 5 mm m adapter 8722D Only HP 11801D Non metallic Adjustment 8830 0024 Amtistatic WEISE Strap ores he DRE tees RC 9800 1867 Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord Ferr n reed wees 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire 9300 0797 Network Analyzer warm up time 80 minutes Spectrum Analyzer warm up time 30 minu tes This adjustment sets the VCXO voltage controlled crystal oscillator frequency to maintain the instrument s frequency accuracy 1 Rem
173. ation Any time the A7 CPU assembly is replaced all of the correction constants must be regenerated and stored on the new assembly Alternatively the data can be retrieved from disk Hewlett Packard recommends that you store the correction constant data to disk by referring to the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure in this chapter Additionally there are adjustments and correction constants that must be performed following the replacement of an assembly Refer to the following Post Repair Procedures tables in order to determine which adjustments and correction constants procedures to perform Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 1 This chapter contains the following adjustment procedures Jumper Switch Positions Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 47 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 Protected Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 50 Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustment Blanking Adjustment Test 54 Initialize EEPROMs Test 53 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure ensaxm Firmware Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustment Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment 3 2 Adjustmentsand CorrectionConst ant s Post Rep
174. bly Correction Constants Ch 8 Ch 2 41 Front Panel Ceyboard Internal Test 0 Internal Test 12 Internal Test 23 Internal Test 24 42 Front Panel Internal Test 0 rocessor Interna Test 12 Internal Test 23 55 ie DIY Jonverter A52Pulse Generator Output Power Adjustments System Verification 48 Post Regulator Internal Test 0 Check 8 test point voltages 47 CPU A7 Jumper Switch Positions Power Level Test Load Firmware Dynamic Range Test CC Retrieval Serial Number CC Test 49 or Option Number CC Test 50 Display Intensity CC Test 45 System Verification Analog Bus CC Test 44 Source Pretune CC Test 43 IF Amplifier CC Test 47 EEPROM Backup Disk 1 If you have an EEPROM backup disk available you only need to perform the first five tests listed 2 Only for instruments with firmware revisions 7 xx and above 14 40 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Table 14 1 Related Service Procedures 2 of 4 Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction constants ch 8 Ch 2 10 Digital IF A7 Jumper Switch Positions Dynamic Range Test Analog Bus CC Test 44 System Verification IF Amplifier CC Test 47 Internal Test 17 Internal Test 18 Internal Test 19 or System Verification All Phase Lock Jumper Switch Positions Frequency Range and Accuracy Analog Bus CC Test 44 Source Pretune CC Test 43 or System Verification 12 Reference A7 Jumper Switch Positions Frequ
175. cates an out of range condition Check the 116 test setup POWER METER NOT SETTLED Error Number Sequential power meter readings are not consistent Verify that 118 the equipment is set up correctly If so preset the instrument and restart the operation PWR MTR NOT ON CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR Error Number The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify 117 that the power meter address and model number set in the analyzer match the address and model number of the actual power meter Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 51 POWER SUPPLY HOT Error Number The temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly 21 have detected an over temperature condition The power supplies regulated on the post regulator have been shut down Refer to the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN Error Number One or more supplies on the 8 post regulator assembly have 22 been shut down due to an over current over voltage or under voltage condition Refer to the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter PRINTER error Error Number The parallel port printer is malfunctioning The analyzer cannot 175 complete the copy function PRINTER not handshaking Error Number The printer at the parallel port is not responding 177 PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The printer does not respond to control Verify power to the 24 printer and check the HP IB connectio
176. cation disk and sequentially measures the magnitude and phase for all four S parameters The device number and test number for each verification device are as follows Verification Device Device Deseription 4050 dbattenuator 280 mismatch rine 35 Press System 8 36 In the active entry area on the display the following will be displayed TEST 27 Ver Dev 1 37 If the record function was switched on in step 5 or if a printout is not desired go to step 38 If a printout of the data for this device is desired press System Make sure the paper in the printer is set up so that printing starts at the top of the page When printing the test results press to create page breaks in appropriate on the printer Connecting a Device 39 When prompted insert the 20 dB attenuator as shown in the following figure System Verification and 2 25 Performances est s NETWORK ANALYZER SSS o0 O00 009 000 oo Opp n oo 0 10 Os oo 2228 2009 DUT m sb638d Figure 2 11 Verification D evice Connections The tests will begin 41 If the record function is off printout is not required the program will r each parameter measurement and you will need to press after each measurement There are eight measurements tude and phase for each of the four S parameters Note Although the verification limits for all four S parameters
177. ce Troubleshooting 7 11 14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope 1 Connect an oscilloscope to 14 labeled VCO 2 2 Press PRESET PRESET cE SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON 3 Vary the fractional N VCO frequency with the front panel knob 4 If the waveforms do not resemble Figure 7 4 at the frequencies indicated replace A14 The amplitude of the waveforms will vary from 3 V to 10 V P P 120 MHz 22 0 180 MHz 260 240 JVUVVVV 200 nsec 4 sb634d Figure 7 4 VCO 2 Waveforms at A14TP1 7 12 Source Troubleshooting 14 VCO Exercise The tuning voltage range of the VCO is approximately 1 to 14 volts This procedure substitutes power supplies for the normal voltages from A13 to check the frequency range of the 14 VCO 1 Remove the A13 assembly 2 Put the 14 assembly on an extender board It is not necessary to connect the cables while the 14 is on the extender board 3 Press SYSTEM to set the internal counter to the frac N node 4 In turn jumper each of the three supply voltages to 14 14 and observe the frequency as shown in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 VCO Exercise Matrix supply Test Point Voltage 14 Test Counter Mnemonic Point Frequency ASTPT ASTPS Aum ASTP2 AGND 5 If the frequency changes are not correct replace 14 6 If the f
178. ces 12 4 places 0 5 e 6 on top 2 placesi Oe He places 15 on bottom sb 94d Assembly Replacement and Pest Repair Procedures 14 15 Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top and bottom covers refer to Covers in this chapter If the analyzer has option 1D5 remove the high stability frequency reference jumper item 1 Remove the hardware that attaches the nine BNC connectors to the rear panel item 2 Remove the hardware that attaches the interface connector to the rear panel item 3 Remove the rear panel from the analyzer refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter If the analyzer has option 1D5 disconnect the cable item 4 from the rear panel interface board Disconnect the ribbon cable item 5 from the rear panel interface board Disconnect the wiring for the three BNC connectors and remove the attaching hardware item 6 Remove the MEAS RESTART connector from the interface board approaching it from the outside of the rear panel assembly item 7 Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 16 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly pt IOS orly 1 ex Opt 105 onlyi 2 wA
179. ck the insertion loss of 53 S4 and the associated cabling If the power at S2J3 is greater than 0 dBm the problem is probably above 5 GHz Proceed with the next steps 5 Check all RF cabling and connections a If any of the cables or connectors are bad have them repaired or replaced a If the cables and connectors are good replace the A55 YIG 1 If mid band problems still persist then replace the 58 M A D S High Band Problems HP 8719D 20D Only Di 1 SRC tune in the high band is tuning from about 2 4 to 5 GHz Loss of lock in high band only may likely be due to a bad cable or connection 1 Press 2 Referring to the overall block diagram the following components may be at fault a 52 53 A58 M A D S 55 YIG1 3 Since the analyzer phase locked in lowband all of the phase lock circuitry is working Look for low power as a cause of phase lock errors 4 Check power at S2J3 a If the power at S2J3 is less than 0 dBm check the insertion loss of S3 S4 and the associated cabling If the power at S2J3 is greater than 0 dBm the problem is probably above 5 GHz Proceed with the next steps Source Troubleshooting 7 21 5 Check all RF cabling and connections a If any of the cables or connectors are bad have them repaired or replaced a If the cables and connectors are good replace the A55 YIG 1 If mid band problems still persist then replace the A58 M A D S Hig
180. cks the probability is greater than 90 that A13 and A14 are functional go to Check Pulse Generator or continue with 14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope to confirm A13 Fractional N Analog and A14 Fractional N Digital Check with Spectrum Analyzer 1 Press PRESET 2 Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer start frequency 50 MHz stop frequency 250 MHz bandwidth 300 kHz 3 Remove the instrument bottom cover and disconnect the A52J1 cable from the A52 Pulse Generator 4 Connect the spectrum analyzer to the output of 14 via the A52J1 cable 5 Slowly turn the network analyzer front panel knob to tune the signal across the entire frequency range You should see a signal that is about 0 dBm at 120 MHz and below You should see the signal drop approximately 2 5 dB above 120 MHz 6 Look for sidebands on the signal The signal should appear very clean without any sidebands present however you will observe source harmonics If any sidebands do appear on the signal there could be a faulty A13 fractional N analog assembly If you see pieces of the signal dropping out possibly in steps when you tuning the signal across the frequency range there could be a faulty 14 fractional N digital assembly If a clean signal appears across the entire frequency range you can assume that the A13 fractional N analog and the A14 fractional N digital assemblies are working correctly Sour
181. corrected power level reading should be between the limits shown in the Performance Test Record The source relies on the power adjustment for proper performance Refer to Adjustments for additional information In case of a repeated failure after you have made the power adjustments refer to Source Troubleshooting System Verificationand 238 Performanc e t s 3 Power Linearity Performance Test 1 Press PI Preset 2 Press Meas 2 3 4 Table 2 4 Power Value Settings for Testing Linearity Power Settings HP 8719D 20D HP 8722 HP 8722D Option 007 Option 007 Ps 5B For 8719D 20D Only 6 Refer to Table 2 4 and enter the power value for Pret for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press x1 7 Wait for the analyzer to complete a full sweep 11 Enter the power value that is listed in the row of Table 2 4 for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press 1 12 Wait for the analyzer to complete a full sweep 240 SystemVerificationa n d Performance e t s 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Read the marker a m the analyzer m and add 5 dB Write the calculated value on the test record Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 5 dB Write the calculated value on the test record Repeat steps 10 through 16 but ente
182. ct your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Be sure to include the full serial number of the instrument 3 Press the HP logo 4 Enter the keyword by rotating the front panel knob to positi enter each letter Press if you made a mistake Note The keyword may also be entered using the optional external keyboard 5 Press when you have finished entering the title Caution Do not confuse I with 1 one or with 0 zero Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 17 7 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m Ifthe analyzer displays Option Cor DONE you have completed this procedure m Ifthe analyzer has more than one option repeat steps 3 through 6 to install the remainhg options 8 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 jumper switch to the Normal position In Case of Difficulty 1 If the analyzer displays Option Cor FAIL check the keyword used in step 2 and make sure it is correct Pay special attention to the letters I or O the numbers 1 or 0 zero Repeat this entire adjustment test 2 If the analyzer continues to fall the adjustment routine refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter 3 18 Adjustmentsand Correction Constants Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants Analyzer warm up time None This procedure stores the instrumen
183. ction of the non volatile CMOS memory has 183 failed The CMOS memory has been cleared Refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter for battery replacement instructions See the Preset State and Memory Allocation chapter in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide for more information about the CMOS memory BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK Error Number The battery protection of the non volatile CMOS memory is in 184 danger of failing If this occurs all of the instrument state registers stored in CMOS memory will be lost Save these states to a disk and refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter for battery replacement instructions See the Preset State and Memory Allocation chapter in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide for more information about the CMOS memory BLOCK INPUT ERROR Error Number The analyzer did not receive a complete data transmission This 34 is usually caused by an interruption of the bus transaction Clear by pressing the key or aborting the I O process at the controller BLOCK INPUT LENGTH ERROR Error Number The length of the header received by the analyzer did not agree 35 with the size of the internal array block Refer to the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer Programmer s Guide for instructions on using analyzer input commands Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1041 CALIBRATION ABORT
184. ctors 1 Check for damage to the mating contacts of the test port center conductors and loose connector bulkheads If the center pin recession is incorrect replace the entire connector assembly see Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 2 Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and other physical damage Refer to the calibration kit operating and service manual for information on gauging and inspecting the device connectors If any calibration device is obviously damaged or out of mechanical tolerance replace the device Inspect the Error Terms Error terms a measure of a system a network analyzer calibration kit and any cables used As required refer to Chapter 11 Error Terms for the following a The specific measurement calibration procedure used to generate the error terms a The routines required to extract error terms from the instrument m Typical error term data Use Table 9 1 to cross reference error term data to system faults 9 2 Accessories Troubleshooting Table 9 1 Components Related to Specific Error Terms Match Se ns s msc ommo oo afos d power x mete step attenuator x wwe 0 0 RT ox A10 digital IF test port connectors This component is likely to contribute to crosstalk at 4 GHz I If you detect problems using error term
185. d in Chapter 3 of the calibration kit manuals For additional connector care instruction contact your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office about course numbers HP 85050A 24A and 85050A 24D See the following table for quick reference tips about connector care 14 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Table 1 3 Connector Care Quick Reference Keepconnectors clean Touch mating plane surfaces Extend sleeve or connector nut Set connectors contact end down Use plastic end caps during storage Inspect all connectors carefully Use a damaged connector ever Look for metal particles scratches and dents Try compressed air first Use any abrasives use isopropyl alcohol Get liquid into plastic support beads Clean connector threads cleanandzerothegagebeforeuse Use an out of spec connector Use the correct gage type Use correct end of calibration block Gage all connectors before first use Align connectors carefully Apply bending force to amnection Make preliminary connection lightly Over tighten preliminary connection Tumonlytheconuectornut Twistorscrewanyconuection Use a torque wrench for final connect Tighten pest torque wrench break point Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 15 Analyzer Options Available Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 105 offers 0 05 ppm temperature stability from 0 to 56 C referenced to 25 C Option 007 Mechanical Transfer Switch This option r
186. digital IF circuits have lost 12 synchronization Refer to the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer Service Guide for troubleshooting information TEST ABORTED Error Number You have prematurely stopped a service test 113 TEST PORT OVERLOAD REDUCE POWER Error Number You have exceeded approximately 14 dBm at one of the test 57 ports or 0 dBm at the A or B sampler Option 012 Only When this occurs reduce the power to a lower level TROUBLE CHECKSET UP AND START OVER Service Error Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress Number 115 is not correct Check the setup diagram and instructions in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter Start the procedure again WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK Error Number You have attempted to store load or read file titles but your 77 disk format does not conform to the Logical Interchange Format LIF or DOS format You must initialize the disk before reading or writing to it 10 54 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 11 Error Terms The analyzer generates and stores factors in internal arrays when a measurement error correction measurement calibration is performed These factors are known by the following terms m error terms m E terms m measurement calibration coefficients The analyzer creates error terms by measuring well defined calibration devices over the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with t
187. e A2 front panel processor detects and decodes user inputs from the front panel and the RPG and transmits them to the CPU It has the capability to interrupt the CPU to provide information updates It controls the front panel LEDs that provide status information to the user A7CPU A10 Digital IF firmware revisions 6 xx and below The A7 CPU assembly contains the main CPU central processing unit the digital signal processor memory storage and interconnect port interfaces The main CPU is the master controller for the analyzer including the other dedicated microprocessors The memory includes EEPROM RAM EPROM and ROM Data from the receiver is serially clocked into the A7 CPU assembly from the A10 digital IF The data takii sequence is triggered either from the 14 fractional N assembly externally from the rear panel or by software on the A7 assembly CPU A10 Digital IF firmware revisions 7 xx and above The A7 CPU assembly contains the main CPU central processing unit the digital signal processor memory storage and interconnect port interfaces The main CPU is the master controller for the analyzer including the other dedicated microprocessors The memory includes EEPROM DRAM flash ROM SRAM and boot ROM Data from the receiver is serially clocked into the A7 CPU assembly from the 10 digital IF The data taking sequence is triggered either from the 14 fractional N assembly externally from the rear panel
188. e Revisions 6 xx and Below 7 xx and Above Note The analyzer may display the message CAUTION TEST PORT OVERLOAD REDUCE POWER Ignore this message and continue with the procedure Set the potentiometers to the minimum levels 4 Set the low band power potentiometer A59 R4 full counter clockwise 5 Set the offset potentiometers 59 R70 R71 R80 to their full counter clockwise position The end stops on 10 turn potentiometers are indicated by a clicking sound 6 Set the slope potentiometers A59 R86 R87 R88 to their full clockwise position 9 22 AdjustmentsanCerrectionConstants iE R70 R71 R4 BLANKING sb681d Figure 8 4 Location of Output Power Adjustments Start the Adjustment 7 Connect the 8 Press 9 Press System Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 23 10 Press Stas 50 WL Greg 2549 S o 12 If the is not phase locked adjust Low Band Power Adjust A59 R4 clockwise until the instrument phaselocks across the frequency range 50 MHz to 2 549 GHz 14 Adjust the low band power resistor A59 R4 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value listed under Power A in Table 3 4 Table 3 4 Output Power Adjustment Values Model Option Power A dBm Power dBm Power C dBm HP 8719 20D 7 3 5 HP8719 20D Opt
189. e a Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnectingassemblies a When extensive disassembly is required refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures a Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts to identify specific cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter a If all the LEDs light the assembly removed or one receiving power from it is faulty a If the LEDs are still not on steadily continue to Inspect the Motherboard Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 17 Table 5 4 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection for Troubleshooting the 8 Board To Remove Disconnection Method that Receive Power from the Removed Assembly ime sampler ungin trom A17 and Remove sone sampler A17 and Remove sone 8 A Source Control Disconnect W91 None O Inspect the Motherboard Inspect the A17 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces In particular inspect the traces that carry the supplies whose LEDs faulted when A8TP4 SDIS was grounded earlier 5 18 Power Supply Troubleshooting Error Messages Three error messages are associated with the power supplies functional group They are shown here POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly is shut down due to one of the following conditions overcurrent overvoltage or undervoltage Refer to If the Red LED of the A1
190. e error term trace 3 Press and use the marker functions to determine the error term magnitude 4 Compare the displayed measurement trace to the trace shown in the following Error Term descriptions section and to previously measured data If data is not available from previous measurements refer to the typical uncorrected performance specifications listed in Table 11 2 and Table 11 3 5 Make a hardcopy of the measurement results a Connect a printing or plotting peripheral to the analyzer b Press and select the appropriate peripheral to verify that the HP IB address is set correctly on the analyzer C Press Save Recall and then choose either PRINT 4 Press identify it later nd title each data trace so that you can Note For detailed information on creating hardcopies refer to Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each test number that corresponds to a calibration coefficient see Table 11 1 Error Terms 11 5 If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values 1 Perform a system verification to verify that the system still conforms to specifications 2 If system verification fails refer to Start Troubleshooting Here Uncorrected Performance The following tables show typical performance without error correction RF cables are not used except as noted Related error t
191. e firmware disk into the instrument s disk drive 3 Turn the instrument on The IIrmware will be loaded automatically during power on The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware is loaded The display will be blank during this time At the end of a successful loading the LEDs for Channel 1 and Testport 1 will remain on and the display will turn on indicating the version of firmware that was loaded Adjustments and Correction Constants 339 In Case of Difficulty If the firmware did not load successfully LED patterns on the front panel can help you isolate the problem If the following LED pattern is present the firmware disk is not for use with your instrument model Check that the firmware disk used was for the HP 8718D 20D 22D LED Pattern CHI CH2 E L T m If any of the following LED patterns are present the firmware disk may be defective LED Pattern CHI CH2 R L T m If any other LED pattern is present the CPU board is defective 340 Adjustments and Correction Constants Loading Firmware Into a New CPU Use this procedure to load flrmware for an instrument whose CPU board has been replaced 1 Turn off the network analyzer 2 Insert the firmware disk into the instrument s disk drive 3 Turn the instrument on The firmware will be loaded automatically during power on The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware is loaded The display will be blank during this t
192. e first problem encountered without continuing to other tests After troubleshooting the Post Repair Procedures matrix in Chapter 3 will direct the technician to perform the necessary adjustment procedures Then the technician will repeat the system verification and performance tests As the analyzer passes the system verification and all the tests the technician will print out the system verifkation results and fill out the performance test record SystemVerificationand 2 1 Performance Tests Instrument Verification Cycle The performance of the network analyzer should be verified at least once per year PRELIMINARY CHECKS TROUBLESHOOTING Y POST REPAIR MATRIX ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES sb636d Figure 2 1 ANSUNCSL 7540 1 1994 Verification Flowchart 2 2 System Verification and Performance Tests PRELIMINARY CHECKS NO YES TROUBLESHOOTING Y POST REPAIR MATRIX Y ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES y SYSTEM VERIFICATION TROUBLESHOOT NG POST REPAIR MATRIX ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES TROUBLESHOOTING PERFORMANCE TESTS POST REPAIR MATRIX ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES sb637d Figure 2 2 Non ANSUNCSL Z540 1 1994 Verification Flowchart SystemVerificationand 23 Performance est s Sections in this Chapter Preliminary Checks Check the Temperature and Humidity a Check the Analyzer Internal
193. e verification record includes the printout from the total system uncertainty test these test records and a certificate of calibration Use the following sheets to record the results of the performance tests You may wish to copy the sheets to retain them as masters System Verification and 249 Performance Tests Performance Test Record for HP 8719D 20D 22D Report Number Date Date of Last System Calibration Tested by Customer Model Calibration Kit S N 11 Verification Kit Model SerialNumber TestPortcables Verification Kit S N Calibration Kit 1 1 3 Measurement Calibration Technique Ambienttemperature 90 Relative Humidity Ambient temperature at measurement Ambient temperature at performance calibration 1 n 1 1 1 verification Test Equipment Used Model Number Trace Number 1 Frequency Counter 2 Power Meter 8 Power Sensor 4 Spectrum Analyzer Special Notes This system verification applies to total measurementuncertainty and frequency accuracy specifications 2 50 SystemVerificationa n d Performance Tests 13 5 8719D 13 499865 GHz 13 600135 GHz 20 0 HP 8720D 19 999800 GHz 20 000200 GHz 26 0 HP 8722D 25 999740 GHz 26 000260 GHz T h e measurement uncertainty is based on equipment specified in Table 1 2 in the Service Equipment and Analyzer Options chapter F Spec Test Port 1 Test port 2 Min Max Min Max Power Flatness HP 87
194. easurement calibration The error correction procedure also called measurement calibration measures a set of calibration devices with known characteristics It uses the measurement results to effectively remove systematic errors using the vector math capabilities of the analyzer The residual systematic errors remain after error correction primarily due to the limitations of how accurately the electrical characteristics of the calibration devices can be defined and determined Also the random non repeatable and drift errors cannot be corrected because they cannot be quantified and measured during the measurement calibration and device measurement However the effects of random errors can be reduced through averaging Random errors that occur during a measurement calibration are part of the error correction and become systematic errors when the calibration is turned on For this reason it is best to use a large number of averages during measurement calibration to reduce to the effect of the random errors The averaging may then be reduced for device measurement The residual systematic errors along with the random and drift errors continue to affect measurements after erro correction adding an uncertainty to the measurement results Therefore measurement uncertainty is defined as the combination of the residual systematic repeatable random non repeatable and drift errors in the measurement system after error correction The followin
195. easuring transmission The response of the test port cables is included These terms are characterized by measuring the transmission S21 12 of the thru configuration during the measurement calibration Note that coupler response is included in this error term Typically transmission tracking appears as a slope of 0 5 dB from 0 84 GHz to 40 GHz and a roll off below 0 84 GHz which is typically 3 dB at 500 MHz 15 at 100 MHz and 20 at 50 MHz Significant System Components Large variations in this error term probably indicate a problem in the reference signal path if both ETF and ETR are bad or in the A or B input path The thru cable also has an effect on transmission tracking Affected Measurements All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors START 0 050 000 000 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz sb6152d Figure 11 6 Typical ETF ETR 11 14 Error Terms 12 Theory of Operation Introduction Theory of Operation provides a general description of the system and operating theory of the network analyzer functional groups Operation is explained to the assembly level only component level circuit theory is not provided Simplified block diagrams illustrate the operation of each functional group An overall block diagram is provided at the end of the section System Operation The HP 8719D 20D 22D microwave network analyzers integrate a synthesized source signal separation devic
196. econd Converters Each input signal goes to one of three identical pairs of sampler and second converter assemblies R A and B that down convert the signals to a fixed 4 kHz 2nd IF with magnitude and phase corresponding to the input The 1st LO Signal is a comb of harmonics of the synthesizer signal produced by a step recovery diode in the A52 pulse generator Refer to Source Group Theory for details 12 22 Theory of Operation A64 A65 A66 A67 O ption 400 Samplers The signal from the source is mixed with the 1st LO harmonics in the samplers One of the harmonic signals is 10 MHz above the desired frequency The mixing products are filtered leaving only the difference between that harmonic and the source frequency this fixed 10 MHz signal is the Ist IF Fir N x FVCO Fs where N is the harmonic number Part of the 164 IF signal from the sampler is fed back to the phase lock assembly to complete the source phase locked loop The 1st IF from all three samplers goes to the corresponding second converters The A67 sampler is only used in Option 400 instruments 2nd LO Signal The stable 2nd LO signal is produced in the 12 reference assembly by phase locking and mixing a 39 984 MHz VCO with the 40 MHz VCXO to derive a difference of 16 kHz This is compared to a 16 kHz reference produced by dividing 40 MHz by 2500 The phase locked output of the 39 984 MHz oscillator is divided by 4 to provide the 9 996 MHz 2nd LO A4 A
197. ed and the first IF detected but a problem prevented the calibration from completing successfully Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants and execute pretune correction test 43 This message may appear if you connect a mixer between the RF output and R input before turning on frequency offset mode Ignore it it will go away when you turn on frequency offset This message may also appear if you turn on frequency offset mode before you define the offset PHASE LOCK LOST Error Number Phase lock was acquired but then lost Refer to the Source 8 Troubleshooting chapter POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK Error Number Phase lock has been achieved but the source may be phase 6 locked to the wrong harmonic of the synthesizer Perform the source pretune correction routine documented in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 10 50 Service Key Menus and Error Messages CAUTION POWER OUT MAY BE UNLEVELED Error Number There is either a hardware failure in the source or you have 179 attempted to set the power level too high The analyzer allows the output power to be set higher or lower than the specified available power range However these output powers may be unleveled or unavailable Check to see if the power level you set is within specifications If it is refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter POWER METER INVALID Error Number The power meter indi
198. ely that any of the assemblies listed above are causing the problem Continue to Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry If all green LEDs are now on one or more of the above assemblies may be faulty Continue to next step 5 Switch off the analyzer 6 Reconnect cable A8P1 7 Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs a If the LEDs are off or blinking replace the 19 assembly Q If the LEDs are still on continue to next step 8 Switch off the analyzer 9 Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs a If the LEDs are off replace the A18 dispiay Q If the LEDs are still on continue with the next step 10 Switch off the analyzer Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 15 11 Reinstall each assembly one at a time Switch on the analyzer after each assembly is installed The assembly that causes the green LEDs to go off or flash could be faulty Note It is possible however that this condition is caused by the A8 post regulator not supplying enough current Ib check this reinstall the assemblies in a different order to change the loading If the same assembly appears to be faulty replace that assembly If a different assembly appears faulty A8 is most likely faulty unless both of the other assemblies are faulty Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry In this step you shutdown and disable the protective circuitry for a short time forcing on the supplies including shorted supplies with a 100 duty cycle
199. ence 7 3 Before You Start Troubleshooting 7 3 Start Here 064 Se 74 Phase Lock Error Message Displayed 7 4 Power Not Within Specifications 7 6 Broadband Phase Lock Problems 7 6 Swap Samplers to Check A64 R Sampler 7 7 Check Open Loop Power 8719D 20D Only 7 8 Check Open Loop Power HP 8722D Only 7 8 Check A12 Reference 7 9 Check 14 Fractional N Checks With ABUS 7 10 A13 Fractional N Analog and A14 Fractional N Digital Check with spectrum x ue wo ec en eng 1 11 A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope 7 12 A14 VCO Exercise 7 13 A14 Divide by N Circuit 7 18 14 10 18 Digital Control Signals Check 7 14 A52 Pulse Generator Check With Oscilloscope 7 16 A52 Pulse Generator Check With Spectrum Analyzer 7 17 Band R amp ted 7 19 Broadband Power Problems 7 23 ALC Signal Separation 7 23 A69 Step Attenuator Check 7 24 Contents 6 8 Receiver Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence 8 2 All Signal Paths Look Abnormal 8 2 2nd LO Check 2 ROR ees 8 2 4 MHz Check 4 o BS RS 8 3 At Least One Signal Path Looks
200. ence Observe the Power Up Sequence firmware revisions 7 xx and above Switch the analyzer power off then on The following should take place within a few seconds a On the front panel observe the following 1 All six amber LEDs illuminate 2 The port 2 LED illuminates 3 The amber LEDs go off after a few seconds except the CH 1 LED At the same moment the port 2 LED goes off and the port 1 LED illuminates See Figure 46 m The display should come up bright with no irregularity in colors After an initial pattern five red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should remain off They can be observed through a small opening in the rear panel If the power up sequence does not occur as described or if there are problems using the front panel keyboard refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Start Troubleshooting Here 4 13 ILLUMINATES DURING AND AFTER PDWER UP 0000 0000 ILLUMINATES 24 SECONDS DURING POWER UP ILLUMINATES AFTER POWER UP sb6166d Figure 4 6 Front Panel Power Up Sequence 4 14 Start Troubleshooting He m Verify Internal Tests Passed 1 Press The display should indicate TEST 0 ALL INT PASS o If your display shows the above message go to step 2 Otherwise continue with this step If phase lock error messages are present this test may stop without passing or failing In this case continue with the next procedure to
201. ency Range and Accuracy Reference Assembly VCO Tune Frequency Accuracy A13Fractional N Jumper Switch Positions Internal Test 20 Analog Analog Bus CC Test 44 Frequency Range and Accuracy Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment 14 Fractional N AT Jumper Switch Positions Frequency Range and Accuracy Digital Analog Bus CC Test 44 Internal Test 20 or System Verification A15 Preregulator None ISelf Test 16 Rear Panel None Internal Test 13 Interface Rear Panel A17 Motherboard None t These tests are located in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 1441 Table 14 1 Related Service Procedures 3 of 4 Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants Ch 8 Ch 2 Ais Display None jme 19 Graphics System Observation of Display Processor Tests 59 76 Interface A53 Low Band Output Power Adjustments Power Level Test Assembly Frequency Range and Accuracy 54 YIG2 20 40 GHz Source Pretune Power Level Test HP 8722D Only Frequency Range and Accuracy 55 2 4 20 GHz Source Pretune Power Level Test Frequency Range and Accuracy A56 Lower Front Observation Panel Assembly watch LEDs when switching from 511 to 22 A57 Fixed Oscillator Output Power Adjustments Power Level Test Frequency Range and Accuracy A58 M A D S Output Power Adjustments Power Level Test A59 Source Interface Output Power Adjustmen
202. ent at A10P2 pin 6 check signal at 12 2 pin 36 a If the 4 MHz signal is not present at A12P2 pin 36 replace A12 a If the 4 MHz signal is present at A12 but not A10 check the motherboard trace At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal One normal signal path indicates that at least one sampler one 2nd converter A12 and much of A10 are functional Thus substitution is a convenient troubleshooting approach If two signal paths are abnormal repeat the steps of this section for each suspect signal path 1 To see the traces of signal path A or R connect a short to port 1 4 Refer to Figure 8 1 to determine if the signal path trace is normal for the HP 8719D 20D For the HP 8722D the normal power levels of the traces would appear to be reduced by approximately 15 dBm Further increase in power 5 dBm would also be expected for instruments equipped with Option 007 a Even if the R signal path trace is abnormal the R sampler is nonetheless good or there would be a phase lock problem Go directly to 2nd Converter Check Receiver Troubleshooting 8 3 If the or B signal path is very low and the R signal path is normal go to and Sampler Check by Substitution a If the or signal path appears slightly low the problem is possibly faulty directional coupler or more probably a lossy sampler To isolate the fault continue with Directional Coupler Check 84 Receiver Troubleshooting
203. ential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Saks and Service Office Safety and Licensing 15 1 Shipment for Service If you are sending the instrument to Hewlett Packard for service ship the analyzer to the nearest HP service center for repair including a description of any failed test and any error message Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable anti static packaging materials A listing of Hewlett Packard sales and service offices 15 provided on the next page 15 2 Safety and Licensing Table 15 1 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices UNITED STATES Instrument Support Center Hewlett Packard Company 800 403 0801 EUBOPEAN FIELD OPEBATIONS Headquarters France Germany Hewlett Packard S A Hewlett Packard France Hewlett Packard GmbH 15
204. ention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Warning Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond awarning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Instrument Markings AN The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation CE The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community If accompanied by a year it is when the design was proven ISM1 A This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product CSA The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association 154 Safety and Licensing General Safety Considerations Safety Earth Ground Warning This is a Safety Class I product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption i
205. epair Procedures A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies 5661350 Assembly Replacement Pest Repair Procedures 14 35 A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly Tools Required m T 10 TORX screwdriver a 15 TORX screwdriver 9 16 inch hex nut driver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Disconnect W30 from the high stability frequency reference board A26 3 Remove the BNC connector nut and washer from the 10 MHz PRECISION REFERENCE connector item 1 on the rear panel 4 Remove the screw item 4 that attaches the 1D5 assembly to the rear panel 5 Remove the screw item 2 that secures the high stability frequency reference board A26 to the bracket 6 Slide the board out of the bracket Be careful not to lose the plastic spacer washer item 3 that is on the BNC connector as the board is being removed Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note Before reinserting the high stability frequency reference board A26 into the bracket be sure the plastic spacer washer item 3 is on the BNC connector 14 36 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly
206. eplaces the solid state transfer switch with a mechanical switch in the test set providing the instrument with greater power handling capability Because the mechanical transfer switch has less loss than the standard switch the output power of Option 007 instruments is 5 dB higher Option 085 High Power System This option is designed to permit the measurement of high power devices With an external power amplifier this configuration will allow up to 20 Watts 43 dBm of output at the test ports The maximum test port input power is 1 Watt 30 dBm CW but jumpers on the front panel allow the insertion of high power attenuators or isolators This allows test device output levels up to the power limits of the inserted components Additionally there is an external reference input that allows the external amplifier s frequency response and drift to be ratioed out and there are internally controlled step attenuators between the couplers and samplers to prevent overload A network analyzer with this option can be configured to operate as a normal instrument with slightly degraded output power level and accuracy or as an instrument capable of making single connection multiple measurements Because of high output power option 085 is only available with a mechanical transfer switch similar to Option 007 Option 089 Frequency Offset Mode This option adds the ability to offset the source and receiver frequencies for frequency translated measuremen
207. er indicates a pass An asterisk indicates a fail System Verification and Performance e t s 233 This page intentionally left blank 234 System Verification ad Performances est s 1 Frequency Accuracy Performance Test This test checks the frequency accuracy of the analyzer at its maximum frequency Required Equipment and Tools HP 8719D 20D Only Frequency esed vri vut st ums HP 5350B RE cioe cette dette ette dettes e aieo ay eda HP 85131C D Required Equipment and Tools HP 8722D Only Frequency Counter a ML ML ad Pus 1C a6 e HP 5351B RE Cablen p cM MR WO HP85133C D Analyzer warm up time 1 hour 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 17 and press sb65d Figure 2 17 Frequency Ramge and Accuracy Test Setup System Verification and 236 Performance Tests 2 Select the analyzer CW frequency a For the HP 8719D press 13 5 b For the HP 8720D press 20 G n c For the HP 8722D press 26 G n 3 Write the frequency counter reading on the Performance Test Record If the Instrument Fails This Test 1 If the frequency measured is close to specification limits either in or out of specification check the time base accuracy of the counter used 2 If the analyzer fails by a significant margin the master time base probably needs adjustment In this case refer to the Frequency Accuracy Adjustment in Cha
208. erall Block Diagram 414 HP 8719D 20D 22D Overall Block Diagram 5 1 Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram 5 2 Location of A15 Diagnostic LEDs 5 3 8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations 5 4 Removing the Line Fuse 5 5 Power Supply Cable Locations 5 6 A15W1 Plug Detail 5 7 Power Supply Block Diagram 6 1 Digital Control Group Block Diagram for firmware revisions 6 xx and 6 2 Digital Control Group Block Diagram for firmware revisions 7 xx and abovels 4 223 Be 6 3 A7 Jumper Positions Firmware revisions 6 xx and below 6 4 A7 Switch Positions Firmware revisions 7 xx and above 6 5 CPU LED Window on Rear Panel 6 6 CPU LED Window on Rear Panel 6 7 Backlight Intensity Check Setup 6 8 Newtons 6 9 AID GSP Voltages 6 10 Pin Locations on A19 6 11 A7 CPU 7 1 HP 8719D 20D 0 25V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 7 2 HP 8722D 0 25V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 7 3 Fractional N Tuning Voltage Waveform at Abus Node 21 7 4 VCO 2 Waveforms at A14TP1 7 5 14 TTL Signals at 3
209. erms should be within these values Table 11 2 HP 8719D 8720D Characteristics Without Error Correction Frequency Range 0 05 to 0 5 GHz 0 5 to 2 GHz 2 to 8 GHz 8 to 20 GHz Directivityl Source Match Standard Source Match Option 400 Source Match Option 007 Source Match Option 085 Load Match Standard Load Match Option 400 Load Match Option 007 Load Match Option 085 Reflection Tracking Transmission Tracking Crosstalk 1 Includes effect of HP 85131D cable set on test ports 2 Excludes 0 5 dB slope characteristic in magnitude response from 0 84 to 40 GHz and rolloff below 0 84 GHz which is characteristically 3 dB at 500 MHz 15 dB at 100 MHz and 20 dB at 50 MHz 11 6 Error Terms Table 11 3 HP 8722D Characteristics Without Error Correction Frequency Range 2 to 8 GH 10 to 40 GH Directivity 15 dB Source Match Standard Option 400 Source Match Option 007 Option 085 8 dB Load Match Standard Option 400 10 dB Load Match Option 007 Option 085 10 dB Reflection Tracking 3 dB Transmission Tracking 2 8 dB Crosstalk 85 dB 1 Measured with RF cables 2 Excludes 0 5 dB slope characteristic in magnitude response from 0 84 to 40 GHz and rolloff below 0 84 GHz which is characteristically 3 dB at 500 MHz 15 dB at 100 MHz and 20 dB at 50 MHz Error Terms 11 7 Error Term Descriptions The error term descriptions in this section include the following
210. es a three channel receiver for measurement of test device characteristics and a large screen display Figure 12 1 is a simplified block diagram of the network analyzer system Theory of Operation 12 1 LYMTHEZIZEDL SIFLE DIGITAL CONTROL POWER ZUFFL Figure 12 1 Simplified System Block Diagram The built in synthesized source of the analyzer generates a swept or CW continuous wave signal in the following ranges HP 8719D HP 8720D HP 8722D 50 MHz to 13 5 GHz 50 MHz to 20 GHz 50 MHz to 40 GHz The source output power is leveled by an internal ALC automatic leveling control circuit to a maximum level of 5 dBm 10 dBm HP 8722D at the front panel measurement ports A portion of the source signal is routed to the R sampler in the receiver and fed back to the source for phase lock The signal separation devices separate the source signal into a reference path and a test path They provide attenuation for the source signal RF path switching to allow forward and reverse measurements and external connections for the DUT device under test The signal transmitted through or reflected from the DUT goes to the receiver for comparison with the reference signal The receiver converts the source signal to a 4 kHz IF intermediate frequency for signal processing retaining both magnitude and phase characteristics The IF is converted to digital signals which are processed into magnitude and phase information The
211. esponds to 1 GHz 7 For the HP 8719D press ff repeatedly to check power at 2 5 10 and 13 5 GHz setting the power meter to the corresponding calibration factors for each frequency The power should be within 2 dBm of the set value Start Troubleshooting Here 4 17 8 For the HP 8720D press dj repeatedly to check power at 2 5 10 and 20 0 GHz The power should be within 2 dBm of the set value 9 For the HP 8722D press ft repeatedly to check power at 2 5 10 20 and 40 0 GHz The power should be within 2 dBm of the set value 10 Press Y and connect the power sensor to port 2 Repeat the measurement from port 2 If the power is not within specification at either port go to the Source Troubleshooting chapter to continue troubleshooting 4 18 Start Troubleshooting Here No Oscilloscope or Power Meter Try the ABUS Monitor ABUS node 9 1 Press PRESET START 52 MZ GOP 20 Ga 2 j G3 3 FORMAT The display should resemble Figure 4 8 If any of the above procedures provide unexpected results or if error messages are present refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting CH1 AUX Re 1 U REF 3 U START 050 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz Figure 4 8 0 25V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 Start Troubleshooting Here 4 19 Receiver If any input shows unexpected results go to
212. est 73 10 21 test 74 10 21 test 75 76 10 21 TEST ABORTED 10 54 test cables 9 4 test descriptions 10 9 test equipment for service 1 1 TEST OPTIONS 10 7 test options menu 10 7 Test Pat 1 10 19 Test Pat 10 10 21 Test Pat 11 10 21 Test Pat 12 10 21 Test Pat 18 10 21 Test Pat 14 15 10 21 Test Pat 2 4 10 19 Test Pat 5 10 20 Test Pat 6 10 20 Test Pat 7 10 20 Test Pat 8 10 20 Test Pat 9 10 20 test patterns 10 4 Test Port Cables Check the 2 8 tests adjustments 10 17 chapter 2 1 display 10 6 10 19 external 10 15 internal 10 9 patterns 10 19 system verification 10 16 tests diagnostics 6 25 tests menu 10 4 test status terms 10 5 theory of operation 5 V digital supply 12 5 A15 green LED 12 5 15 preregulator 12 4 A15 red LED 12 5 A8 green LEDs 12 6 8 post regulator 12 6 shutdown circuit 12 6 air flow detector 12 6 digital control 12 7 display power 12 7 line power module 12 5 power supply 12 4 power supply shutdown 12 5 Index 15 preregulated voltages 12 5 variable fan circuit 12 6 Theory of Operation 12 1 tools for service 1 1 transmission tracking ETF and ETR 11 14 TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OVER 10 54 troubleshooting A15 preregulator 5 10 1 2 front panel 6 22 accessories 4 22 9 1 diagnostics 4 8 digital control 6 1 disk drive 4 8 fan 5 20 faulty group identification 4 10 first step 4 1 front pane
213. ete instrument serial number the description and function of the part and the number of parts required Address the order to the nearest Hewlett Packard office Replaceable Parts 13 3 The module nbed here is a efficient awe al method of peeping your Hewlett Paclard instrument service Locate defective module es ing troub rig In 4 Pestored escharge modules are shippec dividualy bases E Install the replacement S is w Mrd A A nod replacement module beep the defec Map n Ee dule en hand tive module for return module the bo contains to HP Exchange en failure report Return addr order restoreg eschange Order restored eschange module from HF Refer module from Fefer to the replaceable parts to the replaceable parts section far part number section for port nurnberz pen bos carefully it will be used te return defective module Swap replocemient rnod Put restored exchange to HF Complete failure report ule and defective module module in spares Place ib andi defective rmedul in Be sure lo remove enclosed return address label Feturn detective module Return detective module to HF to HP Seal with tape Inside U S A sticl preprinted return address label over label already on box
214. event electrostatic discharge ESD System Verification and 2 27 Performance ests PORT 1 PORT 2 Cable Guide to the male cable for an in line connection 4 Hold with Hold with Cap two fingers one hand sb610d Figure 2 12 Aligning the Center Conductor PORT 1 PORT 2 Torque here Hold here Torque here sb611d Figure 2 13 Torquing the Connection 46 Enter Test 30 using step keys entry keys or front panel knob Repeat steps 38 through 42 with the 250 mismatch airline See the above figures 46 The printout of the measurements shows both a plot of the measurement s active and a list of the measured frequencies with corresponding data The plot includes both the measured data trace and the supplied factory data trace The listing includes only the measured data If there is a failure at any frequency an asterisk will be next to the measured data and the out of specification measured data on the plot will be blanked out 2 28 System Verification and Performaned est s In Case of Difficulty 1 Inspect all connections DO NOT disconnect the cables from the analyzer test ports Doing so WILL INVALIDATE the calibration that you have done earlier 2 Repeat the Device Verification procedure Be sure to make good connections for each verification device measurement 3 If the analyzer still fails the test check the measurement calibration as follows a Press b
215. f each size are displayed Characters 0 and 3 cannot be drawn and several others are really control characters such as carriage return and line feed Test Fat 11 Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the EXTERNAL display It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes Each stripe should be clearly visible A limited bandwidth would smear these lines together This is used to test the quality of the external monitor Test Pat 12 Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting using an oscilloscope It is similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 32 times across the screen Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will then show 32 ramps instead of one staircase between each horizontal sync pulse This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing circuit of the 19 GSP board Test Pat 13 Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color convergence of the external monitor Test Pat 14 15 Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color convergence linearity and alignment This is useful when aligning the LCD display in the bezel Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 21 Service Key Menus Service Features The service feature menus are shown in 10 3 and described in the following paragraphs The following keys access the service feature menus 87 190 200
216. f necessary Adjustments and Correction Constants 347 Instruments with Option 1D5 Only 8 Reconnect the BNC to BNC jumper between the EXT REF and the 10 MHz Precision Reference as shown in Figure 3 10 BNC TO BNC JUMPER sb629d Figure 3 10 High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location 9 Insert a narrow screwdriver and adjust the high stability frequency reference potentiometer for a CW frequency measurement within specification In Case of Difficulty Replace the A26 assembly if you cannot adjust the CW frequency within specification 348 Adjustmentsand Correction Constants Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Required Equipment and Tools Spectrum Analyzer op E eue HP 8563E RF Cable 500 Type N 24 ineh 8120 4781 Cable 500 Coax BNC m to BNC HP 10503A Non metallic Adjustment 01 8830 0024 Antistatic Wrist Strap eue oS es E E E EEG 9300 1367 Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord eene x eta ke 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth Ground 9300 0797 HP 8719D 20D Adapter 3 5 mm to Type N f HP 1152545 8722D Adapter 2 4 mm to 7 mm HP 851303 8722D Adapter Type N f to 7 mm HP 1152
217. f neither low band or high band signal appears there could be a faulty A54 YIG oscillator HP 8722D Only A55 YIG oscillator All phase lock 58 M A D S or associated cabling 7 18 Source Troubleshooting Band Related Problems Table 7 5 lists assemblies potentially responsible for band related problems Table 7 5 Assemblies Potentially Responsible for Band Related Problems Low Band Mid Band High Band HP 8722D Only S1 HP 8722D Only A54 HP 8722D Only Note Problems in RF components crimped RF cables and improper connections which generally cause power holes in an RF signal may cause symptoms that indicate a band related problem Start by measuring power from 52 S1 HP 8722D Only If the power here is good then all of the components are verified Continue troubleshooting with Broadband Power Problems to check other components Also keep the following points in mind Remove the instrument covers m Cables having improper connections can be the problem in all cases m Use the flexible RF cable from the tool kit to measure power at otherwise inaccessible connections Before replacing suspect assemblies refer to A15 Interface Power Supplies to check bias voltages Low Band Problems 1 Calibrate and zero a power meter and connect it to S2J3 Source Troubleshooting 7 19 Note While adjusting the DAC numbers in the following step monitor port 1 with a spectrum analyzer to be s
218. fer switch A60 and A61 DC Bias Tees The DC bias tees provide a means of biasing active devices with an external DC voltage connected to the rear panel DC BIAS CONNECT ports The DC voltage is applied directly to the center conductor of the test port connectors A blocking capacitor ensures that the bias current goes only to the device under test and not back into the source Likewise an inductor in the bias path prevents RF from being imposed on the external DC supply A62 and A63 Directional Couplers The test signal goes into the through line arm of the couplers and from there to the test ports and the device under test The coupled arm of the couplers carries the signal reflected from or transmitted through the device under test to the receiver for measurement The coupling coefficient of the directional couplers is nominally 20 dB 40 dB at 50 MHz Theory of Operation 12 21 Receiver Theory The receiver measures and processes the input signals into digital information for display Figure 12 7 is a simplified block diagram of the receiver functional group The 12 reference assembly which is part of the source group is also included in the illustration to show how the 2nd LO signal is derived tit TF 10 MHz AlU DIGITAL IF 12 REFERENCE pon U 2 ind LO 9 996 MHz ef 566244 Figure 12 7 Receiver Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram Samplers and S
219. formance Test 2 44 If the Instrument Fails This Test 2 2 48 Performance Test 2 49 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Post Repair 3 3 A7 Jumper Switch Positions 3 8 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 3 10 In Case of Difficulty 3 11 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 3 12 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 47 8 18 In Case of Difficulty 3 13 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 4 3 14 In Case of Difficulty 3 14 Contents 2 Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 In Case of Difficulty Protected Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 50 In Case of Difficulty Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants In Case of Difficulty Output Power Set main power DAC to preset values Set the potentiometers to the minimum levels Start the Adjust Mid Band Power Adjust Low Band Power Adjust High Band Power 872272 Fine TunetheFlatnes In Case of Difficulty Power Linearity Adjustment
220. g measurement uncertainty equations and system error models flowgraphs show the relationship of the systematic random and drift errors These are useful for predicting overall measurement performance Determining System Measurement Uncertainties A l Sources of Measurement Errors Sources of Systematic Errors The residual after measurement calibration systematic errors result from imperfections in the calibration standards the connector interface the interconnecting cables and the instrumentation All measurements are affected by dynamic accuracy and frequency error effects For reflection measurements the associated residual errors are effective directivity effective source match and effective reflection tracking For transmission measurements the additional residual errors are effective crosstalk effective load match and effective transmission tracking The listing below shows the abbreviations used for residual systematic errors that are in the error models and uncertainty equations a Efd Erd effective directivity Efs Ers effective source match Err effective reflection tracking Etc Erc effective crosstalk a Efl Erl effective load match Eft Ert effective transmission tracking Crm Ctm cable stability deg GHz Abl Ab2 dynamic accuracy s F frequency The sources for dynamic accuracy error effects are from errors during internal self calibration routines gain compress
221. gital Control Theory in this section and to Data Processing in the first chapter of the Reference for more information on signal processing An additional input to the 10 assembly is the analog bus ABUS a built in service tool for testing analog circuits within the instrument This is a single multiplexed line that networks analog nodes throughout the instrument or monitors an external input at the rear panel AUX INPUT connector It is controlled by the CPU and used like an oscilloscope or frequency counter to make internal voltage and frequency measurements 12 24 Theory of Operation 13 Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the HP 8719D 8720D 8722D network analyzer Replaceable parts include the following major assemblies m cables hardware In general parts of major assemblies are not listed Refer to Table 13 2 at the back of this chapter to help interpret part descriptions in the replaceable parts lists that follow Replaceable Parts 13 1 Replacing an assembly The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8719D 8720D 8722D network analyzer 1 9 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Replace the faulty assembly
222. h Band Problems HP 8722D Only 1 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU DAC NUM HIGH BAND 4000 x1 SRC tune in the high band is capable of tuning the instrument from about 19 5 to 24 GHz Loss of lock in high band only may likely be due to a bad cable or connection Referring to the overall block diagram the following components may be at fault 51 a A58 M A D S A54 YIG2 Since the analyzer phase locked in low and or mid band all of the phase lock circuitry is working so look for low power as a cause of phase lock errors Check power at the output of SI If the power is less than 5 dBm check the insertion loss of S1 and the associated cabling a If the power out of SI is greater than 5 dBm the problem is probably above 24 GHz Proceed with the next steps Check all RF cabling and connections a If any of the cables or connectors bad have them repaired or replaced a If the cables and connectors are good replace the A54 YIG 2 If high band problems still persist then replace the A58 M A D S 7 22 Source Troubleshooting Broadband Power Problems This section assumes that a power problem exists across the full frequency range and that no error message is displayed The problem may affect port 1 port 2 or both Suspect assemblies include A69 step attenuator A659 source interface board 52 84 transfer switch A58 M A D S A61 bias tee A62 directi
223. haracter and are combined on an RSS basis The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis In all cases the error terms are treated as linear absolute magnitudes Transmission magnitude uncertainty forward direction Etm Ert Systematic Random Drift and Stability Systematic Efe Ef EfsS11 EflS22 EfsEflS21912 Ab2 S21 Random Rt Nt Ct 521 2 1511 2522 Rt S21 Crt1 Crt2 1811 2522 Drift and Stability Dm2b2S21 where Crt2 Connector repeatability transmission port 2 Crr2 Connector repeatability reflection port 2 Efnt effective noise on trace Efnf effective noise floor 1 connector repeatability reflection Crtl connector repeatability transmission Ctml cable 1 transmission magnitude stability Ctm2 cable 2 reflection magnitude stability Crm2 cable 2 reflection magnitude stability Dmsl drift magnitude C source to port Efs effective source match error Eft effective transmission tracking error Efl effective load match error Efc effective crosstalk error A 6 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties The detailed equation for each of the above terms is derived from the signal flow model located at the end of this appendix Transmission Phase Uncertainty Etp Transmission phase uncertainty is calculated from a comparison of the magnit
224. he ideal model for the devices The differences represent systematic repeatable errors of the analyzer system The resulting calibration coefficients are good representations of the systematic error sources for details on the various levels of error correction refer to the Optimizing Measurement Results chapter of the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide For details on the theory of error correction refer to the Application and Operation Concepts chapter of the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose Specific parts of the analyzer and its accessories directly contribute to the magnitude and shape of the error terms Since we know this correlation and we know what typical error terms look like we can examine error terms to monitor system performance preventive maintenance or to identify faulty components in the system troubleshooting m Preventive M aintenance A stable repeatable system should generate repeatable error terms over long time intervals for example six months If you make a hardcopy record print or plot of the error terms you can periodically compare current error terms with the record A sudden shift in error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic errors and may indicate the need for further troubleshooting A long term trend often reflects drift Error Terms 11 1 connector and cable wear or gradual degradation indicating the need f
225. he following order a Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 JF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 47 Adjustmentsand Correction Constants 336 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure Required Equipment and Tools 3 5 inch Floppy Disk HP 92192 box of 10 The correction constants that are unique to your instrument are stored in EEPROM on the A7 controller assembly By creating an EEPROM backup disk you will have a copy of all the correction constant data should you need to replace or repair the A7 assembly 1 Insert a 3 5 inch disk into the analyzer disk drive 2 Ifthe disk is not formatted follow these steps Save Recall Note The analyzer creates a default file FILEO The filename appears in the upper left comer of the display The file type ISTATE E indicates that the file is an instrument state with EEPROM backup Use the front panel softkey an external keyboard to rename 45 where 12345 represents the last 5 digits of the instrument s serial number The first character in the e must be a letter When you are finished renaming the file press 336 Adjustmentsand Correction Constants 5 Write the following information on the disk label analyzer serial number a today s date a EEPROM Backup Disk Adjustments nd Correc
226. he instrument to indicate either normal or shutdown status 124 Theory of Operation Line Power Module The line power module includes the line power switch voltage selector switch and main fuse The line power switch is activated from the front panel The voltage selector switch accessible at the rear panel adapts the analyzer to local line voltages of approximately 115 V or 230 V with 350 VA maximum The main fuse which protects the input side of the preregulator against drawing too much line current is also accessible at the rear panel Refer to the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer Installation and Quick Start Guide for line voltage tolerances and other power considerations Preregulated Voltages The switching preregulator converts the line voltage to several DC voltages The regulated 5V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard The following partially regulated voltages are routed through A15W1 to the A8 post regulator for final regulation 70V 25V 18V 18V 8V 8V Regulated 5 V Digital Supply The 5 VD supply is regulated by the control circuitry in the A15 preregulator It goes directly to the motherboard and from there to all assemblies requiring a low noise digital supply A 5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to the A15 preregulator The 5 V CPU is derived from the 5 VD in the A8 post regulator and goes directly to the 19 graphics system processor In order for the preregulator to funct
227. he overall test status will be PASS If any test fails the overall test status will be FAIL 7 Torun the test for port 2 press the step key The display should show TEST 22 Op Ck Port 2 in the active entry area 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 9 If both tests pass the analyzer is about 80 verified If either test fails refer to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation in this section or a Make sure that the connection is tight Repeat the test b Visually inspect the connector interfaces and clean if necessary refer to Principles of Microwave Connector Care located in Chapter 1 c Verify that the short meets published specifications d Substitute another short and repeat the test e Finally refer to the detailed tests located in this section or fault isolation procedures located in the troubleshooting sections 4 6 Start Troubleshooting Here Step 3 HP IB Systems Check Check the analyzer s HP IB functions with a known working passive peripheral such as a plotter printer or disk drive 1 Connect the peripheral to the analyzer using a known good HP IB cable 2 Press LOCAL peripheral to enable the analyzer to control the 3 Then press device addresses will be recognized by the analyzer The factory default addresses are HP 8719D 20D 22D Plotter port Printer port Disk external Controller Power meter Note You may use other addresses with two provisions
228. he problem Check the 8 Post Regulator 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Disconnect the cable A15W1 from the A8 post regulator See Figure 5 5 3 Switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on 15 If the red LED goes out the problem is probably the A8 post regulator Continue to Verify the A15 Preregulator to first verify that the inputs to A8 are correct Q If the red LED is still on the problem is probably the A15 preregulator or one of the assemblies obtaining power from it Continue with Check for a Faulty Assembly 9 15 1 A8P1 8 10 12 14 a CM Se li o 5061440 Figure 5 5 Power Supply Cable Locations Power Supply Troubleshooting 6 8 Verify the 15 Preregulator Verify that the 15 preregulator is supplying the correct voltages to the A8 post regulator Use a voltmeter with a small probe to measure the output voltages of A15W1 s plug Refer to Table 5 2 and Figure 5 6 Q If the voltages are not within tolerance replace A15 If the voltages are within tolerance A15 is verified Continue to Check for a Faulty Assembly Table 5 2 Output Voltages A15WIPI Disconnected 832 connected Voltages 15 Preregulator Mnemonic Voltages 100 to 125 68 to 75 9 70 V not used N C N C N C 22 4 to 4 88 6 17 0 to 18 4 18 V 22 4 to 88 6 17 0 to 18 4 18V N C 7 4 to 48 0 N C 9 4 to 14 74 to 48 0 8V 8 4 to 14
229. hecking A7 CPU Red LED Patterns For instruments with firmware revisions 6 and below 6 10 Checking A7 CPU Red LED Patterns For instruments with firmware revisions 7 xx and above 6 12 Display Troubleshooting A18 A19 6 14 Evaluating your Display 6 14 Backlight Intensity Check 00 6 14 Red Green or Blue Pixels Specifications 6 16 Dark Pixels Specifications 6 16 Newton s Rings sack PCR ES es 6 16 19 GSP and A18 Display Troubleshooting 6 18 Measure Display Power Supply Voltages Entering 19 6 18 Run Display Test 55 6 19 Inspect Ribbon Cable Repeat Display Test 55 6 19 Perform Walking One 6 19 Run Display Tests 59 76 6 21 Front Panel Troubleshooting A1 A2 6 22 Check Front Panel LEDs After 6 22 Identify the Stuck 6 22 InspeetsCableg ae RO IA EON 3 x 6 24 Test Using 6 25 Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests 6 25 If the Fault is Intermittent o a cnn 6 27 Repeat Test 6 27 HP I Failures E dom 6 27 7 Source Troubleshooting SourceTroubleshootingFlowchart 7 2 Assembly Replacement Sequ
230. hen attaching the bracket This helps assure that there is no unnecessary distorion of the disk drive assembly 3 Slide the disk drive and bracket assembly into the analyzer 4 Loosely secure the disk drive bracket to the side of the frame using the four screws saved previously 5 Connect the existing ribbon cable to the replacement disk drive Note Make sure the disk drive connector contacts touch the ribbon cable contact areas the ribbon cable contact areas must face the contacts in the disk drive connector Also assure that the connector is properly locked 6 Replace the front panel with the exception of fastening the top left screw refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter 7 While adjusting the position of the disk drive tighten the screws that secure the disk drive bracket to the side of the frame 8 Insert a disk into the disk drive and then eject the disk If the disk drive door operation is satisfactory continue with step 10 If the disk drive door operation is not satisfactory continue with step 9 9 Loosen and then retighten the four screws that secure the disk drive to the disk drive bracket a Loosen the three screws that are readily accessible b Loosen the uppermost frontmost screw through the top left access hole in the front frame c After disk drive tension has been released retighten all four screws 14 32 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures A3 Disk Drive Assembl
231. i lea AO 6 OUT SIDE C F 9 jo i ENS INSIDE sb 5ed Assembly Replacement and Pest Repair Procedures 14 37 Bl Fan Assembly Tools Required 2 5 mm hex key driver T 10 TORX screwdriver a 15 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Remove the four screws item 1 that secure the fan and fan cover to the rear panel Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note The fan should be installed so that the direction of the air flow is away from the instrument There is an arrow on the fan chassis indicating the air flow direction 1438 Assembly Replacement and Pest Repair Procedures B1 Fan Assembly 4 PLACE x Sbo67d Assembly Replacement and PostRepair Procedures 14 39 Post Repair Procedures The following tables list the additional service procedures which you must perform to ensure that the instrument is working correctly following the replacement of an assembly These procedures can be located in either Chapter 2 or Chapter 3 Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table Table 14 1 Related Service Procedures 1 of 4 Replaced Adjustments Verification Assem
232. ic accuracy from the dynamic accuracy graph see Figure Other Error Terms Depending on the connector type in your system refer to residual error specifications in the Specifications and Measurement Uncertainties chapter in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide and the Characteristic values Table in this chapter to find the absolute linear magnitude of the remaining error terms Combining Error Terms Combine the above terms using the reflection or transmission uncertainty equation in the worksheets Determining System Measurement Uncertainties A 9 Characteristic Values Table 3 5 mm Type N 2 4mm Crrl Port 1 Reflection Connector Repeat 60 dB 60 60 mm dB Crtl Port 1 Transmission Connector Repeat 60 dB 60 dB e0dB dB dB dB soam PT ET mas was UPIeTEYEYT 0 03 dB 0 01 dB 0 03 dB 1 Cable Phase Stability Port 1 amp Port 2 0 09 GHz 0 09 GHz 0 1 GHz 0 09 GHz Dms1 2 Magnitude Drift 0 0015 8 0 0015 0 0015 0 0015 A 10 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet 1 of 3 511 521 512 522 Directivity Reflection Tracking Source Match Load Match Transmission Tracking Effective Crosstalk Dynamic Accuracy Magnitude Noise Floor High Level Noise Connector Reflection Repeatability Port 1 Con
233. ime At the end of a successful loading the LEDs for Channel 1 and Testport 1 will remain on and the display will turn on indicating the version of firmware that was loaded Note Any time the A7 CPU assembly is replaced all of the correction constants must be regenerated or recalled and stored on the new CPU assembly Hewlett Packard recommends that you store the correction constant data to a 3 5 disk Refer to the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure in this chapter to do this In Case of Difficulty m If the firmware did not load successfully LED patterns on the front panel can help you isolate the problem a Ifthe following LED pattern is present an acceptable firmware filename was not found on the disk The desired format for flrmware filenames is 87200 07 02 Check that the flrmware disk used was for the HP 8719D 20D 22D LED Pattern CH1 CH2 R L 6 Adjustmentsand Correction Constants 341 If any of the following LED patterns are present the firmware disk may be defective LED Pattern CH1 CH2 L T 8 If any other LED pattern is present the CPU board is defective occ 2 ee a 25 Note If firmware did not load a red LED on the CPU board will be flashing a If the following LED pattern is present on the CPU board suspect the disk drive or associated cabling e front of instrument 3 42 Adjustments and Correction Constants Reference Assembl
234. individual transmission paths Time domain operation retains all accuracy inherent with the active error correction Option 1CM Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles Option 1CM is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount the instrument with handles detached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing Option 1CP Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles Option 1CP is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches spacing Service qui pment and AnalyzerOptions 1 7 Service and Support Options The analyzer automatically includes a one year on site service warranty where available If on site service is not available in your local area you can purchase the analyzer with a W08 option instead which converts the one year on site warranty to a three year return to HP warranty Consult your local Hewlett Packard sales engineer for availability of on site service The following service and support options are available at the time you purchase an HP 8719D 20D 22D network analyzer Option W08 This option converts the one year on site warranty that was automatically included with your analyzer to a three year return to HP warranty This option does not include calibration Option W31 This option adds two years of on site repair to the product warranty providi
235. information significance of each error term m typical results following a full 2 port error correction m guidelines to interpret each error term The same description applies to both the forward F and reverse R terms The plots shown with each are typical of a working system following a full 2 port calibration as performed in Measurement Calibration Procedure above It may be helpful to define some of the terms used in the error term descriptions that follow a R signal path refers to the reference signal path It includes the A58 M A D S A64 R sampler and associated semi rigid coax cables A input path refers to the port 1 input path and includes the A58 M A D S A69 step attenuator S4 transfer switch A61 bias tee A62 directional coupler A65 A sampler and associated semi rigid coax cables B input path refers to the port 2 input path and includes the 58 M A D S A69 step attenuator S4 transfer switch A60 bias tee A63 directional coupler A66 B sampler and associated semi rigid coax cables 11 8 Error Terms Directivity EDF and EDR These are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity error terms of the system The directivity error of the test port is determined by measuring the 11 and 822 reflection of the calibration kit load The load has a much better return loss specification than does the uncorrected test port therefore any power detected from this measurement is assumed to be due to direc
236. ing Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless an error message appears on the display refer to Error Messages near the end of this chapter a the fan is not working refer to Fan Troubleshooting in this chapter The power supply group assemblies consist of the following post regulator m 15 preregulator All assemblies however are related to the power supply group because power is supplied to each assembly Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 1 Power Supply Troubleshooting Flowchart 5 2 TAKE ACTION AS DIRECTED CHECK A15 PREREGULATOR AND LOADS CHECK AB POST REGULATOR AND LOADS ININE LEDS NOT ALL ON CHECK AB ALONE a LED S ON STEADILY TROUBLESHOOT REMOVE AND CHECK AB LOADS CHECK DISPLAY CHECK ASSEMBLIES LOADING 7 5v SUPPLY DISABLE SHUTDOWN AND FIND LOADS ON BAD SUPPLY CHECK OTHER LOADS REPLACE 15 Power Supply Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Repl
237. ion the 5 V digital supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies and the 5 V sense line must be working If not the other preregulated voltages will not be correct Shutdown Indications the Green LED and Red LED The green LED is on in normal operation It is off when line power is not connected not switched on or set too low or if the line fuse has blown The red LED which is off in normal operation lights to indicate a fault in the 5 V supply This may be an over under line voltage over line current or overtemperature condition Refer to the troubleshooting chapters for more information Theory of Operation 12 5 A8 Post Regulator The A8 post regulator filters and regulates the DC voltages received from the 15 preregulator It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies It distributes regulated constant voltages to individual assemblies throughout the instrument It includes the overtemperature shutdown circuit the variable fan speed circuit and the air flow detector Nine green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies Refer to the Power Supply Block Diagram located at the end of Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting to see the voltages provided by the A8 post regulator Voltage Indications the Green LEDs The eight green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 assembly are on in normal operation to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply
238. ion 007 0 HP 8722D 3 10 8722 Option 007 2 5 1 All options except Option 007 Note The analyzer may display the message CAUTION TEST PORT OVERLOAD REDUCE POWER Ignore this message and continue with the procedure 15 Press Preset 16 Press 8 3 24 Adjustments and Correction Constants 19 Adjust the mid band power offset resistor 59 R71 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value 0 2 dB listed under Power B in Table 3 4 20 Press Menu 21 Adjust the mid band power slope resistor A59 R88 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value 2 dB listed under Power in Table 3 4 Adjust Low Band Power 23 Adjust the low band power offset resistor A59 R70 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value listed under Power in Table 3 4 24 25 Adjust the low band power slope resistor A59 R86 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value listed under Power in Table 3 4 Adjust High Band Pbwer 8722D ONLY 26 Press 27 Adjust the high band power offset resistor A59 R80 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value listed under Power in Table 3 4 28 Press BB 29 Adjust the high band power slope resistor A59 R87 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value listed under Power B 4 dB in Table 3 4 Fine Tune the Flatness 30 Press 31 Press Menu
239. ion Standards What the System Verification Verifies The system verification procedure verifies the minimum HP 8719D 20D 22D system which includes the following sb66d a network analyzer a calibration kit test port return cables N ote Additional equipment or accessories used with the above system are not verified by system verification System Verification and 2 17 Performance cst s Required Equipment and Accessories The following equipment and accessories are required to verify the network analyzer system for information on compatible printers refer to the Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results chapter in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide HP 660 Printer or other compatible printer a Centronics Interface cable 1 Verification Kit a Calibration Kit a RF Cable Set Analyeer warm up time 1 hour Table 2 1 Supported System Configurations HP 8719D 20D Only 1 ET Table 2 2 Supported System Configurations HP 8722D Only Description 2 4mm 3 5mm I Calibration Kit 85056B D 85052B D Verification Kit 1 85057B 85053A B Cables 85133D F 85131D F Cable Substitution The test port cables specified for an HP 8719D 20D 22D system have been characterized for connector repeatability magnitude and phase stability with flexing return loss insertion loss and aging rate Since the performance of test port cables is
240. ion constants adjustment 3 10 Source Troubleshooting 7 1 Source Troubleshooting Flowchart 7 2 SOURCE TUNE OFF 10 23 speed fan 5 20 spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 49 SRAM RAM 10 12 SRC ADJUST MENU 10 23 Start Troubleshooting chapter 4 1 status terms for test 10 5 STORE EEPR ON OFF 10 26 stuck key identification 6 22 support and service options 1 8 Swap Samplers to Check A64 R Sampler 7 7 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 10 53 Sweep Trig 10 14 Switch Repeatability 4 2 1 symbol conventions 10 38 System Operation 12 1 system performance uncorrected 11 6 system verification post repair 3 3 14 40 System Verification 2 15 system verification tests 10 4 10 16 Sys Ver Init 10 16 SYS VER TESTS 10 5 T table of service tools 1 1 Temperature and Humidity Check the 2 5 temperature check 5 13 terms for test status 10 5 test 43 3 10 10 17 test 44 3 12 10 17 test 45 10 17 test 46 10 17 test 47 3 13 10 17 test 48 3 14 10 17 test 49 3 15 10 17 test 50 3 17 10 17 test 51 10 17 test 52 10 18 test 53 3 35 10 18 test 54 10 18 test 55 10 6 10 19 test 56 10 6 10 19 test 57 10 6 10 19 test 58 10 6 10 19 test 59 10 6 10 19 test 60 10 6 10 19 test 61 10 6 10 19 test 62 10 19 test 63 65 10 19 test 66 10 20 test 67 10 20 test 68 10 20 test 69 10 20 test 70 10 20 test 71 10 21 test 72 10 21 t
241. ion in the microwave frequency converter sampler at high signal levels errors generated in the synchronous detectors localized non linearities in the IF filter system and from LO leakage into the IF signal paths Sources of Random Errors The random error sources are noise connector repeatability and dynamic accuracy There are two types of noise in any measurement system low level noise noise floor and high level noise phase noise of the source Low level noise is the broadband noise floor of the receiver which can be reduced through averaging or by changing the IF bandwidth High level noise or jitter of the trace data is due to the noise floor and the phase noise of the LO source inside the test set 2 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties Connector repeatability is the random variation encountered when connecting a pair of RF connectors Variations in both reflection and transmission can be observed The listing below shows the abbreviations used for random errors in the error models and uncertainty equations a Rnt raw noise on trace rms a Rnf raw noise on floor rms port 1 connector reflection repeatability error a Crtl port 1 connector transmission repeatability error Crr2 port 2 connector reflection repeatability error a Crt2 port 2 connector transmission repeatability error Sources of Drift Errors Drift has two categories frequency drift of the signal source and instru
242. ion on connection techniques and on cleaning and gaging connectors a Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor subtle performance problems Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter if a blatant failure or gross measurement error is evident a Itis often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice using two distinct measurement calibrations to establish the degree of repeatability If the results do not seem repeatable check all connectors and cables 11 2 Error Terms Measurement Calibration Procedure 1 Refer to the Measurement Calibration section in Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests and perform the full 2 port calibration with the following modifications 2 For the reflection measurements short open loads connect the calibration device directly to the test port instead of to a reference test port Use the female devices for port 1 Adapt the male devices for port 2 3 For the reflection measurements use a cable configuration a single cable or cable pair that is consistent with the normal use of the system 4 For the isolation measurement select from the following two options a If you will be measuring devices with a dynamic range less than 90 dB press a If you will be measuring devices with a dynamic range greater than 90 dB follow these steps a Leave the cables connected and connect impedance matched loads to the test ports or reference test ports
243. ired Equipment and Tools HP 8719D 20D Only Calibration Iib 2 25 sath HP 85052B D RE Cable HP 86131C D Required Equipment and Tools HP 8722D Only Calibration 0 42 HP 85056B D Cable tesa ame Adela eit tam ea Ced ate eats HP85133C D Note Other calibration kits may be used if you are working in a different connector type Analyzer warm up time 1 hour 1 To preset the analyzer press 2 To enter the values for the first frequency segment a For analyzers without new CPU and with firmware upgrade 6 xx and below press b For analyzers with new CPU and with firmware upgrade 7 xx and greater press 2 44 Syst enVerification and Performance e t s FROM TABLE FROM TABLE 3 Repeat the previous procedure beginning with the remaining frequency segments of your analyzer Refer to Table 2 5 Note If your analyzer has the new faster CPU Firmware Revision 7 xx or greater refer to Table 2 6 Table 2 5 Frequency Segment Values 5 HP 8719D 5 HP 8720D 22D 6 HP 8722D System Verification and 246 Performances c s Table 2 6 Frequency Segment Values for HP 8722D with new CPU and firmware 7 xx and above 8722D without new CPU and firmware 6 14 and below I lo x1 for Option 007 5 dBm 6 Connect a thru RF cable between ports 1 and 2 7 To s
244. ith the voltage generated from the A20 backlight inverter It receives the following signals from the 19 GSP m digital TTL horizontal sync diital TTL vertical sync blanking data clock digital TTL red video digital TTL green video m digital TTL blue video A19 GSP The A19 graphics system processor provides an interface between the A7 CPU and the A18 display The CPU A7 converts the formatted data to GSP commands and writes it to the GSP The GSP processes the data to obtain the necessary video signals and sends the signals to the A18 display It also produces VGA compatible RGB output signals which are sent to the A22 GSP interface and then routed to the A16 rear panel The assembly receives one power supply voltage from the A22 GSP interface 5VCPU which is used for processing and and supplying power to the A20 backlight inverter and the A18 display 12 10 Theory of Operation A20 Inverter The A20 backlight inverter assembly supplies the ac voltage for the backlight tube in the A18 display assembly This assembly takes the 5 16Vdc from the A mother board and converts it to approximately 380 Vac with 5 ma of current at 40 kHz There are two control lines a Digital ON OFF Analog Brightness 100 intensity is 0 V o 50 intensity is 4 5 V 16 Rear Panel The A16 rear panel includes the following interfaces TEST SET 1 0 INTERCONNECT This provides control signals and power to operate duplexer tes
245. ive manual 4 8 Start Troubleshooting Here 4 Press START 1 MZ SAVE RECALL SAVE RECALL If the resultant trace starts at 1 MHz HP IB is functional in the analyzer Continue with Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers or the Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section in this chapter Then press PRESET a If the resultant trace does not start at 1 MHz suspect the HP IB function of the analyzer refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Connect any other system peripherals but not a controller to the analyzer one at a time and check their functionality Any problems observed are in the peripherals cables or are address problems see above Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers Passing the preceding checks indicates that the analyzer s peripheral functions are normal Therefore if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an external controller check the following The HP IB interface hardware is incorrectly installed or not operational See HP IB Requirements in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide The programming syntax is incorrect Refer to the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer Programmer s Guide If the analyzer appears to be operating unexpectedly but has not completely failed go to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Start Troublesho
246. k for display 6 14 backup EEPROM disk 3 36 bad cables 9 1 Band Related Problems 7 19 BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED 10 41 BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK 10 41 Blanking Adj 10 18 Blanking Adjustment 3 33 block diagram digital control group 6 3 power supply 5 23 power supply functional group 5 4 Broadband Phase Lock Problems 7 6 Broadband Power Problems 7 23 bus analog 10 26 Cable Connector Repeatability 2 12 cable inspection 6 24 cables bottom view 13 16 front view 13 22 part numbers 13 13 26 rear view 13 26 top view 13 18 Cables Insertion Loss of 2 10 Cables Magnitude and Phase Stability of 2 11 Cables Return Loss of 2 8 Cable Substitution 2 18 cable test 9 4 Cal Coef 1 12 10 16 CAL FACTOR SENSOR A 10 8 CAL FACTOR SENSOR B 10 8 CALIBRATION ABORTED 10 42 calibration coefficients 1 1 1 calibration kit device verification 9 3 Calibration Kit Substitution 2 19 calibration procedure 1 1 3 CALIBRATION REQUIRED 10 42 Cal Kit Def 10 17 Index 3 care of connectors 1 4 CC procedures ADC offset test 48 3 14 analog bus test 44 3 12 IF amplifier test 47 3 13 initialize EEPROMs test 53 3 35 option numbers test 50 3 17 retrieve correction constant data from EEPROM backup disk 3 38 serial number test 49 3 15 source pretune test 43 3 10 center conductor damage 9 2 chassis part numbers 13 40 41 check A15 Preregulator 5 10 A1 A2
247. l 6 22 HP IB systems 4 7 plotters or printers 4 8 receiver 8 1 self test 4 3 start 4 1 systems with controllers 4 9 systems with multiple peripherals 4 9 troubleshooting power supply 5 1 Tuning the YIG Oscillator 12 15 U uncorrected performance 1 1 6 USE SENSOR A B 10 8 Index 16 V variable fan circuit 12 6 VCO Tune Adjustment 3 43 Ver Dev 1 10 16 Ver Dev 2 10 16 Ver Dev 3 10 16 Ver Dev 4 10 16 Verification Device Measurements 2 25 Verification Kit 2 15 verification procedures post repair 3 3 14 40 Verification Results How to Interpret 2 32 verify calibration kit devices 9 3 voltage indications post regulator 12 6 voltages A15 preregulator check 5 10 A19 GSP 6 18 A8 5 14 fan 5 20 voltages for post regulator 5 6 VRAM bank 10 6 10 19 VRAM video 10 6 10 19 W walking one pattern 6 19 warranty explanation 4 2 WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK 10 54 Y YIG Oscillator Tuning 12 15
248. ler input will saturate the ADC and cause measurement errors switches in both of the A10 IF attenuators for checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits Small input signals will appear noisy and raise the apparent noise floor of the instrument allows you to store the correction constants that reside in non volatile memory EEPROM onto a disk Correction constants improve instrument performance by compensating for specific operating variations due to hardware limitations refer to the Adjustments chapter Having this information on disk is useful as a backup in case the constants are lost due to a CPU board failure Without a disk backup the correction constants can be regenerated manually although the procedures are more time consuming enables and disables the analog bus described below Use it with the analog in menu a description of this menu follows ANAB Analog Bus To access the analog bus press SERVICE Description of the Analog Bus The analog bus is a single multiplexed line that networks 23 nodes within the instrument It can be controlled from the front panel or through HP IB to make voltage and frequency measurements just like a voltmeter oscilloscope or frequency counter The next few paragraphs provide general information about the structure and operation of the analog bus See Analog Bus Nodes below for a description of each individual node Refer to the Overall Block Di
249. lowing steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8719D 8720D 8722D Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Warning These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Warning The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened Warning The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply Caution Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap 14 2 As
250. ltages If the fan is dead refer to the A8 post regulator block diagram Figure 5 7 at the end of this chapter The fan is driven by the 18 V and 18 V supplies coming from the 15 preregulator Neither of these supplies is fused The 18 V supply is regulated 8 in the fan drive block and remains constant at approximately 14 volts It connects to the Al7 motherboard via pin 32 of the A8P1 connector The 18 V supply is regulated on A8 but changes the voltage to the fan depending on airflow and temperature information Its voltage ranges from approximately 1 0 volts to 14 7 volts and connects to the 17 motherboard via pin 31 of the A8P1 connector Measure the voltages of these supplies while using an extender board to allow access to the PC board connector A8P1 Short A8TP3 to Ground If there is no voltage at A8P1 pins 31 and 32 switch off the analyzer Remove 8 from its motherboard connector or extender board but keep the cable A15W1 connected to A8 See Figure 5 5 Connect a jumper wire between ASTP3 and chassis ground Switch on the analyzer If all the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 light except 5VD replace the fan If other green LEDs on 8 do not light refer to If the Green LEDs of the 8 are not All ON earlier in this procedure 5 20 Power Supply Troubleshooting Intermittent Problems PRESET tates that appear spontaneously without pressing PRESET RESE CTORY typically sig
251. lues Also the test will not alter the serial number and correction constants for Option 007 or 010 54 Blanking Adj This test allows adjustment of the output power level during retrace 10 16 Service Kay Menus and Error Messages Display Tests These tests do not return a PASS FAIL condition All six amber front panel LEDs will turn off if the test passes The display will be blank press to exit the test If any of the six LEDs remain on the test has failed 55 Disp cpu corn Checks to confirm that the CPU can communicate with the 19 GSP board The CPU writes all zeros all ones and then a walking one pattern to the GSP and reads them back If the test fails the CPU repeats the walking 1 pattern until is pressed 56 DRAM cell Tests the DRAM on A19 by writing a test pattern to the DRAM and then verifying that it can be read back 57 Main VRAM Tests the VRAM by writing all zeros to one location in each bank and then writing all ones to one location in each bank F inally a walking one pattern is written to one location in each bank 58 VRAM bank Tests all the cells in each of the 4 VRAM banks 59 VRAM video Verifies that the GSP is able to successfully perform both write and read shift register transfers It also checks the video signals LHSYNC LVSYNC and LBLANK to verify that they are active and toggling 60 RGB outputs Confirms that the analog video signals are correct and it verifies their functionality 61 Inten DA
252. ly in the network analyzer 2 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Having Your Analyzer Serviced The analyzer has a one year on site warranty where available If the analyzer should fail any of the following checks call your local HP Sales and Service Office A customer engineer will be dispatched to service your analyzer on site If a customer engineer is not available in your area follow the steps below to send your analyzer back to HP for repair 1 Choose the nearest HP service center A table listing of Hewlett Packard Sales and Service offices is provided at the end of this guide 2 Include a detailed description of any failed test and any error message 3 Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable anti static packaging materials 4 2 Start Troubleshooting Here Step 1 Initial Observations Initiate the Analyzer Self Test 1 Disco
253. ly on the wrong harmonic comb tooth SWEEP TIME TOO FAST The fractional N and the digital IF circuits have lost synchronization The error messages listed above are usually indicative of a source failure or improper instrument configuration As a preliminary step ensure that all option jumper cables are properly connected To ensure that the R channel input is receiving at least 35 dBm power perfom the following steps 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 of the Source Pretune Correction Constants procedure located in Chapter 3 Make note of the DAC number that is displayed and then abort the procedure 3 Enter the DAC number determined from step 1 and press xi 4 16 Start Troubleshooting He r e 4 Disconnect the front panel R CHANNEL jumper 5 Zero and calibrate a power meter Measure the power at R CHANNEL OUT Check Source Output Power 1 Zero and calibrate the power meter 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 7 NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER T HP 8485A POWER SENSOR sb64d Figure 4 7 Equipment Setup for Source Power Check TP E on the analyzer to initialize the 3 Press PRESET instrument 4 For the HP 8719D 20D press MENU to check power at GHz 5 For the HP 8722D press MENU G GS Option 007 to check power at 1 GHz 05 Option 007 6 On the power meter set the calibration factor for the value on the power sensor that corr
254. mance of your analyzer One method meets ANSI NCSL 7540 1 1994 standards and the other method does not To determine which type of verification you wish to perform refer to the following descriptions and flow charts ANSUNCSL Z540 1 1994 verification consists of conducting the preliminary checks system verifkation and the performance tests without stopping to troubleshoot along the way Exceptions will only be made in case of catastrophic failure or cable connector damage In order to obtain data of how the analyzer was performing at the time of verification these tests must be done even if you are aware that the instrument will not pass Obtaining the data system verification printout and performance test record at this point is necessary so that customers will understand that their measurements may not have been accurate A technician must wait until after the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 verifkation is complete before troubleshooting and repairing any problems After troubleshooting the Post Repair Procedures matrix in Chapter 3 will direct the technician to perform the necessary adjustment procedures Then the technician will repeat the system verifkation and performance tests generating a new set of data Non ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 verification consists of conducting the preliminary checks system verification and performance tests but stopping at any point if the analyzer fails a test The technician will troubleshoot and repair th
255. memory where instrument states are stored To do this press RE PRESET 10 36 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Firmware Revision Softkey Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION to display the current firmware revision information The number and implementation date appear in the active entry area of the display as shown in 10 9 below The analyzer s serial number and installed options are also displayed Another way to display the firmware revision information is to cycle the line power CH1 44 log MAG 10 dB REF va HPg7eeh oF 27 1996 SER DPT IONS 7 018 GOLD face 7 i38E HP conan ACS Mev G3 300 36 amp 6 2 27 ES a L scopes ef dI LI START 050 000 002 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 Figure 10 10 Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 37 HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions All service routine keystrokes can be made through HP IB in one of the following approaches sending equivalent remote HP IB commands Mnemonics have been documented previously with the corresponding keystroke invoking the System Menu MENUSYST and using the analyzer mnemonic SOFTn where n represents the softkey number Softkeys are numbered 1 to 8 from top to bottom An HP IB overview is provided in the Compatible Pe
256. mentation drift Instrumentation drift affects the magnitude and phase of both reflection and transmission measurements The primary causes for instrumentation drift are the thermal expansion characteristics of the interconnecting cables within the test set and the conversion stability of the microwave frequency converter The list below shows the drift errors in the error models and uncertainty equations Dmxbx Dmsax drift magnitude a Dpxbx Dpsax drift phase a Dpfxbx Dpfsax drift phase f Sources of Additional Measurement Errors Two additional categories of measurement errors are connection techniques and contact surfaces The connection techniques category includes torque limits flush setting of sliding load center conductors and handling procedures for beadless airlines The contact surfaces category includes cleaning procedures scratches worn plating and rough seating These types of errors are not accounted for in the uncertainty analysis Determining System Measurement Uncertainties 3 Measurement Uncertainty Equations Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error terms The precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase relationship to the actual test device response When the phase of an error response is not known phase is assumed to be worst case 180 to 180 Random errors such as noise and connector repeatability are gene
257. mperature must be held to 1 C 2 Open the calibration and verification kits and place all the devices on top of the foam so they will reach room temperature TEMPERATURE OF TEE DEVICES IS IMPORTANT because device dimensions electrical characteristics change with temperature 3 Switch on the power to the instrument Note To achieve the maximum system stability allow the instrument to warm up for at least 1 hour SystomVerificationand 2 5 Performance Tests Check the Analyzer Internal Tests This test is recommended to be done before the performance tests but is not required To run the analyzer internal tests press These quick automated internal checks may save time by indicating an instrument fault before time is invested doing performance tests Internal tests are described in the Service Key Menus and Error Messages chapter of this manual Run the Operation Check 1 Connect a short to port 1 1 To run the first part of the operation check press the following keys to check the other attenuator setting check has failed Pres attenuator settings If the message FAIL appears on the analyzer display the analyzer failed the first part of the operation check If message DONE appears on the analyzer display the analyzer passed the first part of the check 3 Connect the short to port 2 4 To run the second part of the operation check press the following keys
258. n between the analyzer and the printer Ensure that the printer address recognized by the analyzer matches the HP IB address set on the printer itself 10 52 Service Key Menus and Error Messages SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY Error Number You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due 151 to insufficient memory Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save recall registers and pressing PRESET or by storing files to a disk SELF TEST n FAILED Service Error Internal test n has failed Several internal test routines are Number 112 executed at instrument preset The analyzer reports the first failure detected Refer to the internal tests and the self diagnose feature descriptions earlier in this chapter SOURCEPOWERTURNEDFF RESET UNDER POWER MENU Information You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the Message inputs and power has been automatically reduced The annotation P4 indicates that power trip has been activated When this occurs reset the power and then press MENU URC switch on the power This message follows error 57 58 59 SWEEPMODECHANGEDTOCW TIMES WEEP Error Number If you select external source auto or manual instrument mode 187 and you do not also select CW mode the analyzer is automatically switched to CW Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 53 SWEEP TIME TOO FAST Error Number The fractional N and
259. n sel gt Ley gt SOAR IF NOME ov 8 PRETUNE MAIN YIGI S 9 H PL REF 1MHz SWPERR PM 1 2221 12 p PRETUNE gt we D 1 REO LED AMBER LED l 2 e Lol L UNLOCK PULL DOWN e PL DNE ern aue due uice ar cil A53 ae MIXER xX gt 0 05 2 55 GHz SRC TUNE 1 gt SET DAC HIGH amp MIOBAND A12 REFERENCE REF 17 L gt J LOWBAND 3200 4005 READ gt O dan REN SET DAC LOWBAND 3750 4095 READ gt 5 dBm l VCXO w11 0 TUNE 10MHz SRC TUNE 1490 e MHz SET DAC LOWBAND d em EXT REF m D dd Aj 40MHz 4MHz TO A10 55 60007 READ v B dem 457 1 100kHz TO A13 7 soc lose 0 40MHz t u FOR HIGH MID amp LOWBAND lt gt 42 READS gt 5 dBm XQ co T 8042 J3 READS gt 19 dBm VCXO ADJ 15 VCO TUNE uM 39 984MHz W32 E SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATOR GREEN LED RED LED 1 l NORMAL ON NORMAL OF F LJ TEST SET INTERFACE POST REGULATOR L FAN POWER MICROCIRCUIT POWER INSTRUMENT POWER REGULATORS 4 9 GREEN LEDS L NORMAL ON STEADY STEP ATTENUATORS CONTROL AND TRANSFER SWITCH LOWER FT PANEL 7 BIAS BIAS to BIAS
260. nCables SMB m to SMB f HP P N 8120 5040 Extension Cables SMB f to BNC m HP P N 8120 5048 A Coax Cable BNC m to BNC m 500 HP 10503A BP IB Cables HP 10888A B C D BP Cable Type N connectors soohm 24 inch HP P N 8120 4781 RF Cable Set 3 5MM connectors HP 85181C D E F RF Cable Set 7mm connectors HP 85182D F BP Cable 8et Type N connectors HP85182D F RF Cable Set HP 8722D 24MM connectors HP 85188D E F Tool Kit No substitute 08722 60018 2 4mm Calibration Kit No substitute HP 8722D Only 2 4mm Verification Kit HP 8722D Only 5 5mm Calibration Kit 3 5mm Verification Kit 7 mm Calibration Kit 7 mm Verification Kit HP 8719D 20D Only Iype N Calibration Kit Iype N Verification Kit HP 8719D 20D Only Floppy Disks bol Kit 1 Verification can only be done up to 26 5 GHz on the HP 8722D while using the 3 5 mm Verification Kit Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 3 Principles of Microwave Connector Care Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate repeatable measurements Refer to the calibration kit documentation for connector care information Prior to making connections to the network analyzer carefully review the information about inspecting cleaning and gaging connectors Having good connector care and connection techniques extends the life of these devices In addition you obtain the most accurate measurements This type of information is typically locate
261. nal HP IB address 4 7 disk drive replacement 14 30 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 10 44 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR 10 44 DISK READ WRITE ERROR 10 45 Disp 2 Ex 10 17 Disp cpu corn 10 6 10 19 display digital control 12 10 power 12 7 display intensity 6 14 display tests 10 4 10 6 10 19 DIV FRAC N 10 29 DONE 10 8 DRAM cell 10 6 10 19 Index 5 DSP ALU 10 13 DSP Control 10 13 DSP Intrpt 10 13 DSP RAM 10 13 DSP Wr Rd 10 12 E EDIT 10 8 edit list menu 10 8 equipment display intensity correction constants adjustment 6 14 EEPROM backup disk procedure 3 36 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 49 frequency accuracy adjustment 3 45 IF amplifier correction constants adjustment 3 13 equipment for service 1 1 error BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED 10 41 BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK 10 41 CALIBRATION ABORTED 10 42 CALIBRATION REQUIRED 10 42 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED 10 43 CORRECTION TURNED OFF 10 43 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 10 43 DEADLOCK 10 43 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs 10 44 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 10 44 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR 10 44 DISK not on not connected wrong addrs 10 44 DISK READ WRITE ERROR 10 45 INITIALIZATION FAILED 10 46 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY PWR MTR CAL OFF 10 46 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS 10 46 NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 10 47 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS 10 47
262. nal a power supply or A7 CPU problem Since the CPU assembly is the easiest to substitute do so If the problem ceases replace the A7 If the problem continues replace the A15 preregulator assembly Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 21 5 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting BLOCK DIAGRAM 11 zi 1745 15 PREREGULATOR PHP 87190 200 220 SW TCH onoo 6 NEUTRAL LINE POWER GROUND m ie ar UDw ee cee ee ee sb6170d SHUTDOWN 81 EXCESSIVE CURRENT OVER VOLTAGE LIN UNDER VOLTAGE LINE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INSIDE PREREQULATOR CASTING gt 667 17 MOTHERBOARD GNODSENSE 5VOSENSE ne gt OU 44 GNODS NSE 5 5VDSENSE Rees E 5VD 3VCPU CT 10V BIAS Ca CONTROL CT CIRCUIT 59 C RECTIFIER abana RECTIFIER DTE C94 oe E T 1 9 220 220 RECTIFIER L C32 Ca LSHON v GREEN TEMPERATURE SENSE LED NORMALLY ON L GNALS CoB a oe 17 Y MOTHERBOARD rep SHUTDOWN NORMALLY OFF A15W1P2 1745 AT7XABUI LSHDN HEP 5 REGULATOR 3 Ee eb ee ee AB POST REGULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM A18 PRE REGULATOR ABJ2 FILTER NOT USED 18V 2 SP Oona 322 lt m a rm 15VSRC
263. nal processor to respond to interrupts from the A10 digital IF ADC DIF Control Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to the control latches on the A10 digital IF DIF Counter Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to the triple divider on the 10 CPU It tests the A7 CPU data buffers and A10 digital IF the 4 MHz clock from the A12 reference DSP Control Tests the ability of the A7 CPU digital signal processor to write to the control latches on the A10 digital IF Feedback is verified by the main processor It primarily tests the A10 digital IF but failures may be caused by the A7 CPU Fr Pan Wr Rd Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to the front panel processor It tests the A2 front panel interface and processor and A7 CPU data buffering and address decoding See also tests 23 and 24 below This runs only when selected Rear Panel Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to the rear panel control elements It tests the A16 rear panel and A7 CPU data buffering and address decoding It does not test the HP IB interface for that see the HP IB Programming Guide This runs only when selected or with ALL INTERNAL Post Reg Polls the status register of the A8 post regulator and flags these conditions heat sink too hot inadequate air flow or post regulated supply shutdown Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 13 16 17 18 19
264. nalyzer 9 On the spectrum aualyzer set the center frequency for 530 0066 MHz 10 On the network aualyzer press 11 Adjust API2 R43 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer 12 On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 530 00336 MHz 13 On the network analyzer press 14 Adjust API3 R45 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer 15 On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 530 003036 MHz AdjustmentsandCornctionConstants 3 61 16 On the network analyzer press 17 Adjust the API4 R47 for a null minimum amplitude the spectrum analyzer In Case of Difficulty 1 If this adjustment can not be performed satisfactorily repeat the entire procedure 2 If the analyzer repeatedly fails this adjustment replace the 18 board assembly 3 52 Adjustmentean CorrectionC onstants Start Troubleshooting Here The information in this chapter helps you Identify the portion of the analyzer that is at fault Locate the specific troubleshooting procedures to identify the assembly or peripheral at fault To identify the portion of the analyzer at fault follow these procedures Step 1 Initial Observations Step 2 Operator s Check Step 3 HP IB Systems Check Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Start Troubleshooting Here 4 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assemb
265. nd 2 9 Performance ests Insertion Loss of Cables 1 Replace the load with a short the ir ion loss of the cable over the entire specified band Marker and turn the front panel knob to switch off or the worst case measurement Rower holes gt 0 5 dB indicate a bad cable See Figure 2 4 for example insertion loss measurements of a good cable Refer to the cable manual to see if the cable you are measuring meets its insertion loss specification If it doesn t the cable should be either repaired or replaced In this Sj measurement the displayed trace results from energy being propagated down the cable and reflected back from the short Therefore the correct insertion loss is approxhnately the measured value divided by 2 one way path loss of the cable 544 log MAG 10 dB REF 1 2 259 dB 47 950 600 odo GHz START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 000 GHz Figure 2 4 Insertion Loss Measurements of Cables 2 10 SystemVeri fication and Performance ests M agnitude and Phase Stability of Cables 1 To measure magnitude and phase stability press the following keys on the analyzer 2 Connect a short at the end of the cable and then wait for the analyzer to average the measurement 64 times 3 Hold the cable in a straight line and press the following keys to normalize the displayed traces 4 Make a gradual
266. ne This procedure stores the analyzer serial number in the A7 CPU assembly EEPROMs Caution Perform this procedure ONLY if the A7 CPU assembly has been replaced 1 Make sure the A7 jumper switch is in the Alter position ALT 2 Record the ten character serial number that is on the analyzer rear panel identification label 3 Press the HP logo 4 Enter the serial number by rotating the front panel knob to position the arrow bel h charaeter of the instrument serial number and then pressing to enter each character Enter a total of ten characters tters and eight digits Press if you made a mistake to erase Note The serial number may also be entered using the optional external keyboard 5 Press when you have finished entering the title Double check that the correct serial number appears in the title area If you made a mistake at this point return to step 3 Caution You CANNOT correct mistakes after you perform step 6 unless you contact the factory for a clear serial number keyword Then you must perform the Options Correction Constants procedure and repeat this procedure Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 16 7 Observe the analyzer for the results of the routine If the analyzer displays the message Serial Cor DONE you have completed this procedure 8 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the jumper s
267. nector Transmission Repeatability Port 1 Magnitude Drift Due to Temperature Phase Drift Due to Temperature Phase Drift Due to Temperature and Frequency Cable Reflection Stability Crm Cable Transmission Stability Crm2 Connector Reflection Repeatability Port 2 Crr2 Connector Transmission Repeatability Port 2 Crt2 Cable Phase Frequency Port 1 Cable Phase Frequency Port 2 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties 1 Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet 2 of 3 Magnitude Combine Systematic Errors In the space provided enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors Then combine these errors to obtain the total sum of systematic errors Eg x 1 Eg X 44 x 84 En X 21 X S42 Ae X S41 Subtotal k m n 0 Combine Random Errors the space provided enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors Then combine these errors in an RSS fashion to obtain a total sum of the random errors S11 Em Cri 2x Cr X S41 Cory x 42 Cra x 821 x 13 Cmi 2 x Cg x S44 2 X 541 Crm x 44 Coma X S21 x 49 14 Jw x y 22 Subtotal 5 R Total Magnitude Errors Emllinear V 7 Emllog Log 13 Em S 1 20 Log 1 I Em Arcsin Ern S 1 2 x Con x f Arcsin 2x degrees Dost Doss xf eto M
268. ng three years of repair coverage This option does not include calibration Option W51 This option adds four years of on site repair to the product warranty providing flve years of repair coverage This option does not include calibration Option W32 This option provides three years of return to HP calibration service The calibration provided is traceable to national standards Option W52 This option provides five years of return to HP calibration service The calibration provided is traceable to national standards 1 8 ServiceE qui pment and AnalyzerOpti ons Option W34 This option provides three years of return to HP Standards Compliant Calibration This type of calibration meets the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 standard Option W54 This option provides five years of return to HP Standards Compliant Calibration This type of calibration meets the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 standard If support was not purchased along with the analyzer there are many repair and calibration options available from Hewlett Packard s support organization These options cover a range of on site services and agreements with varying response times as well as return to HP agreements and per incident pricing Contact your local Hewlett Packard customer engineer for details Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 9 System Verification and Performance Tests How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer There are two different ways to verify the perfor
269. nnect all devices and peripherals from the analyzer 2 Switch on the analyzer and press 3 Watch for the indications shown in Figure 41 or Figure 42 to determine if the analyzer is operating correctly MESSAGES APPEAR IN SEQUENCE INITIALIZING INSTRUMENT PLEASE WAIT SELF TEST PASSED ILLUMINATES DURING AND AFTER PRES 0000 0000 PARAMETERS APPEAR AFTER PRESET ILLUMINATES ILLUMINATES 24 SECONDS AFTER PRESET DURING PRESET e cn 511 log 1048 REF OdB START 0 05 GHz STOP 13 5 GHz HP8719D START 0 05 GHz STOP 20 0 GHz HP8720D START 0 05 GHz STOP 40 0 GHz HP8722D sb626d Figure 4 1 Preset Sequence for Firmware Revisions 6 xx and below Start TroubleshootingHere 4 3 MESSAGES APPEAR SEOUENCE INITIALIZING INSTRUMENT PLEASE WAIT ILLUMINATES DURING AND T SELF TEST PASSED AFTER PRESE ILLUMINATES 4 SECONDS DURING PRESET PARAMETERS APPEAR AFTER PRESET 1 541 log MAG 10dB REF 098 START 0 05 GHz STOP 13 5 GHz HP8719D START 0 05 GHz STOP 20 0 GHz HP8720D START 0 05 GHz STOP 40 0 GHz HP8722D sb6167d Figure 4 2 Preset Sequence for Firmware Revisions 7 xx and above m If the self test failed refer to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation 44 Starilroubleshootinglere Step 2 Operator s Check Description The operator s check consists of two softkey initiated tests Op Ck Port 1 and Op Ck Port 2
270. nt panel LEDs will stay on Continue with the next check Inspect Ribbon Cable Repeat Display Test 55 Inspect the W20 A7 A19 ribbon cable for a loose connection Repeat Run Display Test 55 If the analyzer fails the test a walking one pattern will be continuously transferred from the CPU through the cable to the GSF Immediately go to the next check Perform W alking O ne Pattern Use an oscilloscope probe to verify that a walking one pattern is transferring from the A7 CPU The walking one pattern similar to the one shown in Figure 6 11 and is found on pins 3 through 10 and 13 through 20 See Figure 6 10 a If the signal is present at the A7 connector of the ribbon cable verify that it is present at the other end of the cable a If the signal is still not present replace the cable Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 19 wALI IG 1 Figure 6 11 A7 CPU Walking One Pattern 6 20 Digital Control Troubleshooting Run Display Tests 59 76 1 Press m softkey 1 DISPLAY TEST NU softkey 8 TESTS softkey 7 x1 2 Press EXECUTE TEST softkey 1 The display and the front panel LEDs will flash once If the analyzer passes the test the message PASS is displayed 3 Press PRESET Y and perform display tests 59 through 76 substitute the next test number where was used Watch for the analyzer display and front panel
271. nternal tests 10 4 10 9 INTERNAL TESTS 10 5 Interpreting the Verification Results 2 32 inverter digital control 12 11 invoking tests remotely 10 38 Isolate the Fault in the RF Path 9 4 isolation crosstalk EXF and EXR 11 12 J jumper position 10 10 jumper switch position adjustment 3 8 K key codes 6 22 key failure identification 6 22 keys in service menu 10 1 L LIMITS NORM SPCL 10 7 line fuse check 5 8 line power module theory of operation 12 5 line voltage check 5 8 load device verification 9 3 load Match ELF and ELR 11 13 location diagnostic LEDs for A15 5 5 post regulator test points 5 6 power supply cable 5 9 LOSS SENSR LISTS 10 7 M Magnitude and Phase Stability of Cables 2 11 main ADC 10 27 Main DRAM 10 10 10 12 MAIN PWR DAC 10 24 Main VRAM 10 6 10 19 major assemblies bottom view 13 10 part numbers 13 6 10 rebuilt exchange 13 3 top view 13 6 measurement calibration coefficients 11 1 Measurement Calibration Procedure 11 3 Measurement Traceability 2 16 Measurement Uncertainty 2 16 memory INSUFFICIENT MEMORY PWR MTR CAL OFF 10 46 menu analog in 10 28 edit list 10 8 peek poke 10 36 service keys 10 22 service modes 10 25 test options 10 7 tests 10 4 menus for service 10 1 message BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED 10 41 BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK 10 41 CALIBRATION ABORTED 10 42 CALIBRATION REQUIRED 10 42 CORRECTION
272. ny Ireland Israel tel 0825 010 700 alt 33 0 1 6453 5623 fax 0825 010 701 tel 01805 24 6333 alt 01805 24 6330 fax 01805 24 6336 tel 353 0 1 890 924 204 alt 353 0 1 890 924 206 fax 353 0 1 890 924 024 tel 4972 3 9288 500 fax 4972 3 9288 501 Italy tel 39 0 2 9260 8484 fax 39 0 2 9544 1175 Luxemburg tel 32 0 2 404 9340 alt 32 0 2 404 9000 fax 32 0 2 404 9395 Netherlands tel 31 0 20 547 2111 alt 31 0 20 547 2000 fax 31 0 20 547 2190 Russia tel 7 095 797 3963 alt 7 095 797 3900 fax 7 095 797 3901 Spain tel 34 91 631 3300 alt 34 91 631 3000 fax 34 91 631 3301 Sweden tel 0200 88 22 55 alt 46 0 8 5064 8686 fax 020 120 2266 Switzerland French tel 0800 80 5353 opt 2 alt 33 0 1 6453 5623 fax 41 0 22 567 5313 Switzerland German tel 0800 80 5353 opt 1 alt 49 0 7031 464 6333 fax 41 0 1 272 7373 Switzerland Italian tel 0800 80 5353 opt 3 alt 39 0 2 9260 8484 fax 41 0 22 567 5314 United Kingdom tel 44 0 7004 666666 alt 44 0 7004 123123 fax 44 0 7004 444555 tel primary telephone number alt alternate telephone number fax FAX number in country number 11 16 04 Service Guide HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer HEWLETT PACKARD Printed in U
273. ocedure you must perform the previous procedure Output Power Adjustment This procedure is a continuation of the Output Power Adjustments procedure Preparatory Steps m Press Scale Ref 5 If you haven t already done so perform the Output Power Adjustment procedure Connect a cable between port 1 and port 2 Press select the PWRCAL and press To switch off the power meter calibration press and enter the power value listed as P3 in Table 3 5 and then press xi Table3 5 Power Linearity Adjustment Values Power Settings HP 8719D 20D HP 8719D 20D HP 8722D HP 8722D Option 007 Option 007 Pe sam oam 5am io on 1 1 Plonly applies to 20 GHz for HP 8722D enter the power value listed as P8 in Table 3 5 and then press xi The displayed trace should be centered on the reference 0 5 dB If the trace is not centered on the reference continue with the next step If the trace is centered on the reference continue with step 17 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 28 8 To switch on the power DAC press For the HP 8719D or 8720D press a For the HP 8722D press x1 9 Adjust the front_panel knob until the measurement trace is centered around the reference line Record the MAIN POWER DAC number To switch off the power DAC press F
274. ocedures consist of equipment initialization calibrating the analyzer with a calibration kit measuring a set of characterized devices and comparing the resultant measured data to the data and uncertainty limits supplied with the verification kit The device data provided with the verification kit has a traceable path to a national standard The difference between the supplied traceable data and the measured data must fall within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies for the system verification to pass The total measurement uncertainty limits for the system verification are the sum of the factory measurement uncertainties for the verification devices and the uncertainties associated with the system being verified You can determine what your system measurement uncertainty limits are by referring to Determining System Measurement Uncertainties located in Appendix A at the end of this manual When an HP 8719D 20D 22D system passes this test it does not ensure that the system meets all of the performance specifications However it does show that the system being verified measures the same devices with the same results as a factory system which has had all its specifications verified and its total measurement uncertainty has been minimized to the smallest extent possible Verification Kit A verification kit is used in the following procedure The kit consists of two attenuators 250 mismatch airline a 500 airline a data di
275. of 13 41 options available 1 6 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED 10 48 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED 10 48 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED 10 49 P P 10 51 panel key codes 6 22 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY 10 49 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO 10 49 patterns test 10 19 PEEK 10 36 PEEK POKE 10 36 PEEK POKE ADDRESS 10 36 peek poke menu 10 36 performance tests chapter 2 1 post repair 3 3 14 40 peripheral HP IB addresses 4 7 peripheral troubleshooting 4 9 PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 10 50 Phase Locked Sweep 12 15 phase lock error messages check 4 16 PHASE LOCK FAILURE 10 47 PHASE LOCK LOST 10 50 pin locations on A19 6 20 PLL AUTO ON OFF 10 24 PLL DIAG ON OFF 10 25 PLL PAUSE 10 25 plotter HP IB address 4 7 plotter or printer check 4 8 POKE 10 36 POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 10 50 Post Reg 10 13 post regulator air flow detector 12 6 display power 12 7 green LEDs 12 6 shutdown circuit 12 6 theory of operation 12 6 variable fan circuit 12 6 post regulator test point locations 5 6 post repair procedures 3 3 14 40 Power Adj 10 18 Power adjustments 3 2 1 POWER LOSS 10 7 10 8 power meter HP IB address 4 7 POWER METER INVALID 10 51 POWER METER NOT SETTLED 10 51 power output check 4 16 power supply theory of operation 12 4 power supply block diagram 5 23 power supply cable location 5 9 power supply check 4 11 power supply functional group block diagram 5 4
276. om EEPROM backup disk 3 38 serial number test 49 3 15 source pretune test 48 3 10 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED 10 43 CORRECTION TURNED OFF 10 43 counter 10 27 COUNTER OFF 10 28 CPU digital control 12 8 CPU operation check 6 8 CPU walking one pattern 6 19 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 10 43 D DAC NUM HIGH BAND 10 24 DAC NUM LOW BAND 10 24 DAC NUM MID BAND 10 24 DAC NUM BAND 10 23 damage to center conductors 9 2 DEADLOCK 10 43 DELETE 10 8 description of tests 10 9 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs 10 44 diagnose softkey 10 9 diagnostic error terms 11 1 diagnostic LEDs for A15 5 5 diagnostics internal 10 2 diagnostics of analyzer 4 3 diagnostic tests 6 25 diagram digital control group 6 3 diagram of power supply 5 23 DIF Control 10 13 DIF Counter 10 13 digital control A10 digital IF 12 8 16 rear panel 12 11 A18 display 12 10 A19 GSP 12 10 Al front panel 12 8 A20 inverter 12 11 A2 front panel processor 12 8 A7 CPU 12 8 digital signal processor 12 10 EEPROM 12 9 main CPU 12 9 main RAM 12 9 theory of operation 12 7 digital control block diagram 6 3 digital control check 4 12 digital control troubleshooting chapter 6 1 digital IF digital control 12 8 Directional Coupler Check 8 6 directivity EDF and EDR 11 9 disable shutdown circuitry 5 16 DISK not on not connected wrong addrs 10 44 disk drive check 4 8 disk drive exter
277. omewhere after the motherboard connections at A8 Continue to Remove the Assemblies Check 8 Fuses and Voltages Check the fuses along the top edge of 8 If any 8 fuse has burned out replace it If it burns out again when power is applied to the analyxer A8 or A15 is faulty Determine which assembly has failed as follows 1 Remove the A15W1 cable at A8 See Figure 5 5 2 Measure the voltages at A15W1P1 see Figure 5 6 with a voltmeter having a small probe 3 Compare the measured voltages with those in Table 5 2 If the voltages are within tolerance replace A8 If the voltages are not within tolerance replace A15 6 14 Power Supply Troubleshooting If the green LEDs are now on the 15 preregulator and A8 post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8 Continue to Remove the Assemblies Remove the Assemblies 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Install A8 Remove the jumper from A8TP2 AGND to chassis ground 3 Remove or disconnect all the assemblies listed below See Figure 5 5 Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting an assembly A10 digital IF All phase loch 12 reference 18 fractional N analog A14 fractional N digital A22 Dispiay Interface disconnect A8P1 4 Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on 8 Q If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing it is not lik
278. on and Performance ests 3 To normalize the data trace press ZE X 20 4 Disconnect and then reconnect the cable to the test port Tighten the connection to the specified torque for the connector type Look at trace for spikes or modes 5 To re n lize the data trace of the reconnected cable press System Verificationand 2 13 Performance Tests Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least times to look for modes Modes appear when a harmonic of the source fundamental frequency is able to propagate through the cable or connector It is helpful to be able to plot the trace each thne to compare several connections If any mode appears each time the cable is connected and reconnected measurement integrity will be affected The cable connector and or cable should be repaired or replaced Refer to the example plot in Figure 2 6 Note The connector repeatability measurement should be done at the test port as well as at the end of the test port cable 1 844 M log MAG 20 dB REF 50 dB Avg 128 START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 GHz Figure 2 6 Connector Repeatability Example 2 14 System Verification and Performance est s System Verification This system verification consists of four separate procedures 1 Equipment Initialization 2 Measurement Calibration 3 Verification Device Measurement 4 Interpreting the Verification Results The pr
279. onal coupler A60 bias tee 58 A55 YIG1 A63 directional coupler S1 HP 8722D Only 54 YIG2 8722D Only 74 switch splitter Option 400 Only To also troubleshoot port 2 problems press MEAs Ri ALC Signal Separation Check 1 Press MENU GH FREQ 3 2 Choose which port to begin troubleshooting by pressing and power meter to measure 4 For the HP 8719D 20D If you measure at least 5 dBm 10 dBm Option 007 at the port replace the A59 source interface board assembly If you measure less than 5 dBm 10 dBm Option 007 at the port press and and measure power at the other port If you measure less than 5 dBm 10 dBm Option 007 at the other port continue with A69 Step Attenuator Check next If you measure at least 5 dBm 10 dBm Option 007 at the other port either the directional coupler or the bias tee or the transfer switch S4 is faulty The power loss through each of these components should be negligible Source Troubleshooting 7 23 5 For the HP 8722D If you measure at least 8 dBm 3 dBm Option 007 at the port replace the A59 source interface board assembly a If you measure less than 8 dBm 3 dBm Option 007 at the port press and Refl REV 522 B R or Refl FWD 511 and measure power at the other port If you measure less than 8 dBm 3 dBm Option 007 at the other port continue with A69 Step Attenuator Check next
280. onstants test 50 3 17 serial number correction constants test 49 3 15 source pretune correction constants test 43 3 10 adjustments analyzer 3 1 adjustment tests 10 4 Adjustment Tests 10 17 ADJUSTMENT TESTS 10 6 air flow detector 12 6 ALC 12 18 ALC ON OFF 10 24 ALC Signal Separation Check 7 23 ALL INT 10 9 ALT and NRM jumper switch position adjustment 3 8 ALTER and NORMAL jumper switch position adjustment 3 8 amplifier IF adjustment 3 13 analog bus 10 26 ANALOG BUS 10 29 analog bus codes 10 39 analog bus correction constants adjustment 3 12 Analog Bus Nodes 10 30 ANALOG BUS ON OFF 10 26 analog in menu 10 28 analyzer adjustments 3 1 analyzer HP IB address 4 7 analyzer options available 1 6 analyzer verification 2 1 assemblies bottom view 13 10 part numbers 13 6 10 rebuilt exchange 13 3 top view 13 6 assembly replacement 14 1 A15 preregulator 14 26 A19 graphics processor 14 28 26 high stability frequency reference 14 36 A3 disk drive 14 30 A3 source 14 18 A62 test port l coupler 14 34 A68 test port 2 coupler 14 34 battery 14 24 A7 CPU 14 22 fan 14 38 covers 14 6 display 14 12 display lamp 14 12 front panel 14 8 front panel interface 14 10 keypad 14 10 line fuse 14 4 rear panel 14 14 rear panel interface 14 16 Automatic Leveling Control 12 18 AUX OUT ON OFF 10 28 available options 1 6 B background intensity chec
281. option 1 7 rack mount flange kit without handles option 1 7 rear panel assembly replacement 14 14 digital control 12 11 part numbers 13 30 32 Rear Panel 10 13 rear panel interface assembly replacement 14 16 rear panel LEDs check 4 11 rebuilt exchange assemblies 13 3 Receiver 4 20 Receiver Theory 12 22 receiver troubleshooting chapter 8 1 RECORD ON OFF 10 7 red LED on 15 power supply shutdown 12 5 Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustment 3 43 reflection Tracking ERF and ERR 11 11 removing A8 5 14 line fuse 5 8 repair procedure 4 1 REPEAT ON OFF 10 7 replaceable parts 13 1 abbreviations 13 44 battery 13 10 cables bottom 13 16 cables front 13 22 cables rear 13 26 cables top 18 18 chassis inside 13 41 chassis outside 13 40 documentation 13 41 ESD supplies 13 43 front panel inside 13 28 front panel outside 13 27 fuse preregulator 13 39 fuses post regulator 13 43 fuses rear panel 13 30 handles 13 43 hardware bottom 13 36 hardware front 13 38 hardware preregulator 13 39 hardware top 13 34 major assemblies bottom 13 10 major assemblies top 13 6 miscellaneous 13 41 18 48 ordering 13 3 rear panel 13 30 rear panel Option 1D5 13 32 rebuilt exchange assemblies 13 3 reference designations 13 44 service tools 13 41 touch up paint 13 43 upgrade kits 13 41 required tools 1 1 RESET MEMORY 10 36 return analyzer for repair 4 2 Return Loss of Cables
282. or further investigation and preventive maintenance Yet the system may still conform to specifications The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging connectors or inspecting cables Troubleshooting If a subtle failure or mild performance problem is suspected the magnitude of the error terms should be compared against values generated previously with the same instrument and calibration Kit This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem However if previously generated values are not available compare the current values to the typical values listed in Table 11 2 and shown graphically on the plots in this chapter If the magnitude exceeds its limit inspect the corresponding system component If the condition causes system verification to fall replace the component Consider the following while troubleshooting a All parts of the system including cables and calibration devices can contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms a Connectors must be clean gaged and within specification for error term analysis to be meaningful a Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement calibration minimizing cable instability errors a Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration The connector interface must be repeatable Refer to the Principles of Microwave Connector Care section in the Service Equipment and Analyzer Options chapter for informat
283. or by software on the assembly 12 8 Main CPU firmware revisions 6 xx and below The main CPU is a 16 bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the entire instrument through the instrument bus The main CPU receives external control information from the front panel or HP IB and performs processing and formatting operations on the raw data in the main RAM It controls the digital signal processor the front panel processor the display processor and the interconnect port interfaces In addition when the analyzer is in the system controller mode the main CPU controls peripheral devices through the peripheral port interfaces The main CPU has a dedicated EPROM that contains the operating system for instrument control Front panel settings are stored in CMOS RAM with a battery providing at least 5 years of backup storage when external power is off Main CPU firmware revisions 7 xx and above The main CPU is a 32 bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the entire instrument through the instrument bus The main CPU receives external control information from the front panel or HP IB and performs processing and formatting operations on the raw data in the main RAM It controls the digital signal processor the front panel processor the display processor and the interconnect port interfaces In addition when the analyzer is in the system controller mode the main CPU controls peripheral devices through the
284. or operator interaction of some kind to run Tests 30 and 60 are comprehensive front panel checks more complete than test 12 that checks the front panel keys and knob entry 21 22 23 24 25 Op Ck Port 1 Part of the Operator s Check procedure located in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here The procedure requires the external connection of a short to PORT 1 Op Ck Port 2 Same as 21 but tests PORT 2 Fr Pan Seq Tests the front panel knob entry and all Al front panel keys as well as the front panel microprocessor on the A2 assembly It prompts the user to rotate the front panel knob then press each key in an ordered sequence It continues to the next prompt only if the current prompt is correctly satisfied Fr Pan Diag Similar to 23 above but the user rotates the front panel knob or presses the keys in any order This test displays the command the instrument received ADC Hist Factory use only Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 15 System Verification Tests These tests apply mainly to system level error corrected verification and troubleshooting Tests 26 to 30 are associated with the system verification procedure documented in the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Tests 31 to 42 facilitate examining the calibration coefficient arrays error terms resulting from a measurement calibration refer to the Error Terms chapter for details 26 21 28 29 30 31
285. ormal replace A10 Faulty A or B Signal Path 1 If A is the bad signal path remove A6 the working R signal path 2nd converter and install A4 the suspect A signal path 2nd converter in its place 2 If B is the bad signal path substitute A6 with 5 3 Press trace of Figure 8 1 a If the trace appears normal the substitute 2nd converter is good Replace A10 a If the trace appears abnormal the substitute 2nd converter is faulty Replace A4 or A5 and compare the trace to the signal path R Receiver Troubleshooting 8 9 Accessories Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise Measurement failures can be divided into two categories a Failures which don t affect the normal functioning of the analyzer but render incorrect measurement data m Failures which impede the normal functioning of the analyzer or prohibit the use of a feature This chapter addresses the first category of failures which are usually caused by the following Operator errors a faulty calibration devices or connectors a bad cables or adapters m improper calibration techniques m RF cabling problems within the analyzer These failures are checked using the following procedures Inspect and Gage Connectors a Inspect the Error Terms Accessories Troubleshooting 9 1 Inspect and Gage Conne
286. ot on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The disk cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify power to 38 the disk drive and check the HP IB connection between the analyzer and the disk drive Ensure that the disk drive address recognized by the analyzer matches the HP IB address set on the disk drive itself 1044 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DISK READ WRITE ERROR Error Number There may be a problem with your disk Try a new floppy disk 189 If a new floppy disk does not eliminate the error suspect hardware problems EXT SOURCE NOT READY FOR TRIGGER Error Number There is a hardware problem with the HP 8625A external 191 source Verify the connections between the analyzer and the external source If the connections are correct refer to the source operating manual EXTSRC NOT ON CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR Error Number The analyzer is unable to communicate with the external source 162 Check the connections and the HP IB address on the source FILE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH INSTRUMENT Information You cannot recall user graphics that had been saved on an Message earlier model of analyzer with a monochrome display These files cannot be used with the HP 8719D 20D 22D ILLEGAL UNIT OR VOLUME NUMBER Error Number The disk unit or volume number set in the analyzer is not valid 46 Refer to the disk drive operating manual Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1045 INITIALIZATION FAILED Error Numbe
287. ot passing the Power Linearity Performance Test check for available power and modulator functionality by adjusting the power DAC from 0 to 4085 refer to the Output Power Adjustments procedure The power should vary from 20 dB to 4 dB from the maximum specified power m If the analyzer is operating correctly as indicated from the results of the previous step repeat the Output Power Adjustments procedure m If the analyzer is not operating correctly as indicated from the results of the previous step refer to Source Troubleshooting located later in this manual 332 Adjustments and Correction Constants Blanking Adjustment Test 54 Required Equipmentand Tools HP8719D 20D Only Power Meter DD HP 436A 437B 438A Power SEHE o IIa adeps s dte tera HP 8485A 3 5 mm f to3 5 mm f Adapter eene 85052 60012 part of 85052B D Required Equipment and Tools HP8722D Only Power Rte ERR DO PEE EL HP 486A 437B 438A Power tae Le IR un Sart oe Seb MP AU NUES NUS 8487A 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f Adapter HP 11900B part of 85056B D Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment sets the output power level during retrace If incorrectly adjusted the first data points in a sweep may not be stable 1 Remove the instrument top cover and source assembly cover 2 Press Prec
288. otingHem 4 8 Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Use the following procedures only if you have read the previous sections in this chapter and you think the problem is in the analyzer These are simple procedures to verify the five functional groups in sequence and determine which group is faulty The five functional groups are power supplies a digital control source receiver accessories Descriptions of these groups are provided in Chapter 12 of Operation The checks in the following pages must be performed in the order presented If one of the procedures fails it is an indication that the problem is in the functional group checked Go to the troubleshooting information for the indicated group to isolate the problem to the defective assembly Figure 4 3 illustrates the troubleshooting organization DISPLAY TEST PORT FRONT PANEL FREQUENCY DATA MEASUREMENT SELF TEST AND POWER ERRORS POWER DIGITAL SOURCE RECEIVER ACCESSORIES SUPPL I ES CONTROL ASSEMBLY LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING p sg645d Figure 4 3 Troubleshooting Organization 4 10 Start TroubleshootingHem Power Supply Check the Rear Panel LEDs Switch on the analyzer and look directly at the rear panel Notice the condition of the two LEDs on the A15 preregulator See Figure 4 4 Q The upper red LED should be off Q The lower green LED should be on RED LED GREEN LED LINE VOLTAGE NORMALLY OFF NORM
289. ove the four screws item 4 and item 5 from the source module bracket Remove the bracket Lift the source module out of the analyzer Remove three screws to detach the bottom source module cover Remove four screws that attach the source control board to the source module frame Place one hand on the top of the A9 board with your thumb near the A58 M A D S to push the board Place your other hand on the bottom side of the A9 with your thumb and index finger put through the drilled holes to pull the board Assembly Replacement and PostRepair Procedures 14 19 Source Assemblies Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note When replacing the 9 source control board push the board evenly on ah the microcircuit pins Check all the pin sockets from the back of the 9 board to ensure that all of the pins are inserted For HP 8722Ds you may need an eye glass to inspect the shallow pins of the 1 high band switch When replacing the source module into the analyzer push the cables aside before seating the module 14 20 Assembly Replacement and Pest Repair Procedures Source Assemblies 3 4 PLACES sbol34d Assembly Replacement
290. ove the upper rear standoffs and analyzer top cover 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 8 Adjustments and Correction Constants 346 NETWORK ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER TH sb65d Figure 8 8 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup Note Make sure that the frequency counter and network analyzer references are NOT connected 3 For Option 1D5 Instruments Only Remove the rear panel BNC to BNC jumper that is connected between the EXT REF and the 10 MHz Precision Reference as shown in Figure 3 10 4 Press For the 8719D press 13 5 For the HP 8720D press 25 For the HP 8722D press 26 and select the frequency 346 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 No adjustment is required when the frequency counter measurement results are within specification 135 kHz for HP 8719D 200kHz for HP 8720D 260kHz for HP 8722D Otherwise locate the Al2 assembly red extractors and adjust the VCXO ADJ see Figure 3 9 for a frequency measurement within specifications VCXO sb616d Figure 3 9 Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment Note To increase the accuracy of this adjustment the following steps are recommended 6 Replace the instrument covers and wait 10 to 16 minutes in order to allow the analyzer to reach its precise operating temperature 7 Recheck the CW frequency and adjust i
291. ower Adjustments Required Equipment and Tools HP 8719D 20D Only Power oo sci wack tobe kobe HP 436A 437B 438A REOR ed ete et HP 8485A 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm f Adapter 85052 60012 part of 85052B D Cable 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm 85131 60013 Required Equipment and Tools HP 8722D Only Power Met r HP 436A 437B 438A Power Sensof scs V Sh Te HP 8487A 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f HP11900B part of 85056B D Cable 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm 85133 60016 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes 1 Prepare the power meter for use Refer to Power Meter Measurement Calibration in Chapter 5 of your analyzer s User s Guide 2 Make sure the write protect jumper switch on the CPU board is in the Alter position ALT Set main power DAC to preset values 3 For each PEEK POKE location listed in Table 3 3 do the following Bid d b Enter the peek poke address from Table 3 3 and then press c Enter the poke value from Table 3 3 and then press x1 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 21 Table 3 3 Main Power DAC Peek Poke Location Table Poke Value Poke Va 8719 8720 Hardware Option 8722 Firmware Revisions Firmwar
292. pect the steps of the phase lock sequence pretune acquire and track by pausing at each step The steps are indicated on the display along with the channel or C2 and band number Bl through B13 This mode can be used with PLL PAUSE to halt the process at any step It can also be used with the analog bus counter is used only with PLL DIAG mode CONT indicates that it will continuously cycle through all steps of the phase lock sequence 1 USE holds it at any step of interest This mode is useful for troubleshooting phase locked loop problems accesses the service modes more menu listed below Service Modes More Menu To access this menu press is used for normal operating conditions and works in conjunction with IF GAIN ON and OFF The A10 assembly includes a switchable attenuator section and an amplifier that amplifies low level 4 KHz IF signals for A and B inputs only This mode allows the A10 IF section to automatically determine if the attenuator should be switched in or out The switch occurs when the A or B input signal is approximately 30 dBm locks out the A10 IF attenuator sections for checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits regardless of the amplitude of the A or B IF signal Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 25 Turning this ON switches out both the A and B attenuation circuits they cannot be switched independently Be aware that input signal levels above 30 dBm at the samp
293. performed return the jumper switch to the Normal position 6 Perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure located on page 3 34 In Case of Difficulty 1 If FAIL is displayed check that the RF cable is connected from Port 1 to Port 2 Then repeat this adjustment routine 2 If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 13 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 Analyzer warm up time 80 minutes These correction constants improve the dynamic accuracy by shifting small signals to the most linear part of the ADC quantizing curve 1 Make sure the A7 jumper switch is in the Alter position ALT 2 Press Preset TESI Note This routine takes about three minutes 3 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine If the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor DONE you have completed this procedure 4 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the jumper switch to the Normal position 5 Perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure located on page 3 34 In Case of Difficulty If the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor FAIL refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter 3 14 Adjustments and Correction Constants Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 Analyzer warm up time No
294. peripheral port interfaces The main CPU has a dedicated flash ROM that contains the operating system for instrument control Front panel settings are stored in SRAM with a battery providing at least 5 years of backup storage when external power is off Main RAM The main RAM random access memory is shared memory for the CPU and the digital signal processor It stores the raw data received from the digital signal processor while additional calculations are performed on it by the CPU The CPU reads the resulting formatted data from the main RAM and converts it to GSP commands It writes these commands to the GSP for output to the analyzer display EEPROM EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read only memory contains factory set correction constants unique to each instrument These constants correct for hardware variations to maintain the highest measurement accuracy Theory of Operation 12 9 The correction constants can be updated by executing the routines in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Digital Signal Processor The digital signal processor receives the digitized data from the A10 digital IF It computes discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and magnitude data from the 4 kHz IF signal The resulting raw data is written into the main RAM A18 Display The 18 display is an 8 4 inch LCD with associated drive circuitry It receives a 3 3 V power supply from the A19 GSP along w
295. placement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests All Signal Paths Look Abnormal For the receiver to operate properly the A10 digital IF and 2nd converter assemblies must receive signals from the A12 assembly Those signals are the 2nd LO and the 4 MHz signal 2nd LO Check Press SERVICE MENU TES BUS to check the 2nd LO signal with the analog bus counter If the counter reads 9 996 MHz continue with 4 MHz Check If the counter does not read 9 996 MHz perform the 12 VCO Tune Adjustment a If the adjustment is successful and the problem is cured perform the Frequency Accuracy Performance Test for verification a If the adjustment is unsuccessful or the problem persists replace the 12 assembly 8 2 Receiver Troubleshooting 4 MHz Check 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Remove the A10 board and install it onto the extender board 3 Use an oscilloscope to observe the 4 MHz signal at 10 2 pin 6 a If the 4 MHz sine wave signal is present at A10P2 pin 6 replace A10 m If the 4 MHz sine wave signal is not pres
296. position for altering the analyzer s correction constants Move the A7 jumper switch to the Normal position NRM after you have run correction constant adjustment routines This is the position for normal operating conditions 7 Reconnect the power line cord and switch on the instrument 3 8 Adjustments and Correction Constants EPROM LOCATIONS A7 ASSEMBLY NORMAL NRM ALTER ALT sb6141d Figure 3 1 A7 Jumper Positions Firmware revisions 6 xx and below A7 CPU Assembly pues A A A 8b6165d Figure 3 2 A7 Switch Positions Firmware revisions 7 xx and above Adjustmentsand Correction Constants 3 9 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 Required Equipment and Tools HP 8719D 20D Only Frequency counter ass duia va ian e UA eu Ma ee iene HP5350B RFcable durae iter dr Sede aie HP85131C D E F The frequency accuracy of the HP 8566B 63E spectrum analyzer is sufficient for this procedure Required Equipment and Tools HP 8722D Only Frequency dons suae dt HI5351B RFE cablei ert HP 85133C D E F The frequency accuracy of the HP 8566B 63E spectrum analyzer is sufficient for this procedure Analyzer warm up the 30 minutes This procedure generates pretune values for correct phase locked loop operation 1 Make sure the A7 jumper switch is in
297. power source divides the source signal into two parts One signal is routed directly to the A64 R sampler and the other is sent through the A69 step attenuator S4 transfer switch A60 and A61 bias tees A62 A63 directional couplers and to the test ports The M A D S microcircuit is controlled by the ALC circuitry on the source interface board The CPU provides fine control of the test port power for applications such as power sweep Theory of Operation 12 19 Option 400 A58 M A D and A74 Switch Splitter The M A D Modulator Amplifier Detector microcircuit accomplishes three functions The modulator controls the output power proportionally to the signal produced by the ALC circuit on the source interface board The amplifier can provide 30 dB of amplification for test port output power levels up to 5 dBm for HP 8719D 20D 10 dBm for HP 8722D The detector outputs a voltage that is proportional to the RF power out of the amplifier The voltage is used by the ALC circuit onthe source interface board The switch splitter A74 divides three inputs a path routed directly to A64 R1 sampler m a path routed directly to the A67 R2 sampler path switched to the appropriate output port through A70 71 step attenuators A60 61 bias tees and A62 68 directional couplers OPTION 400 SIGNAL SEPARATION 1462 DIRECTIONAL d lr d i coupLe i N72 26 ATG STEP 22 2 42 FAT4 SWITCH BRES ee w70 61 BIAS
298. press SERVI TIONS accesses softkeys that affect the way tests routines run or supply necessary additional data resumes the test from where it was stopped toggles the repeat function on and off When the function is ON the selected test will run 10 000 times unless you press any key to stop it The analyzer shows the current number of passes and fails toggles the record function on and off When the function is ON certain test results are sent to a printer via HP IB This is especially useful for correction constants The instrument must be in system controller mode or pass control mode to print refer to the Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results chapter in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide selects either NORMal or SPeCiaL tighter limits for the Operator s Check The SPCL limits are useful for a guard band accesses the following Edit List menu to allow modification of the external power loss data table Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 7 accesses the power loss sensor lists menu USE SENSOR A B selects the A or B power sensor calibration factor list for use in power meter calibration measurements CAL FACTOR i CALFSENA accesses the Edit List o allow modification of the calibration data table for power sensor A CAL DR SENSOR B CALFSENB accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration data table for power sensor
299. processed and formatted data is finally routed to the display and to the HP IB for remote operation 12 2 Theory of Operation In addition to the analyzer the system includes cables for interconnections and calibration standards for accuracy enhanced measurements Functional Groups of the Analyzer The operation of the analyzer is most logically described in five functional groups Each group consists of several major assemblies and performs a distinct function in the instrument Some assemblies are related to more than one group and in fact all the groups are to some extent interrelated and affect each other s performance Power Supply The power supply functional group provides power for the other assemblies in the instrument Digital Control The digital control group which includes the front and rear panels and the display as well as the CPU provides control to all assemblies in the network analyzer The graphics signal processor GSP provides an interface between the CPU and the display Source The source group supplies a phase locked and leveled microwave signal to the device under test Signal Separation The signal separation group performs the function of an S parameter test set dividing the source signal into a reference path and a test path and providing connections to the device under test Receiver The receiver group measures and processes the input signals for display The following pages describe the
300. pter 3 3 See the Source Troubleshooting chapter for related troubleshooting information 236 System Verification and Performance est s 2 Power Flatness Performance Test The source power level is tested at 201 frequencies across the frequency range of the analyzer Required Equipment and Tools HP 8719D 20D Only Power HP 437B HP 436A or HP 438A Power Sensore o cet ste erret Ia eT ut HP8485A Adapter 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm f HP P N 85052 60012 part of HP 85052B D Required Equipment and Tools HP 8722D Only Power Meter iso oir a Vera eoa eai ca Vea a HP 437B HP 436A or HP 438A Power Sensor oed Oscuro eM vara desta ueris picada A HP8487A Adapter 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f HP P N 11900B part of HP 85056B D Analyzer warm up time 1 hour 1 Zero and calibrate the power meter 2 Set the calibration factor on the power meter to the average value of the power sensor between 0 050 and 20 GHz 40 GHz for HP 8722D For example if the power sensor calibration factor is 100 at 0 050 GHz and 92 at 20 GHz 40 GHz for HP 8722D set the calibration factor to 96 3 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 18 NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER sb64d Figure 2 18 Power Test Setup System Verificationand 237 Performance Tests 4 On the analyzer press 1 5 Press Menu enter the power value listed in Table 2 3
301. pur avoidance and sideband 3 49 adjust frequency accuracy 3 45 adjust IF amplifier correction constants 3 13 adjustment the analyzer 3 1 adjust option numbers correction constants 3 17 adjust serial number correction constants 3 15 adjust source pretune correction constants 3 10 backup the EEPROM disk 3 36 check display intensity 6 14 clean connectors 1 4 identify the faulty functional group 4 10 initialize EEPROMs 3 35 performance test the analyzer 2 1 position the A7 Jumper Switch 3 8 repair the analyzer 4 1 retrieve correction constant data from EEPROM backup disk 3 38 troubleshoot 4 1 troubleshoot accessories 9 1 troubleshoot digital control group 6 1 troubleshoot receiver 8 1 verify analyzer operation 2 1 HP IB addresses 4 7 HP IB Failures 6 27 HP IB mnemonic for service 10 1 HP IB service mnemonic definitions 10 38 HP IB system check 4 7 I IF amplifier correction constants adjustment 8 18 IF GAIN AUTO 10 25 IF GAIN OFF 10 26 IF GAIN ON 10 25 IF Step Cor 10 17 improper calibration technique 9 1 Init EEPROM 10 18 INITIALIZATION FAILED 10 46 initialize EEPROMs 3 35 initial observations 4 3 Insertion Loss of Cables 2 10 inspect and gage connectors 9 2 inspect cables 6 24 inspect error terms 9 2 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY PWR MTR CAL OFF 10 46 Inten DAC 10 6 10 19 Intensity Cor 10 17 internal diagnostics 10 2 internal diagnostic tests 6 25 i
302. quency 0 9 GHz span 200 MHz You should see a signal near the center frequency If a signal is present the A52 pulse generator is probably faulty Source Troubleshooting 7 17 5 Connect the network analyzer s PORT 1 to the spectrum analyzer input 6 Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer center frequency 0 9 GHz span 200 MHz You should see a signal at approximately 910 MHz 7 Reconnect the spectrum analyzer to the A sampler 53 8 Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer start frequency 0 Hz stop frequency 200 MHz marker 10 MHz 9 Press DAC NUM HIGH BAND on the network analyzer and slowly turn the front panel knob to get a 10 MHz signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer 10 Reconnect the network analyzer s PORT 1 to spectrum analyzer input 11 Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer center frequency 4 69 GHz span 200 MHz You should see a signal at approximately 4 69 GHz a If the signals appeared for both the low band and high band you can assume that all the assemblies are working correctly with the exception of the All phase lock assembly a If the high band signal didn t appear there could be a faulty A68 Attenuator S1 switch HP 8722D Only S2 switch 53 switch or associated cabling a If the low band signal didn t appear there could be a faulty A57 fixed oscillator A53 mixer amp S1 switch HP 8722D Only S2 switch S3 switch or associated cabling a I
303. r 2 Unsolder and remove from the CPU board Warning Battery contains lithium The battery may explode if it is incorrectly replaced Do not incinerate or puncture this battery Either dispose of the discharged battery according to manufacturer s instructions or collect as small chemical waste Replacement 1 Make sure the new battery is inserted into the A7 board with the correct polarity 2 Solder the battery into place 3 Replace the A7 CPU board refer to A7 CPU Board Assembly in this chapter 14 24 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures A BTI Battery _ ATBT 506189 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 25 A 15 Preregulator Assembly Tools Required 10 TORX screwdriver 15 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Disconnect the wire bundles item 1 item 2 from the analyzer 3 Remove the preregulator A15 from the frame Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note a When reinstalling the preregulator A15 make sure the three grommets on the wiring bundles are seated
304. r The disk initialization failed probably because the disk is 47 damaged INSUFFICIENT MEMORY PWR MTR CAL OFF Error Number There is not enough memory space for the power meter 154 calibration array Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save recall registers or by reducing the number of points NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY PROGRESS Error Number The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a 69 calibration is already in progress Start a new calibration NO FAIL FOUND Service Error The self diagnose function of the instrument operates on an Number 114 internal test failure At this time no failure has been detected NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE Error Number The store operation will overflow the available disk space 44 Insert a new disk or purge files to create free disk space 1046 Service Key Menus and Error Messages NO FILE S FOUND ON DISK Error Number No files of the type created by an analyzer store operation were 45 found on the disk If you requested a specific file title that file was not found on the disk NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL Error Number The first IF signal was not detected during pretune Check the 5 front panel R channel jumper If there is no visible problem with the jumper refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter PHASE LOCK FAILURE Error Number The first IF signal was detected at pretune but phase lock
305. r the power value listed in row and add 10 dB to arrive at the calculated value Repeat steps 10 through 16 but enter the power value listed in row Ps and subtract 5 dB to arrive at the calculated value Repeat steps 10 through 16 but enter the power value listed in row P4 and subtract 10 dB to arrive at the calculated value For 8722D Only 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Press 20 Refer to Table 2 4 and enter the power value for Pret for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press x1 Wait for the analyzer to complete a full sweep Press Menu Enter the power value that is listed in the row of Table 2 4 for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press x1 Wait for the analyzer to complete a full sweep Press Marker Fetn Read the marker value from the display and add 5 dB Write the calculated value on the test record System Verification and 241 Performance ests 31 Press 8 32 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 5 dB Write the calculated value on the test record 33 Press 20 Gn 34 Press Stop 40 G n 35 Repeat steps 21 through 32 36 Press 50 97 Repeat steps 21 through 26 38 Enter the power value that is listed in the row of Table 2 4 for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press xi
306. rally combined in a root sum of the squares RSS manner Due to the complexity of the calculations the performance verification specifications software calculates the system measurement uncertainty The following equations are representative of the equations the performance verification specifications software uses to generate the system measurement uncertainty plots and tables Reflection Uncertainty Equations Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainy Erm An analysis of the error model in Figure 1 yields an equation for the reflection magnitude uncertainty The equation contains all of the first order terms and the significant second order terms The terms under the radical are random in character and are combined on an RSS basis The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis In all cases the error terms and the S parameters are treated as linear absolute magnitudes Reflection magnitude uncertainty forward direction Bim Semani x Random arily Systematic Efd Efr S11 S11 521 S12 Efl Abl S11 Random y Cr Nr Cr y Crm1 2CtmI S11 Cri S11 Orm2521512 Rr Grrl 20rt1S11 Orrl S112 2521512 Drift and Stability Dmlbl 511 A4 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties where Efnt effective noise on trace effective noise floor Crtl connector repeatability transmission Crrl connector repeatability
307. re problem it is likely that A15 is faulty Inspect the Motherboard If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of A15 switch off the analyzer and inspect the motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable defects Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts The 5VD 4 5 VCPU or 5VDSENSE lines may be bad Refer to the block diagram Figure 5 7 at the end of this chapter and troubleshoot these suspected power supply lines on the A17 motherboard Power Supply Troubleshooting 6 13 If the Green LEDs of the A8 are not All ON The green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator are normally on Flashing LEDs on 8 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on 8 post regulator is protecting power supplies from overcurrent conditions by repeatedly shutting them down This may be caused by supply loading on A8 or on any other assembly in the analyzer Remove 8 Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Remove 8 from its motherboard connector but keep the A15W1 cable connected to A8 3 Short A8TP2 AGND see Figure 5 3 to chassis ground with a clip lead 4 Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs 8 If any green LEDs other than 5VD are still off or flashing continue to Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages If all LEDs are now on steadily except for the 5VD LED the A15 preregulator and A8 post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading s
308. re the power supply voltages entering the 19 assembly coming from the 18 assembly Unplug the wire harness W14 from the back of the GSP interface Check pins 2 and 3 for 5 16 V See Figure 6 9 If the voltages are incorrect refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting a If the voltages are correct entering but incorrect leaving the GSP assembly replace the A19 GSP assembly GRHO 5 5v Vj E INTERFACE 4221 iT TII c j 4 T INTERFACE H 9 ie 4 3 1 TTI N e M 145d Figure 6 9 A19 GSP Voltages 6 18 Digital Control Troubleshooting Run Display Test 55 1 On the analyzer press PRESET PRES TESTS softkey 1 softkey 7 The analyzer will display 55 Disp cpu com ND 2 Press EX EST softkey 1 a If the analyzer passes the test the message TEST RESULT DISPLAYED ON LEDS IF FAILED will be displayed Press CONTINUE and the analyzer will display 55 DISP CPU COM PASS Press CTORY and go to Run Display Tests 59 76 a If the analyzer fails the test the display will appear blank and the fro
309. regard the trace a If the instrument phase locks and no error message is displayed the sampler under test is normal Go to 2nd Converter Check a If the instrument displays the PHASE LOCK CAL FAIL error message either the sampler or its control and bias voltages are faulty Continue with Sampler Voltage Check Sampler Voltage Check Note The BIAS CONTROL line is not used 1 Measure the SAMPLER CONTROL voltage green wire at the suspect sampler The voltage should be about 0 2 V when the sampler is on a If the sampler control voltage is wrong replace A51 the interface assembly Do NOT replace the sampler the problem is in the control signals a If the sampler control voltage is correct proceed to the next step 2 Check the 15 V and 15 V supply voltages a If the supply voltages are within 5 of nominal replace the sampler a If the supply voltages are incorrect refer to A51 Interface Power Supply at the end of the Source troubleshooting section 8 8 Receiver Troubleshooting 2nd Converter Check Note Repair signal path R before troubleshooting signal path A or B Faulty R Signal Path 1 If R is the bad signal path substitute A6 R 2nd converter with a 2nd converter from the working signal path 2 Press INPUT trace of Figure 8 1 a If the trace appears normal replace the faulty 2nd converter and compare the trace to the signal path If the trace appears abn
310. requency changes are correct continue with A14 Divide by N Circuit Check 14 Divide by N Circuit Check Note The A13 assembly should still be out of the instrument and the A14 assembly on an extender board 1 Jumper A14TP14 to the 5VU supply 2 Connect an oscilloscope to A14J3 labeled VCO N OUT 3 Press SYSTEM Source Troubleshooting 7 13 4 Vary the fractional N frequency from 120 MHz to 242 MHz If the period of the signal does not vary from 7 5 psec to 15 5 usec replace 14 If the period does vary as prescribed remove the jumper and reinsert A14 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signals Check 1 Place A13 on the extender board and reconnect all of the flexible cables the one to A14J1 is optional 2 The A14 assembly generates a TTL cycle start CST signal every 10 microseconds when the VCO is oscillating 3 Connect an oscilloscope to 14 CST Suggested vertical scale 2 0V div 4 Press MENU TRIGGER OLD to stop the sweep This will make triggering on these waveforms easier 5 If there is no signal replace A14 6 Use the CST signal as an external trigger for the oscilloscope and observe the signals listed in Figure 7 5 Since these TTL signals are generated by A14 to control 13 check them at A13 first The signals should look similar to the waveforms in Figure 7 5 7 14 Source Troubleshooting Table 7 3 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signal Locations Mnemonic
311. ripherals chapter in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide HP IB programming information is also provided in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer Programmer s Guide Invoking Tests Remotely Many tests require a response to the displayed prompts Since bit 1 of the Event Status Register B is set bit 1 service routine waiting any time a service routine prompts the user for an expected response you can send an appropriate response using one of the following techniques Read event status register to reset the bit a Enable bit 1 to interrupt ESNB D See Status Reporting in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer Programmer s Guide Respond to the prompt with a TESRn command see Tests Menu at the beginning of this chapter Symbol Conventions An optional operand D A numerical operand lt gt A necessary appendage An either or choice in appendages 10 38 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Analog Bus Codes ANAI D Measures and displays the analog input The preset state input to the analog bus is the rear panel AUX IN The other 22 nodes may be selected with 8 only if the ABUS is enabled ANABon OUTPCNTR Outputs the counter s frequency data OUTPERRO Reads any prompt message sent to the error queue by a service routine OUTPTESS Outputs the integer status of the test most recently executed Status codes are those listed under TST TST Executes the power on self test internal
312. rmance est s Equipment Initialization 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 8 Let the analyzer warm up for one hour NETWORK ANALYZER HP 1B OR SERIAL OR PARALLEL PRINTER MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR sb67d Figure 2 8 System Verification Test Setup 2 While the equipment is warming up review the Connector Care Quick Reference information in the Service Equipment and Anaiyzer Options chapter Good connections and clean undamaged connectors are critical for accurate measurement results 3 Insert the verification kit disk into the analyzer disk drive Press Preset rification d devices m Also press if graphs are also desired on test results print outs Note If you switch on the record function at this point you CANNOT switch it off later during the veriiication procedure 6 Position the paper in the printer so that printing starts at the top of the Page 1 Ifyou have difficulty with the printer 2 20 System Verificationa nd Performance Tests a Ifthe interface on your printer is HP IB verify that the printer address is set to 1 or change the setting in the analyzer to match the printer a Ifthe interface on your printer is serial or parallel be sure that you selected the printer port and the printer type correctly refer to the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide for more information on how to perform these tasks 8 Press used Pre
313. rocedure in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter CORRECTION TURNED OFF Error Number Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not 66 match the parameters for the calibration set therefore correction has been turned off The critical instrument state parameters are sweep type start frequency frequency span and number of points CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET Error Number Correction is not valid for your selected measurement 64 parameter Either change the measurement parameters or perform a new calibration DEADLOCK Error Number A fatal firmware error occurred before instrument preset 111 1 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1043 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs Error Number The device at the selected address cannot be accessed by the 119 analyzer Verify that the device is switched on and check the HP IB connection between the analyzer and the device Ensure that the device address recognized by the analyzer matches the HP IB address set on the device itself DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM Error Number The disk drive is not responding correctly If using an external 39 disk drive refer to the disk drive operating manual DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR Error Number The analyzer and the external disk drive aren t communicating 190 properly Check the HP IB connection and then try substituting another disk drive to isolate the problem instrument DISK n
314. ry Entry Softkey Softkey Entry Entry Active Channel Active Channel Entry Entry Softkey Stimulus Instrument State Instrument State Stimulus Stimulus Instrument state Instrument State Softkey Response Entry Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 23 Front Panel Key Codes 2 of 2 LED Pattern Key Front Panel Block CH1 CH2 R L 6 Response Response Entry Entry Entry Entry Stimulus Softkey Entry Instrument State Softkey Entry Entry Entry Response Response Entry Entry Inspect Cables Remove the front panel assembly and visually inspect the ribbon cable that connects the front panel to the motherboard Also inspect the interconnecting ribbon cable between Al and A2 Make sure the cables are properly connected Replace any bad cables 6 24 Digital Control Troubleshooting Test Using a Controller If a controller is available write a simple command to the analyzer If the analyzer successfully executes the command the problem is either the A2 front panel interface or W17 A2 to motherboard ribbon cable is faulty Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests The analyzer incorporates 20 internal diagnostic tests Most tests can be run as part of one or both major test sequences all internal test 0 and preset test 1 1 Press SYSTEM internal tests 2 Then press to see the results of the preset test If either sequence fails press the 1 00 keys to find the first occurrence of
315. s complete press Leave the load connected to the reference test port 1 cable 20 When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard connect the open that is supplied in the calibration kit to reference test port 2 22 When the MM finishes measuring the standard connect the short that is supplied in the calibration kit to reference test port 2 23 Press 24 When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard connect the 50 ohm termination to reference test port 2 25 Press 26 Press either 1 loads calibrati 27 When the measurement is complete press 1 Leave the load connected to the reference 30 Connect the two test port return cables together to form a thru configuration as shown in Figure 2 10 System Verification and 2 23 Performance Tests NETWORK ANALYZER pb626d 31 Press 3 33 P ress Save Recall Cm save the calibration into the analyzer internal memory Note Step 33 is crucial to the correct recall of the calibration during subsequent measurements The calibration MUST be stored in to be properly recalled 34 When the analyzer finishes saving the instrument state press 2 24 System Verification and Performance est s Verification D evice Measurements The following verification procedure is automated by the analyzer firmware For each verification device the analyzer reads a file from the verifi
316. s follows Pass TTL high Fail TTL low VGA OUTPUT This provides a video output of the analyzer display that is capable of running a PC VGA monitor Source Group Theory The source functional group produces a stable output signal by phase locking a YIG oscillator to a synthesized VCO voltage controlled oscillator The full frequency range of the source is generated in subsweeps by harmonic mixing The output is a swept or CW signal with a maximum leveled power of 5 dBm 10 dBm HP 8722D at the front panel measurement ports minimum 65 dBm Figure 12 3 illustrates the operation of the source functional group 12 12 Theory of Operation ro DRIVE A598 SOURCE INTERFACE SLOPE 12 A FEACT I ONAL H SYNTHESIZER ABA R SAMFLEF TG SIGNAL SEPARATOR T S uM FN REF F NV 100 kHz 120 TO 240 MHz Figure 12 3 Source Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram sbe62 ld The subsweep sequence takes place in the following steps The paragraphs below describe the details of this process and provide additional information on the assemblies in the source group 1 The source is pretuned low The source signal SOURCE OUT is fed to the R sampler 2 A signal VCO OUT is generated by the VCO in the fractional N synthesizer 3 A comb of harmonics 1st LO is produced in
317. s prohibited Before Applying Power Caution The front panel LINE switch disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply after the EMC filters and before other parts of the instrument Caution This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively Caution Make sure that the analyzer line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Caution If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral grounded side of the mains supply Servicing Warning No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers Safety and licensing 15 5 Warning These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Warning The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened Warning Adjustments described in this document may be performed with power supplied to the product while protective covers are removed Energy available at many points may if contacted result in personal injury Warning The power cord is connected to internal capacitors
318. sED LIMIT TESTS SROM Ap 085 COUPLER 7 7 MEAS 5 A17 Lc MEE ee eae i SAMPLER creer LED Qe Leo 9 GREEN LEDS 2 SWITCH COUPLER Le MICE PIQUE 4 W52 r 4 W63 NORMAL ON NORMAL 0F F NORMAL ON STEADY 7 SEAR BANEU Lg C NO pe X 012 anb ane a om ee A ak ae 1 463 UM TRANSFER SWITCH 1A um UN JUMPER C Cms D paracer D ype EROM wee T al l oe L INTERCONNECT L INTERCONNECT NTERCONNECT LINTERCONNECT w13 w52 UM 51 z 1 e A7 CPU a gt a 1 1 1 1 1 i aig GSP Pais DISPLAY Ags DIRECTIONAL 4 arent ee ur Re a as EE TO STEP 22 DISPLAY 4 pei 0 TFT A56 LOWER 0 70d8 SAMPLER B ATTENUATORS FROM A17 I INTERFACE CRYSTAL FRONT PANEL w67 L payee _ CONTROL TRANSFER SWITCH pub y VIDEO DISPLAY ae Re DISS PIAS FOR CPU DETAIL REFER TO CHAPTER 6 M ESTO xc L J DIGITAL CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING I L occ ur E Dom MEER J LP TERCONNEETS CAUTION eee 700 AC 20 INVER
319. sembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Procedures Described in this Chapter The following pages describe assembly replacement procedures for the HP 8719D 8720D 8722D assemblies listed below a Line Fuse a Covers Front Panel Assembly Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies a Display Lamp and Assembly a Rear Panel Assembly a Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly a Source Assemblies a A7 CPU Board Assembly Battery a 15 Preregulator Assembly 19 Graphics Processor Assembly a A3 Disk Drive Assembly a A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies a A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly a Bl Fan Assembly Assembly Replacement and Pest Repair Procedures 14 3 Line Fuse Tools Required small slot screwdriver Removal Warning For continued protection against fire hazard replace fuse only with same type and rating 3 A 250 V F The use of other fuses or materials is prohibited 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Use a small slot screwdriver to pry open the fuse holder 3 Replace the blown fuse with a 3 A 250 V F fuse HP part number 2110 0708 Replacement 1 Replace the fuse holder 144 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Line Fuse FUSE IH USE im SPARE FUSE INSERT SCREWDRIVER OPEN 446524 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 5 Covers Tools Required 10 TORX screwdriver
320. sk containing the System Werificationand 2 16 Performance e t s factory measured verification data uncertainty limits of an HP 8719D 20D 22D system and a printout of the factory uncertainties for the devices in the kit M easurement Uncertainty Measurement uncertainty is defined as the sum of the residual systematic repeatable and random non repeatable errors in the measurement system after accuracy enhancement The systematic errors are directivity source match load match reflection and transmission frequency tracking and isolation crosstalk Random errors include errors due to noise drift connector repeatability and test cable stability A complete description of system errors and how they affect measurements is provided under the What is Measurement Calibration section of Chapter 6 in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Analyzer User s Guide Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error terms The precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase relationship to the actual test device response When the phase of an error response is not known phase is assumed to be worst case 180 to 180 Random errors such as noise and connector repeatability are generally combined in a root sum of the squares RSS manner For more information on determining measurement uncertainties refer to Appendix A Determining System Measurement Uncertainties Measurement
321. ss System 10 The analyzer displays Sys Ver Init DONE when the initialization procedure is complete Caution and select the type of calibration kit another instrument state You must use that you loaded during the initialization procedure for the next step System Verificationand 2 21 Performances Tests Measurement Calibration 11 Press Cal 12 Connect the open that is supplied in the calibration kit to reference test port 1 NETWORK ANALYZER REFERENCE TEST pe REFERENCE TEST PORT 1 co Pad ndi ies PORT 2 OPEN SHORT LOAD OPEN SHORT LOAD sb68d Figure 2 9 Connections for M easurement Calibration Standards 13 Press 14 When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard connect the short that is supplied in the calibration kit to reference test port 1 15 Press 16 When the analyzer Wishes measuring the standard connect the 50 ohm termination that is supplied in the calibration kit to reference test port 1 Note For broadband measurements use either a broadband load or a combination of lowband or broadband and sliding loads Use the same loads used during normal calibrations 2 22 System Verification and Performances o t s 18 Press either you select loads calibration depending on which device is used If you must also measure a lowband load to complete the 19 When the measurement i
322. struments equipped with Option 007 8 6 Receiver Troubleshooting CH1 lag dem REF START 050 000 O00 GHz STOP 20 050 OGG 099 GH Figure 8 2 Directional Coupler Bypassed a If the trace is similar to Figure 8 2 the sampler is good Therefore the coupler is lossy and should be replaced Minor power variations are probably due to the flexible cable and are of no concern a If the trace is abnormally low the coupler is good and the sampler is at fault Troubleshoot the associated sampler by referring to Sampler Voltage Check A and B Sampler Check by Substitution 1 For the HP 8719D 20D set the output power to 10 dBm by pressing Menu 2 For the HP 8722D set the output power to 15 dBm by pressing 3 Connect a 3 5 mm f to 2 4 mm m adaptor to one end of the RF flexible cable that is supplied with the tool kit 4 Connect the RF flexible cable from the output of the A69 step attenuator 3 5 mm directly to the J2 RF INPUT 2 4 mm of the suspect sampler Receiver Troubleshooting 8 7 Note To disconnect the rigid cable of the A69 step attenuator it may be necessary to disconnect addition rigid cables and loosen the transer switch 5 Connect the IF cable from the output of the R sampler to the IF Output of the suspect sampler 6 Press Preset PRESET FACTORY and see whether the instrument phase locks Dis
323. surements It can be used to look at test points within the instrument on the CRT using the CRT as an oscilloscope Connect the test point of interest to the AUX INPUT BNC connector on the rear panel This feature can be useful if an oscilloscope is not available Also it can be used for testing voltage controlled devices by connecting the driving voltage of the DUT to the AUX IN connector You can look at the driving voltage on one display channel while displaying the DUT S parameter response on the other display channel With 0 equipment see on OFF under the Analog Bus Menu heading See HP IB Service Maemo Definitions for HP IB considerations 4 10 Gnd Ground reference famed ON can examine analog bus nodes with external 10 30 Service Key Menus and Error Messages This is used in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low and high resolution circuitry All Phase Lock 5 All Gnd Ground reference 6 All Gnd Ground reference 7 All Gnd Ground reference 8 Swp Err Phase error voltage This node measures the voltage at the output of the phase comparator on the All phase lock assembly This error voltage corresponds to the difference in frequency between the divided IF and the 1 MHz reference frequency from the 12 assembly Re 2 mU REF OU START
324. t s unprotected option s information in A7 CPU assembly EEPROMs 1 Make sure the A7 jumper switch is in the Alter position ALT 2 Record the installed options that are printed on the rear panel of the analyzer 3 Press Guten 4 Refer to Table 3 2 for the address of each unprotected hardware option Enter the address for the specific installed hardware option that needs to be enabled or disabled Follow the address entry by ES Pressing a Pressing x1 after an address entry enables the option 2 after an address entry disables the option Table 3 2 PEEK POKE Addresses for Unprotected Hardware Options Firmware Revisions Firmware Revisions 6 xx and Below 7 xx and Above 1619001529 ws eem meum 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all of the unprotected options that you want to enable Adjustmentsand Correction Constants 3 19 6 After you have entered all of the instrument s hardware options press the following keys 7 View the analyzer display for the listed options 8 When you have entered all of the hardware options return the A7 jumper switch to the Normal position NRM 9 Perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure located on page 3 34 In Case of Difficulty If any of the installed options are missing from the list return to step 2 and reenter the missing option s 3 20 Adjustments and Correction Constants Output P
325. t frequency of the fractional N synthesizer 60 MHz to 240 MHz Set the instrument to CW sweep mode and then set FRACN TUNE ON Change frequencies with the front panel keys or knob The output of the A14 assembly can be checked at A14J1 HI OUT in high band or A14J2 LO OUT in low band with an oscilloscope a frequency counter or a spectrum analyzer Signal jumps and changes in shape at 20 MHz and 30 MHz when tuning up in frequency and at 29 2 MHz and 15 MHz when tuning down are due to switching of the digital divider This mode can be used with the SRC TUNE mode as described in Source Troubleshooting chapter accesses the functions that allow you to adjust the source If the inst t di use the the PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED message keys below The relationship between DAC numbers and frequency varies from instrument to instrument The DAC numbers and frequencies below are guidelines only SM2D disables the source frequency tune modes Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 23 DAC NUM XXX BAND tests the pretune functions of the phase lock and source assemblies These keys allow entry of digital data directly into the DAC on the All phase lock assembly When in this mode a Instrument does not attempt to phase lock a Residual FM increases NUM LOW BAND SM2L allows you to enter numbers in the range of 3650 through 4095 to generate test port output frequencies from 050 GHz to 1 1 GHz AC NUM MID
326. t adapters EXT REF This allows for a frequency reference signal input that can phase lock the analyzer to an external frequency standard for increased frequency accuracy The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature when a signal is connected to this input When the signal is removed the analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference 10 MHZ PRECISION REFERENCE Option 1D5 This output is connected to the EXT REF described above to improve the frequency accuracy of the analyzer AUX INPUT This allows for a dc or ac voltage input from an external signal source such as a detector or function generator which you can then measure using the S parameter menu You can also use this connector as an analog output in service routines EXT AM This allows for an external analog signal input that is applied to the ALC circuitry of the analyzer s source This input analog signal amplitude modulates the RF output signal EXT TRIG This allows connection of an external negative going TTL compatible signal that will trigger a measurement sweep The trigger can be set to external through softkey functions Theory of Operation 12 11 TEST SEQ This outputs a TTL signal that can be programmed in a test sequence to be high or low or pulse 10 seconds high or low at the end of a sweep for a robotic part handler interface LIMIT TEST This outputs a TTL signal of the limit test results a
327. tart the measurement calibration press 8 Remove the thru and connect 50 ohm terminations to ports 1 and 2 2 46 Syst eWerification and Performancg est s 14 Read the mean value and standard deviation from the analyzer display 15 Repeat the previous two steps beginning with Marker Calculate the dynamic range value using the following equation 20 x log 8 x Standard Deviation Mean Value Write the calculated value on the Performance Test Record marker 1 and marker 2 at the start and stop of the remaining frequency ranges that are listed on the Performance Test Record HP 8722D without new CPU board and with revision 6 14 and below proceed as follows and repeat steps 6 through 15 to measure port 2 System Verification and 247 Performance ests If the Instrument Fails This Test 1 First suspect the connections the calibration standards and the cable Visually inspect all of the connectors and repeat the test 2 In case of repeat failure gage the connectors see Principles of Microwave Connector Care in Chapter 1 of this manual and substitute the calibration standards and the cable 3 Recheck the output power of the source 4 Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter for additional help 248 System Verificationa n d Performance est s Performance Test Record The complete system performanc
328. te The following descriptions of tests 3 and 4 apply to instruments with firmware revisions 7 xx and above SRAM RAM Verifies the A7 CPU SRAM long term memory with a non destructive write read pattern A destructive version that writes over stored data at power on can be enabled by changing the 4th switch position of the A7 CPU switch as shown in Figure 10 3 A7 CPU Assembly Lj E Normal Mode Destructive SRAM Rocker Slide Test Enabled sb6169d Figure 10 3 Switch Positions on the A7 CPU Main DRAM Verifies the A7 CPU main memory DRAM with a non destructive write read test pattern A destructive version of this test is run during power on For additional information see Internal Tests near the front of this section and the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter DSP Wr Rd Verifies the ability of the main processor and the DSP digital signal processor both on the A7 CPU assembly to 10 12 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 11 12 13 14 communicate with each other through DRAM This also verifies that programs can be loaded to the DSP and that most of the main RAM access circuits operate correctly DSP RAM Verifies the A7 CPU RAM associated with the digital signal processor by using a write read pattern DSP ALU Verifies the A7 CPU high speed math processing portions of the digital signal processor DSP Intrpt Tests the ability of the A7 CPU digital sig
329. tector 12 6 variable fan circuit 12 6 fan speeds 5 20 fan troubleshooting 5 20 fan voltages 5 20 faulty analyzer repair 4 2 faulty cables 9 1 faulty calibration devices or connectors 9 1 faulty group isolation 4 10 firmware revision softkey 10 37 Flowchart Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 2 Flowchart Source Troubleshooting 7 2 FM sideband and spur avoidance adjustment 3 49 FN Count 10 14 FRAC N 10 29 Frac N Cont 10 13 FRACN TUNE ON OFF 10 23 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 49 frequency accuracy adjustment 3 45 frequency counter 10 27 front panel assembly replacement 14 8 digital control 12 8 part numbers 13 27 28 front panel key codes 6 22 front panel processor digital control 12 8 front panel troubleshooting 6 22 Fr Pan Diag 10 15 Fr Pan Wr Rd 10 13 functional group fault location 4 10 Functional Groups of the Analyzer 12 8 fuse check 5 8 G green LED on A15 power supply shutdown 12 5 green LEDs on AS 12 6 Index 7 GSP digital control 12 10 H hardkeys 10 1 hardware bottom view 13 36 front view 13 38 part numbers 13 34 39 preregulator 13 39 top view 13 34 Hewlett Packard servicing 4 2 high stability frequency reference assembly replacement 14 36 part numbers 13 32 high stability frequency reference option 1 6 how to adjust ADC offset correction constants 3 14 adjust analog bus correction constants 3 12 adjust fractional N s
330. th the RF cabling S2 or S3 If no power is present refer to A51 Test Set Interface Power Supplies at the end of this section to check the bias voltages to YIG1 If the voltages are correct replace the YIG Check Open Loop Power HP 8722D Only 1 2 Use a power meter to measure power at R CHANNEL OUT port on the front panel Pr The power should be at least 32 dBm 27 dBm Option 007 7 8 Source Troubleshooting 3 Pres wa The power should be at least 32 dBm 27 dBm Option 007 The power should be at least 27 dBm 22 dBm Option 007 5 You may have to change the DAC number slightly to achieve a good power reading If power is correct proceed with Check A12 Reference 6 If the power level is not correct connect a power meter to the output of SI leading to the A58 5 and check the power of the YIG oscillator High band power should be greater than 3 dBm for DAC numbers from 2400 to 4095 a Mid band power should be greater than 5 dBm for DAC numbers from 3300 to 4095 a Low band power should be greater than 2 dBm for DAC numbers from 3700 to 4095 7 Low power in high or mid band indicates a problem with the associated YIG or switches Trace back along the signal path to find where the power is lost Activate the signal path under test by selecting the proper 8 If no power is present refer to A51 Test Set Interface Power Supplies at the end of this sec
331. that may remain live for 5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply Warning For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating 3 A 250 V F The use of other fuses or material is prohibited Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements This network analyzer complies with German FTZ 526 527 Radiated Emissions and Conducted Emission requirements 15 6 Safety and licensing Compliance with German Noise Requirements This is to declare that this instrument is in conformance with the German Regulation on Noise Declaration for Machines Laermangabe nach der Maschinenlaermrerordung 3 GSGV Deutschland Acoustic N oise Emission Geraeuschemission LpA lt 70 dB Lpa lt 70 dB Operator Position jam Arbeitsplatz Normal Operation normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 t 19 Safety and licensing 15 7 A Determining System Measurement Uncertainties In any measurement certain measurement errors associated with the system add uncertainty to the measured results This uncertainty defines how accurately a device under test DUT can be measured Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into two types raw and residual The raw error terms are the errors associated with the uncorrected system that are called systematic repeatable random non repeatable and drift errors The residual error terms are the errors that remain after a m
332. the Receiver Troubleshooting section Otherwise proceed to Accessories 1 For the HP 8719D 20D perform the Perie EDS a Press PRESET should show a relatively flat line at about 5 2 dB 10 dB Option 007 F1 il b Connect an open or short calibration standard to port 1 Press 2 to look at input A port 1 The trace should resemble Figure 49 below with a minimum of about 35 dB at 50 MHz and a value around 5 2 dB 10 dB Option 007 over the flat section c To check input B po port 2 then press B Et resemble Figure 4 9 below an open or short calibration standard to CH1 A lag MAG 10 dBm AEF O dBm START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 20 050 000 GHz Figure 4 9 Typical Trace 4 20 Start Troubleshooting Here 2 For the HP 8722D perform the following steps a Press PRESET The trace should show a relatively flat line at about 10 2 dB 5 dB Option 007 b Connect an open or short calibration standard to port 1 Pres to look at input A port 1 The trace should be similar to Figure 47 with the exception of having a minimum of about 50 dB at 50 MHz and a value around 10 2 dB 5 dB Option 007 over the flat section c To check input B port 2 an open or short calibration standard to port 2 then press drive port 2 Again the trace should have the same characteristics as described i in the preceding step
333. the Alter position ALT When P retune Adj isdisplayed pressi at the query to alter the correction constants NETWORK ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER sb65d Figure 8 8 Source Pretune Correction Constants Setup 3 10 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 When the prompt Set source to 2 345 GHz then continue appears use the front panel knob to adjus quency of the analyzer source to within 5 MHz of 2 345 GHz Press e when the frequency is set 4 For HP 8722D when the prompt Set source to 19 550 GHz then continue appears use the front panel knob to adjust the f analyzer source to within 5 MHz of 19 550 GHz Press frequency is set 5 When Pretune Adj DONE is displayed press 6 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the jumper switch to the Normal position 7 Perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure located on page 3 34 In Case of Difficulty If any error messages appear refer to Source Troubleshooting Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 11 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This procedure calibrates the analog bus by using three reference voltages ground 0 37 and 2 5 volts then stores the calibration data as correction constants in EEPROMs 1 Make sure the A7 jumper switch is in the Alter position ALT 2 Press Pret
334. the pulse generator 4 A synthesizer harmonic 1st LO and the source signal SOURCE OUT are mixed in the sampler A difference frequency 1st IF is generated 5 The 1st IF signal from the R sampler is fed back and compared to a reference A tune current is generated 6 The tune current is used to set the frequency of the source YIG oscillator 7 Phase lock is acquired and a synthesized subsweep is generated The source tracks the synthesizer Theory of Operation 12 13 Source Pretune The pretune DAC digital to analog converter in the All phase lock assembly sets the source YIG oscillator frequency to approximately 2 4 GHz This signal SOURCE OUT goes to the R sampler assembly A14 A13 Fractional N Synthesizer The A14 A13 fractional N assemblies comprise the synthesizer The source feedback circuit phase locks the YIG oscillator to the synthesizer output signal as explained below under Phase Lock Comparing Phase and Frequency The VCO in the Al4 fractional N digital assembly generates a swept or CW signal in the range of 60 to 240 MHz such that a harmonic is 10 MHz above the desired start frequency This is divided down and phase locked in the 18 assembly to a 100 kHz signal FN REF from the 12 reference A programmable divider is set to some number N such that the integer part of the expression FVCOM is equal to 100 KHz To achieve frequencies between integer multiples of the reference the divider is
335. ti on Constants 337 Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure Required Equipment and Tools EEPROM Backup Disk By using the current EEPROM backup disk you can download the correction constants data into the instrument EEPROMs 1 Insert the EEPROM Backup Disk into the HP 8753E disk drive 2 Make sure the A7 jumper switch is in the Alter position 3 Press Use the front panel knob to highlight the file N12345 where N12345 represents the file name of the EEPROM data for the analyzer On the factory shipped EEPROM backup disk the filename is FILE1 4 Press to download the correction constants data into the instrument EEPROMs 5 Perform Option Numbers Correction Constant Test 56 6 Press and verify that good data was transferred to EEPROM by performing a simple measurement 7 Move the A7 jumper switch back to its Normal position when you are done working with the instrument 3 38 Adjustmentsand Correction Constants Loading Firmware Required Equipment and Tools m Firmware disk for the HP 8719D 20D 22D Analyzer warmup T me None required The following procedures will load firmware for new or existing CPU boards in an HP 8719D 20D 22D network analyzer having firmware revision 7 xx or above Loading Firmware into an Existing CPU Use this procedure for upgrading firmware in an operational instrument whose CPU board has not been changed 1 Turn off the network analyzer 2 Insert th
336. tion to check the bias voltages to the YIGs If the voltages are correct replace the YIG Check A12 Reference l Press PRESET SYSTEM the 100 kHz signal from A12 2 The analyzer should display ANALOG BUS INPUT 14 100kHz cnt 100 MHz 3 Press 17 x1 to check the 1 MHz signal The analyzer should display 17 PL Ref cnt 1 000 MHz 4 If either counter reading is incorrect the A12 reference assembly is probably faulty and should be replaced However it is also possible that there is a faulty counter A14 fractional N digital or A10 digital IF assembly Source Troubleshooting 7 9 Check 14 Fractional N Checks With ABUS MENU SWEEP TYPE MENL and compare the fractional N tuning voltage to Hes HH mo Figure 7 3 Fractional N Tuning Voltage Waveform at Abus Node 21 EQ and set the instrument to the 2 Press N MENU CW FRE frequencies of column one in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 VCO Range Check Frequencies 50 MHz 119 988 to 120 012MHz 109 999 MHz 239 975 to 240 024 MHz m If the voltage waveform resembles Figure 7 3 but the counter values do not match Table 7 1 A14 or the pulse generator may be at fault If the voltage waveform and the counter values are bad continue with A14 VCO Exercise 7 10 Source Troubleshooting m If the instrument passes both che
337. tivity error Significant System Components The load used in the calibration is the most important component The test port connector the cable and the coupler also greatly affect the measured directivity error Affected M easurements The measurements most affected by directivity errors are measurements of low reflection devices highly reflective device measurements will appear normal CH1 MEM log MAG 10 dB REF 0 dB AEREA TARA Te TW START 0 050 000 000 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz sb61 47d Figure 11 1 Typical EDF EDR W ithout Cables Error Terms 11 9 Source Match ESF and ESR Description These are the forward and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port They are obtained by measuring the reflection S11 S22 of an open and then a short connected directly to the ports Source match is a measure of the match between the coupler and test set connector as well as the match between all components from the source to the output port Significant System Components The open and short calibration devices are important as are the coupler and test port connectors The power splitter bias tees step attenuator and transfer switch may also contribute to source match errors Affected M easurements The measurements most affected by source match errors are reflection and transmission measurements of highly reflective DUJ CH1 log MAG 10 dB REF 0 dB E
338. ts Power Level Test These tests are located in Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting t These checks are located in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here System Verification 1442 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Table 14 1 Related Service Procedures 4 of 4 Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants Ch 3 Ch 2 A62 A63 Directional System Verification Couplers A64 R1 Sampler Sampler Checkt System Verification Power Adjustment Power Level Test A64 R2 Sampler Sampler Check System Verification Option 400 Only Power Adjustment Power Level Test A65 A Sampler Sampler Checkt System Verification A66 B Sampler Sampler Checkt System Verification Operation Checkt A68 6 dB Attenuator S1Switch HP 8722D Only Operation Checkt 69 Step Operation Checkt Attenuator 52 58 Switches Operation Checkt S4 Transfer Operation Checkt Switch 1 These checks are located in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 1443 15 Safety and Licensing Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequ
339. ts This provides the instrument with mixer measurement capability It also provides a graphical setup that allows easy configuration of your mixer measurement 1 8 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Option 012 Direct Access Receiver Configuration This option provides front panel access to the A and B samplers This allows direct access to the sampler inputs for improved sensitivity in applications such as antenna tests or for the insertion of attenuators between the couplers and samplers to allow measurements of up to 1 Watt 30 dBm at the input of the test ports Direct access to the B sampler provides a test configuration for the HP 8722D that gives increased dynamic range in the forward direction Option 400 Four Sampler Test Set This option reconfigures the instrument s test set to ratio out the characteristics of the test port transfer switch and to include a second reference channel that allows full accuracy with a TRL measurement calibration Option 010 Time Domain This option allows the analyzer to display the time domain response of a network by computing the inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain response The analyzer shows the response of a test device as a function of time or distance Displaying the reflection coefficient of a network versus time determines the magnitude and location of each discontinuity Displaying the transmission coefficient of a network versus time determines the characteristics of
340. twork Analyzer User s Guide for information on how to use the function Set aside the short and open that are causing the p 1 Perform an 811 l port calibration using the good short and open Then press to view the devices in Smith chart format 2 Connect the good short to port 1 Press Scaie Ref E X turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the left side of the circle See Figure 9 2a left Replace the good short with the questionable short at port 1 The trace of the questionable short should appear very similar to the known good short 3 Connect the good open to port 1 Press L DEL turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the right side of the circle See Figure 9 2b right Replace the good open with the questionable open at port 1 The trace of the questionable open should appear very similar to the known good open Accessories Troubleshooting 8 5 CHI 1 ou FS 11 HLS Lu FS 11 P ba ee Se E METTRA EE 27 B or Cor Del ELECTFICAL DELAY Py 458 902 qu 2 7857 J d 1 7 ER Om i i 3 4 e St 2 i TUM ans VT 2 s ii gis d PT y i H 1 22 8 ae ee 7 START G50 000 MHz STOP 20 600 006 000 MHz 050 000 MHz
341. ude uncertainty with the test signal magnitude The worst case phase angle is computed This result is combined with the error terms related to phase dynamic accuracy cable phase stability and thermal drift of the total system Etp Arcsin 27 Cpf 1 x f Cpf2 x f Dpsl Dpfsl x f where Cpfl Cable phase frequency port 1 Cpf2 Cable phase frequency port 2 Dpsl drift phase degree source to port 1 Dpfsl drift phase degree frequency source to port 1 Dynamic Accuracy On the following page is a typical dynamic accuracy and noise curve for the analyzer This curve is based on statistical samples of units built at the factory with an IF BW of 10 Hz Since this curve combines the effects of dynamic accuracy and noise if used in uncertainty calculations the effects of the noise terms in the corresponding equations can be eliminated 4DynAcc dB Dynamic Accuracy dB 20log 1 Dynamic Accuracy linear Dynamic Accuracy linear 10 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties 7 TYPICAL DYNAMIC ACCURACY RF OUT 15 dBm 21 TYPICAL DYNAMIC ACCURACY dB 2 8 2 8 GHz 2o M GHZ sb6155d Figure A I Typical Dynamic Accuracy Determining Expected System Performance Use the uncertainty equations dynamic accuracy calculations in this appendix and tables of system performance values from the Specifications and Measurement Uncertainties chapter in the HP 8719D 20D 22D Network Anal
342. ure that the frequency remains between 50 MHz and 1 1 GHz DAC numbers that set the analyzer below 50 MHz should not be used If greater than 5 dBm for DAC numbers from 50 MHz DAC 3650 to about 1 1 GHz DAC 4095 troubleshoot the cabling from S2J3 to the R sampler A64J2 refer to the overall block diagram a If less than 5 dBm at S2J3 the problem is the A53 mixer amp 57 fixed oscillator S2 or S3 3 Measure power at the A53 end of cable W6 a If power is greater than 8 dBm S8 is good If power is not good replace S3 4 Measure power on the S2 end of W36 If the power is greater than 5 dBm replace S2 a If the power is less than 5 dBm the problem is the A53 mixer or the A57 fixed oscillator Replace the A53 first and if the problem persists replace the A57 Mid Band Problems HP 8722D Only 1 Press SYSTEM NUM MID BAND 4000 Gi SRC tune in the mid band is capable of caning the instrument from about 2 4 to 5 GHz Loss of lock in mid band only may likely be due to a bad cable or connection 2 Referring to the overall block diagram the following components may be at fault a S2 53 A58 M A D S 55 YIG 1 7 20 Source Troubleshooting 3 Since the analyzer phase locked in lowband all of the phase lock circuitry is working Look for low power as a cause of phase lock errors 4 Check power at S2J3 a If the power at S2J3 is less than 0 dBm che
343. vice and Support Options Table of Service Test Equipment Table 1 1 Required Tools T 8 T 10 T 15 and T 25 TORX screwdrivers Flat blade screwdrivers small medium and large 5 16 inch open end torque wrench for SMA nuts 3 16 5 16 and 9 16 inch hex nut drivers 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in lb 2 5 mm hex key driver Soldering iron Non conductive and non ferrous adjustment tool Needle nose pliers Tweezers Antistatic work mat with wrist strap ServiceEquipmentandAnalyzer Options 1 1 Table 1 2 Service Test Equipment 1 of 2 Frequency Counter Frequency Counter Freq 0 050 to 26 6 GHz Accuracy 3 HP 8722D Only ppm Spectrum Analyzer Freq 100 Hz to 22 GHz Power Meter Range 30 to 15 dBm Accuracy 0 05 dB Power Sensor HP 8719D 20D Freq 0 050 to 20 GHz Only Range 80 to 20 dBm Power Sensor HP 87220 Only 0 050 to 40 GHz Range 30 to 20 dBm Digital Voltmeter Resolution 10 mV Bandwidth 100 MHz Rastergraphicscapability Tektronix J16 Tektronix 76508 Tektronix 016 0805 00 PC AT compatible with standard DIN conn Adapter 8719D 20D Only 3 5 mm to Type N f connectors Adapter HP 8722D Only 2 4 mm to 7 mm connectors f to 7 mm connectors 1 Keyboards with a mini DIN connector are compatible with the HP P N C1405 60015 adaptor 1 2 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Table 1 2 Service Test Equipment 2 of 2 Required Equipment Extensio
344. witch to the Normal position In Case of Difficulty 1 If the analyzer does not display DONE then either the serial number that you entered in steps 3 and 4 did not match the required format or a serial number was already stored Check the serial number recognized by the analyzer a Press Praet b Look for the serial number displayed on the analyzer screen c Rerun this adjustment test if the serial number is not displayed 2 Ifthe analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine contact your nearest Hewlett Packard sales and service Office 3 16 Adjustments and Correction Constants Protected Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 50 Analyzer warm up time None This procedure stores the instrument s protected option s information in 7 CPU assembly EEPROMs You can also use this procedure to remove a serial number with the unique keyword as referred to in Serial Number Correction constant Caution Perform this procedure ONLY if the A7 CPU assembly has been replaced and the Serial Number Correction Constants procedure has been performed Remove the instrument bottom cover and record the keyword label s that are located on the exposed sheet metal next to the A7 CPU assembly Note that each keyword is for EACH option installed in the instrument 2 Make sure the A7 jumper switch is in the Alter position ALT m If the instrument does not have a label then conta
345. y 10 Finish the front panel replacement procedure by fastening the remaining screw top left to the front panel 11 Replace the covers refer to Covers in this chapter 12 Connect the line cord and turn the analyzer on Test the disk drive by saving and recalling a file Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 33 A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver a T 15 TORX screwdriver m small slot screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 Removal Remove the bottom cover refer to Covers in this chapter 2 Remove the front panel refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter 3 Reaching the connections from the bottom of the analyzer disconnect the four RF cables attached to the couplers two from the back of the couplers and two from between the couplers 4 Remove the six screws item 1 from the bottom edge of the front panel frame 5 Remove one screw item 2 from the right side of the coupler bracket 6 Remove the coupler nuts item 3 LED Board Removal 7 Remove the three screws item 4 that attach the LED board to the coupler bracket Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note When reconnecting semi rigid cables it is recommended that the connections be torqued to 72 in lb 14 34 Assembly Replacement and Post R
346. y VCO Tune Adjustment Required Equipment and Tools Extender board large oes part of tool kit 08720 60004 SMB m to SMB f Extension 8120 5040 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment centers the reference assembly VCO voltage controlled oscillator in its tuning range 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Remove the instrument top cover 3 If the VCO TUNE adjustment screw is not accessible from the top of the A12 assembly perform the following step If the screw is accessible continue with step 4 In order to access the VCO TUNE adjustment screw on the A12 assembly install the A12 assembly onto the extender board Use SMB extension cables as required the EXT REF cable need not be reconnected now Press Pres on L Tulle 5 Press MARKER and Gae Ref Adjustments and Correction Constants 343 vco Tune Tune Adjust Red 5561684 Figure 3 7 VCO Tune Adjustment Location 6 Adjust VCO TUNE with a non metallic adjustment tool to 0 0 V 500 mV within one division of the reference line The adjustment is sensitive and if out of adjustment may display au irregular waveform If so slowly tune through the entire adjustment range to obtain a flat trace then carefully tune for O OV Once the adjustment is done it should be rechecked with the reference board reinstalled in the instrument and at operating temperature In C
347. y is bad then the problem may be with the display or the cable connecting it to the GSP board This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope for troubleshooting The staircase pattern it produces will quickly show missing or stuck data bits Test Pat 7 Displays the following seven colors Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta and White Test Pat 8 This pattern is intended for use with an external display The pattern displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the 19 GSP board to display 15 colors plus white The numbers written below each bar indicate the tint number used to produce that bar 0 amp 100 pure red 33 pure green 67 pure blue Test Pat 9 Displays the three primary colors Red Green and Blue at four different intensity levels You should see 16 color bands across the screen Starting at the left side of the display the pattern is Black four bands of Red each band increasing in intensity Black four bands of Green each band increasing in intensity Black four bands of Blue each band increasing in intensity Black If any one of the four bits for each color is missing the display will not look as described 10 20 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 71 72 73 74 75 76 Test Pat 10 Displays a character set for showing the user all the different types and sizes of characters available Three sets of characters are drawn in each of the three character sizes 125 characters o
348. ypical counter reading with no AC signal present Anything occurring during bandswitches is not visible Fast moving waveforms may be sensitive to sweep time The analog bus input impedance is about 50K ohms Waveforms up to approximately 200 Hz can be reproduced Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 27 Analog In Menu Select this menu to monitor voltage and frequency nodes using the analog bus and internal counter as explained below To switch on the analog bus and access the analog in menu press The SOLUTION LOW key toggles between low and high resolution n OFF allows you to monitor the analog bus nodes except nodes 1 2 3 4 9 10 12 with external equipment oscilloscope voltmeter etc To do this connect the equipment to the AUX INPUT BNC connector on the rear panel and press AUX OUT until ON is highlighted 2 Caution To prevent damage to the analyzer first connect the signal to the rear panel AUX INPUT and then switch the function ON switches the internal counter off and removes the counter from the display The counter can be switched on with one of the next three keys Note Using the counter slows the sweep The counter bandwidth is 16 MHz unless otherwise noted for a specific node Note OUTPCNTR is the HP IB command to output the counter s frequency data 10 28 Service Key Menus and Error Messages ANALOG BUS switches the counter to monitor the analog bus
349. yzer User s Guide to calculate the expected system performance The following pages explain how to determine the residual errors of a particular system and combine them to obtain total error corrected residual uncertainty values using worksheets provided The uncertainty graphs in the user s guide are examples of the results that can be calculated using this information M8 Determining System Measurement Uncertainties Procedures Use the measurement uncertainty worksheet to calculate the residual uncertainty in transmission and reflection measurements Determine the linear values of the residual error terms and the nominal linear S parameter data of the device under test as described below and enter these values in the worksheets Then use the instructions and equations in the worksheets to combine the residual errors for total system uncertainty performance The resulting total measurement uncertainty values have a confidence factor of 99 9 S parameter Values Convert the S parameters of the test device to their absolute linear terms Noise Floor and Crosstalk If a full 2 port calibration is performed the residual crosstalk term can be ignored Connect an impedance matched load to each of the test ports and measure S21 or S12 Use the statistic function to measure the mean value of the trace Use this value plus one standard deviation as the noise floor value of your system Dynamic Accuracy Determine the absolute linear magnitude dynam

HP 8719D/20D/22D Network Analyzer Service Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents